DesignCAD 16 Reference Manual PDF

DesignCAD 16 Reference Manual PDF
DesignCAD
®
Ve r s i o n 1 6
REFERENCE MANUAL
IMSI US
100 Rowland Blvd.
Novato. CA 94945, USA
Tel: +1-415-878-4000
Fax: +1-415-897-2544
Web Site
www.imsisoft.com
www.designcad.com
The material presented in this publication is copyright-protected © 1986–2005 by IMSI and may not be reproduced
in any form, by any method for any purpose without the prior written consent of IMSI. Information in this document
is subject to change without notice. It is against the law to copy the software, except in accordance with the terms
of the licensing agreement.
PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Please read the terms of the following License Agreement carefully. Your use of the product
signifies your acceptance of the terms of the Agreement. If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, you
should promptly return the package; your money will be refunded. Retain this License Agreement for future reference.
Article 1: License Grant
The software is the intellectual property of IMSI® and its licensors, and is protected by law, including United States copyright
laws and international treaties.
IMSI® grants to you a license:
1.
To use the program on a single machine.
2.
To make a single archival back-up copy of the program in support of your use of the single program on a single machine.
3.
To modify the program and/or merge it into another program for use on a single machine.
4.
To transfer the program to another party if that party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement, and you
do not retain any copies of the program, whether in printed, machine-readable, modified, or merged form. Except as
expressly provided for in this license, you may not copy, modify, or transfer this program.
5.
If the software in this package is licensed as a Site License, it is licensed for use on several machines. Additional master
copies of the software may be made by the licensee, equal to the number of licenses purchased.
No reverse engineering. Except as stated above, YOU MAY NOT MODIFY, TRANSLATE, DISASSEMBLE, OR
DECOMPILE THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY COPY, IN WHOLE OR PART.
Article 2: Term
The license is effective until terminated. You may terminate the license at any time by destroying the program together with
all copies, modifications, and merged portions in any form. The license will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere
in this Agreement, and IMSI® may terminate your license if you fail to comply with this Agreement. You agree, upon such
termination for any reason, to destroy the program together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions in any form.
Article 3: Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitations of Remedies
1.
IMSI® software is licensed to you As Is. You, the consumer, bear the entire risk relating to the quality and performance
of the software. In no event will IMSI® be liable for direct, indirect, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from
any defect in the software, even if IMSI® had reason to know of the possibility of such damage. If the software proves
to have defects, you, and not IMSI®, assume the cost of any necessary service or repair. In the event any liability is
imposed on IMSI®, IMSI's liability to you or any third party shall not exceed the purchase price paid for this product.
2.
Thirty-day limited warranty on disks. IMSI® warrants the enclosed disks to be free of defects in material and
workmanship under normal use for 30 days after purchase. During the 30-day period, you may return a defective disk to
IMSI® with proof of purchase, and it will be replaced without charge, unless the disk is damaged by accident or misuse.
Replacement of a disk is your sole remedy in the event of a defect. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
3.
THE LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION OF ANY
KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE MADE BY IMSI® OR ANY THIRD PARTY INVOLVED IN THE
CREATION, PRODUCTION, DELIVERY, OR LICENSING OF THE SOFTWARE. IMSI® AND ANY SUCH THIRD
PARTY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, ITS
QUALITY, RELIABILITY OR PERFORMANCE; OR ITS MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
4.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties of liability for incidental or consequential
PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENT
damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
Article 4. Product Serial Number and Required Activation:
Many of the software programs IMSI® produces contain a serial number and activation system designed to prevent unlicensed
or illegal use of the software. If this software contains such a system you agree that IMSI® may use these measures to protect
IMSI® against software piracy. Software using this system may contain technology that limits the ability to install and uninstall
the software on a computer to not more than a finite number of times for a finite number of computers. This License and the
software containing this technology require activation as further set forth in the Installation program of the software. The
software using this system will only operate for a finite period of time prior to software activation by you. During activation,
you will be asked to provide your unique product serial number provided with the software over the Internet to verify the
authenticity of the software. If you do not complete the activation within the finite period of time as prompted by the software,
the software will cease to function until activation is complete, which will restore software functionality. In the event that you
are not able to activate the software over the Internet, you may contact IMSI Customer Service via the telephone to complete
the activation process, using the information provided by IMSI® during activation, or as may be set forth in the documentation.
Article 5: General
1.
You may not sub-license, assign, or transfer the license or the program except as expressly provided in this Agreement.
Any attempt otherwise to sub-license, assign, or transfer any of the rights, duties, or obligations hereunder is void.
2.
This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, and you agree that any claims regarding the
software shall be brought in California, and waive any objections to jurisdiction in the US District Court for the Northern
District of California or the California Superior Court for Marin County.
3.
You acknowledge that US laws prohibit the export/re-export of technical data of US origin, including software, and agree
that you will not export or re-export the software without the appropriate US and foreign government license.
COPYRIGHT
DesignCAD 3DMAX, DesignCAD Express and the IMSI logo are registered trademarks of IMSI.
Adobe, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated, which may be registered in certain
jurisdictions.
Flash is a registered trademark of Macromedia.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 : Introduction
About DesignCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
2
2
Chapter 2 : General Information
DesignCAD User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Units of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2-D Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3-D Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Ruler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Cursor (Crosshair) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Grid and Snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Cursor Movement Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
DesignCAD Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Accessing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
File Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Opening, Closing, and Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Cursor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Color Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Menu Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Keyboard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dimension Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
File Location Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Text Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Grid Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Layer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Material Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Light Source Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Toolbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Drawing Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Setting the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fit to Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fit to All Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Aerial View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Refreshing and Regenerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Window Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Macros and Executables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Macro Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Stop Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Continue Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Pause Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Record Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Macro Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Macro Execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Stop Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Command History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Run Executable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Load Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Save Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Scan Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Select Scanner Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Auto Trace Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Printing and Paper Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Paper Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Paper Space Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Batch Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
vi
For updates and additional information,
Table of Contents
Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Chapter 3 : 2D Drawing Tools
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Pointmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tickmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Snap Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Point XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Point Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Point Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Gravity Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Point Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Double Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MultiLine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Editing Multilines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Ortho Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Ortho Line-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sketch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Bezier Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Parallel by Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Perpendicular to a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Perpendicular from a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Tangent to a Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Tangent from a Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tangent between Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Surface Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Contour Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
contact us at www.designcad.com
vii
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Arc (Radius, Begin-End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Arc (3-Point). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Arc (Center, Begin, End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Arc (Endpoints, Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Tangent Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Quarter Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Semi Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Elliptical Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Elliptical Arc (Center, Axes, Angles). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Circle (Center, Outside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Circle (Diameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Circle (3-Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Circle (Center-Radius) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Circle Tangent to 2 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Circle Tangent to 3 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Polygon (Edge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Polygon (Center-Vertex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Parallelogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Perpendicular Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Chapter 4 : 3D Objects
Moving Around in a 3D Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Hemisphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Truncated Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Pyramid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rounded Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
viii
For updates and additional information,
Table of Contents
Rounded Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Ellipsoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Extrude Along a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Surface Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Surface Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3D (Solid) Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Solid Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Solid Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Solid Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Solid Exclusive Or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Solid Segregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Slice by Curved Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Cross Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Solid Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Solid Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Solid Explode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Hammer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Working Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Set Working Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Working Plane Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Reset Working Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3D View Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
View Toolbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Set View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Set View by Drawing Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Save Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Object Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Light and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Animation and Walk Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Animation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Walk Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Chapter 5 : Annotation
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
contact us at www.designcad.com
ix
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Dimension Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Dimension Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Dimension Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Dimension Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Dimension Diameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Dimension Radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Dimension Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dimension Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dimension Extended. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Dimension Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Dimension Radius Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Dimension Distance Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Dimension Center Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Auto Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Text and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Text (and Attribute) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Text Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Text Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Attribute Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Balloon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Pullout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Hatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Hatch Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Hatch Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Hatch Pattern Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Custom Hatch Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
VRML WWW Anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Chapter 6 : Editing and Measuring
Selecting Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Selection Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
x
For updates and additional information,
Table of Contents
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Select Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Select Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Select Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Selection Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Polygon Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Entity Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Undo, Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cut, Copy, Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Editing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Selection Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Trimming and Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Chamfering / Filleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Dividing Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Converting Entities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
2D Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Section Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Line Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Angle & Distance between Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Angle between Two Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Surface Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Chapter 7 : Groups, Blocks, and Symbols
Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Group Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Group Explode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Block Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
contact us at www.designcad.com
xi
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Block Insert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Purge Unused Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Drawing Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Save As Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Load Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Symbol Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Door and Window Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Appendix A
Custom Hatch Patterns and Line Styles
Custom Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hacking Custom Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Line Style Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Hatch Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
251
251
253
254
For updates and additional information,
1
Introduction
About DesignCAD
DesignCAD is a comprehensive computer-aided
design package that incorporates a full range of
2D and 3D drawing functions.
You can use DesignCAD to create drawings for
any assignment, from simple to complex, and the
finished drawing can be printed using any printer
or plotter that the various 32-bit versions of
Windows support.
DesignCAD can be customized to fit your
particular application. You can create your own
Custom Toolbox and even write your own
DesignCAD commands using BasicCAD!
With its numerous high-end features,
DesignCAD compares favorably with CAD
systems costing thousands of dollars. Unlike
other high-end systems though, DesignCAD is
easy to learn and use. With a little practice,
virtually anyone can make detailed drawings of
professional quality using DesignCAD.
In addition to its 2D Mode, DesignCAD is a true
three-dimensional CAD system. You can use it to
construct realistic 3D models of your projects.
You can show them in wireframe view, with
hidden lines removed, or with full-color
shading--from any viewing angle. You can also
create animation files which step the viewer
around your drawing in smooth increments. For
example, you could start with an aerial view of a
house, descend to ground level, and then walk all
around it. You can even assign material properties
to your creations, placing a brass doorknob on an
oak door, or creating a lavatory of rose marble
with chrome fittings.
If you have DesignCAD 3000, DesignCAD 2000,
DesignCAD 97, or any DesignCAD 2D or
DesignCAD 3D program, and DesignCAD 3D
MAX, you can interchange drawings between the
two applications. You can take a cross-section of
a complex beam which you may have created in
DesignCAD 2D, load the cross-section into
DesignCAD 3D MAX and extrude it into a beam.
Then you can save the extruded beam as a
DesignCAD 3D MAX drawing, even with hidden
lines removed! If you want to go a step further,
you can extrude your floor plan into an elevation,
add a roof, and save a perspective view back into
DesignCAD 2D format.
DesignCAD imports and exports drawings in
DWG, DXF, HPGL, and IGES formats, and also
reads and writes Windows Metafiles.
DesignCAD can also export WPG, RIB and WRL
formats. Other imported formats include HPGL
and XYZ. DesignCAD can pass drawing
information to and from the Clipboard and export
OLE 2.0 objects to applications that support
them.
System Requirements
To use DesignCAD 3D MAX, you must have, at
a minimum, the following hardware and software
installed in your computer:
• Approximately 27 to 30 megabytes of hard
drive space for a compact installation.
• Microsoft Windows 2000, or Windows XP.
1
DesignCAD Reference Manual
• Although not required to run DesignCAD,
the following hardware is recommended for
better performance:
Pentium processor.
at least 16 megabytes of RAM.
SuperVGA graphics card capable of 256 or
more colors.
SuperVGA monitor capable of at least
800x600 resolution.
Typographical
Conventions
This manual uses a few special fonts, phrases, and
symbols to refer to commands and instructions.
Mouse
When the word "click" is used alone, it means
"left-click," or to press the left mouse button.
When it is necessary to use the right mouse
button, the manual states that explicitly. Phrases
such as "click the right mouse button" and
"right-click the mouse" assume that the Enable
Right Click Popup Menu option in the General
Options (see General Options) has been toggled
off.
Keyboard
The keys on your keyboard may not be labeled
exactly as they are in this manual. All key names
are shown using bold, sans serif type. For
example, the "Control" key is shown as Ctrl and
the "Enter" key is shown as Enter.
2
Keys are sometimes used in combinations. For
example, Ctrl+F means to hold down the Ctrl key
while pressing the F key.
"Arrow keys" is the collective name for the up
arrow, down arrow, left arrow, and right arrow
keys.
To choose a command from a menu, you can use
the mouse or press a key combination.
Technical Support
If you have a question about DesignCAD 3D
MAX, please look in the Reference Manual or the
on-line Help for the solution. Remember to check
the Index and Table of Contents.
If you cannot find the answer to your question in
the documentation, email the DesignCAD
Technical
Support
Department:
[email protected]
When emailing for support, please provide the
following information:
• The serial number, version name of
DesignCAD (e.g., DesignCAD 3D MAX,
version 14), and release date.
• The release date is located in the About
DesignCAD 3D MAX window. To open the
About DesignCAD window, select the
About DesignCAD command from the
Help menu.
• The type of hardware you are using.
For updates and additional information,
2
General Information
DesignCAD User
Interface
The DesignCAD drawing screen is shown below.
Descriptions of the components follow. For
details on how to maximize, minimize, open, and
close windows, refer to your Windows
documentation.
Snap Toolbox: Contains commands to set points
at specific locations in the drawing, such as
midpoints and intersections.
Status Bar: Displays quick help on using the
current command. The Status Bar may be
replaced with a progress bar for certain
commands, such as the Shading command.
Toolboxes: Contains a number of icons to speed
the selection of frequently used commands and
functions.
Units of Measurement
Menu: Options / Units of Measurement
Lets you specify the base units of measurement
for three sets of circumstances:
Command Menu: Contains the drop-down
menu selections. From the Command Menu you
can pick every available DesignCAD command.
Coordinate Bar: Displays the cursor's location
in 2D or 3D space depending on whether 2D
Mode is active or not. If you are executing a
drawing command, it displays the distance moved
from the last point set as DX, DY, and DZ (DZ is
not displayed in 2D Mode).
Main Toolbox: Contains graphic icons for the
most frequently used drawing commands.
Scroll Bars: Let you pan across a drawing that is
larger than the screen size.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Rescale to New Units: This causes objects to be
correctly sized when the units are changed. If this
option is off an object 1cm is changed to 1mm or
1in when the unit type is changed. If the option is
on the 1cm object would be converted to a 10mm
or 2.54in object.
Units for Current Drawing: Sets (or changes)
the default base units for the current drawing.
Changing the current drawing's base units does
3
DesignCAD Reference Manual
not affect the numeric value of the distance
between two points - in other words, if you switch
from inches to miles, the length of what was
originally a 10-inch line is now 10 miles; no
attempt is made to scale the drawing from the
original base unit to the new one.
Default Units for New Drawings: The default
base unit that will be used for any new drawings
you create.
Default Units for Opening Unitless Drawings:
Affects the way unitless symbols and blocks are
imported into the drawing. When loading a
unitless symbol or block, the imported object's
base units are assumed to be the same as those
specified by this setting.
If a unit-based symbol or block is loaded or
merged into a unit-based drawings, the symbol's
or block's base units are converted to those of the
host unit, so that the symbol is imported at the
correct "real-world" size. When loading a
unit-based symbol or block into a unitless
drawing, the symbol or block is also assumed to
be unitless (for example, a distance of 10 base
units in the symbol becomes a distance of 10 in
the unitless drawing).
When entering a distance in an edit box, such as
the DX, DY, or DZ fields in Point Relative, a
plain decimal number is assumed to be in the
current units of measurement. If a value is entered
in feet-and-inches format, such as 3' 2", then that
distance is converted to the current base unit of
measurement. If the current base unit is inches,
for example, an entry of 3' 2" becomes 38 inches;
if the current base unit is meters, the entry is
converted to 0.9652 meters. If the drawing is
unitless, the base unit is implicitly treated as feet
4
anytime a feet-and-inches distance entry is
specified (in other words, the example distance
entry of 3' 2" is converted to 3.166666667 units.)
Dimension commands (see Dimensions) will
normally dimension in the current base unit, so
long as a decimal or fractional text format is
chosen for the dimension command. However, if
a Feet-and-Inches text format is chosen, then the
displayed distance will be converted from the
current base unit to feet and inches. If a
Feet-and-Inches dimension text format is chosen
in a unitless drawing, the distance is calculated as
though the base unit were feet.
Drawing to Scale
When you draw to scale in DesignCAD, you are
usually measuring the objects in a given base unit
of measure. DesignCAD doesn't care whether
your base unit is meters or miles or even leagues.
What's important is that you use the same base
unit throughout the drawing.
Let's say that you're drawing a house and the front
wall is 32 feet long. To DesignCAD, it is 32
Drawing Units. You can draw a line by choosing
the Line command, setting the first point (click
the mouse or press Ins), then specifying that the
next point is 32 Units away.
But what if the next item you measure in the same
drawing is 10 centimeters tall? If you draw it at a
height of 10 units, it will be much too large. Why?
Because centimeters and feet are different units.
In this example, you would need to convert the
centimeters to feet, and then tell DesignCAD the
size of the item in feet.
The key point is not to mix units. If feet are
convenient, call out all distances in the drawing in
feet. If centimeters are convenient, measure
For updates and additional information,
General Information
everything in centimeters. As long as you're
consistent, all is well. If you use feet, many of the
commands allow you to enter distances in feet
and inches: for example, to specify a line 9 feet 5
inches long, set the first point, then enter 9'5" in
the DX field of the Point Relative command.
Printing to Scale
What about printing to scale? The Print window
(see Print) shows the paper units selected and the
scale of the printout. Scale here represents the
number of paper units it takes to print one
Drawing Unit.
Suppose we have drawn a 10-inch box, which we
specified as 10 units when we drew it. Now we
want to print it at 0.25 scale. The paper units
default to inches, and our drawing is also in
inches. Therefore it takes 0.25 inches on paper to
represent one inch in the drawing. Our 10-inch
box comes out 2.5 inches long on paper.
If our box had been specified at 10 feet instead of
10 inches, then it would take 1/4 inch of paper to
represent 1 foot in the drawing. This is a
real-world scale of 1/48, or 0.0208333. But to
DesignCAD units are just units, so the scale is
still shown as 0.25. It took 0.25 paper units
(inches) to represent one Drawing Unit (feet).
Printing scale is the length on paper that will
represent one Drawing Unit.
We can show it as an equation:
True Scale = Scale/Ratio (where Ratio is the
number of paper units in one Drawing Unit)
In the example above, our scale is .25. The paper
unit is in inches, the Drawing Unit in feet. Since
there are twelve inches in one foot, the Ratio
equals twelve.
contact us at www.designcad.com
True Scale = Scale/Ratio = .25/12 = 1/48
What if your paper is too small to print at the scale
you need? No problem. DesignCAD can print out
your drawing in panels, all to scale, which you
can then assemble into a composite drawing.
Here is a list of common Architectural and
Engineering scales.
Architectural
Scale NameActual Decimal Value
1/16" = 1'.0625
3/32" = 1'.09375
1/8" = 1'.125
3/16" = 1'.1875
1/4" = 1'.25
3/8" = 1'.375
1/2" = 1'.5
3/4" = 1'.75
1" = 1'1.0
1.5" = 1'1.5
3" = 1'3.0
Engineering
Scale NameActual Decimal Value
1:1000
1:500
1:333
1:100
1:50
1:20
1:10
1:5
1:3
1:2
2:1
3:1
5:1
.001
.002
.003
.01
.02
.05
.1
.2
.33
.5
2
3
5
5
DesignCAD Reference Manual
2-D Mode
Ruler
Menu: Options / 2-D Mode
Menu: View / Ruler
Toolbar Icon:
Displays or hides vertical and horizontal rulers
beside the drawing window, when in 2D Mode.
You can set ruler divisions with the View Options
command. See View Options.
Shifts the viewer perspective to a front view and
treats operations as if they were only occurring in
2D space. This makes it very easy to use
DesignCAD to draw just as you would in a
regular 2D drafting package.
If your drawing contains 3D objects, it will still be
a 3D drawing; however the cursor will only move
parallel to the X and Y axes, with the Z coordinate
set to zero. This makes it very easy to add 2D
information to your drawing.
NOTE: In 2D Mode, the Trim commands ignore the 3D
aspects of any existing lines, and treat them as flat
projections onto the XY plane. This means you can trim
lines that would never meet in 3D space against each
other's Front-View projections in 2D space. This is a
powerful feature, but you must pay careful attention to
what you are doing.
3-D Mode
Colors
DesignCAD gives you 64 basic drawing colors.
By default there are seven base colors in eight
deepening shades each, and eight other lively
colors. However, if the supplied colors don't meet
your needs or fit your tastes, you can create your
own.
You can open the Color Toolbox in the View
options (see View Options) or by clicking the icon
on the main toolbar:
The Color Toolbox has eight color buttons, an
"A" button, a "pointing finger" button, and a
"color palette" button.
Toolbox Icon:
Shifts the perspective into 3D mode, and all 3D
commands become available.
6
The A (for "Apply") button applies the current
drawing color to the items you have selected. The
pointing finger is used to grab the color of the
selected object and make that the current drawing
color. The color palette lets you create a custom
color based on the current drawing color. The
other eight buttons are available drawing colors.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
How do you get to all 64 colors? Click on one of
the color buttons and hold down the button. This
opens the color drawer, which shows eight colors
hidden under one tool. These work like the tools
in the Main Toolbox: click, hold down, slide the
pointer over to the color you want, and release.
The color you picked shows up at the bottom of
the Main Toolbox, indicating that it is now the
active drawing color. It also becomes the top
color in its drawer.
If you want to edit a color, make that color the top
one in its drawer. Then double-click on it to
activate the Custom Color command (this
command is also available through the Options
menu - see Custom Colors).
Cursor (Crosshair)
Menu: Options / Crosshair
Shortcut Key: F5
A toggle function that indicates the cursor's
position with cross hairs in all views.
Using the Command
Using the Crosshair command helps you easily
distinguish the cursor's position, in relation to
objects, from several angles. This makes it easy to
see the cursor's location in all three dimensions.
contact us at www.designcad.com
When you choose the command, the cross hairs
become visible on the drawing screen. To remove
the cross hairs, choose the Crosshair command.
Grid and Snapping
The display grid is the mesh that is displayed
while working, so that you can visualize the size
and scale of your entities. The snap grid
represents the increments to which the cursor will
snap, when the snap grid is enabled. Snaps are
points to which the cursor will jump, such as the
midpoint of a line or the center of an arc.
Snap Toolbox
The Snap Toolbox (which is also dockable)
contains a convenient set of tools for snapping to
precise locations in your drawing. By default, it is
displayed to the left of the drawing area. You can
7
DesignCAD Reference Manual
click on these tools even if you are in the middle
of a drawing command. The F10 key can be used
to toggle the snap preview on and off.
another. If disabled, then choosing a snap
command cancels the execution of an active snap
command.
For example, you can start Midpoint2, then use
Line Snap for the first point required for
MidPoint2, and Intersect-2 for the second point).
If Interruptible Snap Mode is disabled,
choosing a snap command cancels the execution
of an active snap command (e.g., if you start
Midpoint2, then select and execute Line Snap, a
line snap will be performed and the original
Midpoint2 selection will be ignored).
Clicking the Off button turns off any selected
snap modes. For explanations of the specific
snaps, see Snap Points.
NOTE: When Snap commands are selected from the
Snap Toolbox, you have the option of making them set
a point or just move to the position (Move Cursor Only
option). However, if you select a Snap command from
the Point menu, a point will always be set.
When Interruptible Snap is off, any snap
command cancels any active snap command. In
the example above if you start Midpoint-2, then
use Gravity snap, the Midpoint-2 snap will be
cancelled, and one point will immediately be set
at the Gravity snap location.
Running Snap
Menu: Options / Running Snap Settings
Toolbox Icon:
Interruptible Snap
Menu: Options / Interruptible Snap Mode
Toolbox Icon:
When enabled, the behavior of the snap
commands is changed so that one or more snap
commands can be used to set the points for
8
For updates and additional information,
General Information
A toggle function that turns Running Snap Mode
off or on, and specifies which snap locations are
anticipated as the cursor moves.
NOTE: Some settings in the Preferences (see
Preferences) will also affect the Running Snap preview
calculations. If you plan to use Running Snaps a lot,
you may find it more efficient to turn off the Preference
options for snapping to entities in a block or symbol or
lines in a hatch pattern. Running snaps may also cause
difficulties in 3D mode, especially when 2D Selection
Mode is active.
Grid Settings
Menu: Options / Grid Settings
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+G
Opens the Grid Options folder, which contains
options for both the Display Grid and the Snap
Grid. The Grid sizes are measured in Drawing
Units. See Grid Options.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Display Grid
Menu: Options / Display Grid
Shows a grid on the drawing screen which can be
used as a reference for drawing new objects or
comparing the size of existing objects.
To change grid properties, see Grid Options.
Set Grid Center
Menu: Options / Set Grid Center
Point 1: Set a point for the display grid center
Sets the location for the center of the display grid.
Using the Command
Choose the Set Grid Center command. Set a
point anywhere on the drawing screen to specify
the new center of the grid.
The display grid can be oriented on the XY, XZ,
or YZ plane. To change grid properties, see Grid
Options.
9
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Snap Grid
Menu: Options / Snap Grid
Shortcut Key: G
automatically shifts the second point of the pair
so that the points are aligned parallel to the
nearest matching axis.
Toggles the snap grid off and on. With Snap Grid
enabled, any time you set a point with the mouse,
the point is set at the nearest location on the grid.
Snap Preview
Menu: Options / Snap Preview
Shortcut Key: F10
Toggle the snap preview on and off. If a snap
command is used in conjunction with a drawing
command when the snap preview is enabled, a
small box indicates the point to which the cursor
will snap if the left mouse button is clicked at the
current cursor location.
Cursor Movement Options
This section covers two ways you can constrain
cursor movements - orthogonal mode and angle
constraints.
Orthogonal Mode
Menu: Options / Orthogonal Mode
Shortcut Key: H
Toolbox Icon:
Angle Constraint Mode
Toolbox Icon:
Restricts point placement in drawing commands
to a specified set of angles from the previous
point. The set of angles used may be set using the
Angle Constraint Settings Command.
Using the Command
Activate Angle Constraint Mode. Select a
drawing command and set a beginning point. Set
the number of points required or desired to draw
the entity. Angle Constraint Mode will remain
active until the command is selected again to turn
it off.
Example: Draw a line with segments at 0, 30, 90,
150, 180, 210, 270, or 330 degrees.
Constrains consecutive points in drawing
commands so that the alignment of a pair of
points is parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis. If you set
points that are not aligned parallel to one of these
axes in Orthogonal Mode, DesignCAD
10
Activate Angle Constraint Mode. Select the
Line command and set a point on the screen.
Move the cursor around slowly. Notice that the
rubber-band line only moves in one of eight
directions. Set a point for the body of the line.
Slowly move the cursor around. Again, notice
For updates and additional information,
General Information
that the rubber-band line only moves in one of
eight directions. Set another point. Press Enter to
complete the command and add the line to the
drawing.
Angle Constraint Settings
Menu: Options / Angle Constraint Settings
Used to change the settings used in Angle
Constraint Mode. Default settings may be used or
custom settings may be added and used.
Set as Startup Default: Makes the current set of
angle constraints the default set. The next time
you load the program, you won't have to load this
set of angle constraints to use them. They will be
used when Angle Constraint Mode is enabled.
Close and Apply Changes: Closes the window.
DesignCAD is ready to use the selected set of
angle constraints as the current one.
Using the Command
Cancel: Closes the window. DesignCAD is ready
to continue using the set of angle constraints that
was being used before the window was opened.
Select the Angle Constraint Settings command
and the following window appears:
Add Custom Setting: Opens a window that lets
you add sets of custom angle constraints.
• Angles: A list of the angles that will be used
in the new set of angle constraints.
Set as Active Angle Constraint: Sets the
selected set of angle constraints as the current
one.
Release Active Angle Constraint: Disables all
angle constraints.
• Name and Description: The name and
description that will be used for the new set
of angle constraints.
• Angle to Add: Enter an angle in this box and
then click on the Add to List button to add it
to the angle constraint set.
• Delete from List: Removes the selected
angle measurement from the list of angles in
the Angles area.
contact us at www.designcad.com
11
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Delete Selected Setting: Deletes the currently
selected set of angle constraints. Only custom sets
of angle constraints may be deleted.
Edit Selected Setting: Opens the currently
selected set of angle constraints so that it may be
edited. Only custom sets of angle constraints may
be edited.
Calculator
Menu: Tools / Calculator
Allows you to perform calculations on the screen.
Once the computation is made, you can copy the
result and paste it into a drawing.
Using the Command
Choose the Calculator command. In the
calculation box enter the values and operators for
the calculation. Then press Enter or click on the
Compute button. DesignCAD makes the
calculation and displays it in the box. Click the
Close button to end the command.
The expression entered in the calculation box can
contain a formula or expression. The following
are examples of valid expressions:
45*23
(6+23)*4
SQRT(9)
SIN(45)
/ Division
^ Raises a number to a power (2 ^ 3 = 8)
Inserting a Calculation into a
Drawing
Select the text in the calculation box if it is not
already selected. Press Ctrl+C to copy the text to
the Clipboard. Click the Close button to return to
your drawing.
Next, choose the Paste command (Ctrl+V). As
soon as you do, a rubber-band text box appears,
showing how the text will be inserted. Set a point
for the lower-left corner of the text. The text is
inserted into the drawing.
You can also insert the results of a calculation into
a drawing by using one of the text commands
which allow you to change the font, style,
alignment, size, and angle. First, copy the text
from the calculation box to the clipboard. Then
choose the Text command (see Text) and use
paste to enter the text into the proper fields.
DesignCAD Workspace
The Workspace refers to a set of properties of the
user interface. You can define multiple
workspaces for different users, or for different
work scenarios.
Setup DesignCAD Workspace
Setup DesignCAD Workspace Command
The expression can contain mathematical
functions and the following operators:
Menu: File / Workspace Configuration / Setup
DesignCAD Workspace
+ Addition
The Setup DesignCAD Workspace command is
used to configure various sets of DesignCAD
settings so that they can be saved to disk and then
retrieved in the future. This feature lets you
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
12
For updates and additional information,
General Information
simply open a set of options instead of having to
go through and set many options at the beginning
of every drawing session.
Set as Default: Sets the current workspace
template so it will be opened automatically at the
beginning of every drawing session.
Using the Command
Remove Default: Reverts to the original
DesignCAD settings.
Select this command and the following window
appears:
Startup Details
This group of settings controls the startup settings
for DesignCAD drawing sessions.
To save a group of settings in the current
Workspace template, place an X in the box to the
left of the group name by clicking on it with the
mouse. To remove a group of settings from the
current Workspace template, click on the box to
remove the X in the box to the left of the group
name. If you want to change a group of settings,
click on the group name to highlight it and then
click on the Details button.
Save Workspace: Save the settings as a
Workspace. The Save DesignCAD Workspace
window opens. Enter a name for the file and
where you want to save it. Then click Save.
Use this window to define the startup macro,
paper size, margins, 2D/3D mode, units, and
coordinate system.
Load Workspace: Base a new Workspace on an
existing one.
Details: To change a group of settings, click on
the group name to highlight it and then click the
Details button.
contact us at www.designcad.com
13
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Appearance Details
Cursor Details
This group of settings controls the colors of
various DesignCAD elements.
The size of the cursor and the small and large step
sizes that will be used in the current DesignCAD
Workspace.
Custom Colors Details
This group of settings determines the custom
colors that will be available in the drawings that
use the current DesignCAD Workspace.
Click on the color sample to the right of the name
of the element for which the color is to be
changed and select the new color from the palette
that appears.
Paper Space Template Details
Select the Paper Space Template to be used with
the current DesignCAD Workspace.
Display Grid / Snap Grid Details
This group of settings determines the settings for
the Display and Snap Grids that will be used
when the current DesignCAD Workspace is
selected.
Custom Menu Details
Select the Customized Menu file to be used by
clicking on the Browse button.
Custom Keyboard Details
Select the Customized Keyboard file to be by
clicking on the Browse button.
Custom Toolboxes Details
Select the Customized Toolboxes file to be used
by clicking on the Browse button.
Text Details
The default color and style of regular text and
Attribute text for the different layers of drawings.
Dimension Details
The options for the Dimensioning commands,
Pullout command, and Balloon commands.
14
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Pointmark Details
Using the Command
The default options for pointmarks.
Choose the command, and Select the workspace
template you wish to use and click OK. A window
appears to ask if you want to use the selected
template as the default workspace template (when
new drawings are started and in subsequent
drawing sessions). space Command
Screen Configuration
Menu: File / Screen Configuration / Save
Hatch Details
The default options for line hatching.
Saves the screen configuration of the current
drawing. The window configuration and the view
configuration for each window are saved with this
command.
Using the Command
Choose the command, and the Save View File
box appears. In the File Name box enter the name
of the view to save. In the Save In box select the
location where you want to store the view. Then
click Save.
You can then load a saved configuration using
this command:
Load DesignCAD Workspace
Menu: File / Screen Configuration / Load
Load DesignCAD Workspace Command
Accessing Commands
Menu: File / Workspace Configuration / Load
DesignCAD Workspace
There are several ways to access commands command menu, keyboard shortcuts, toolbox
icons, and the command line.
Used to load or change a DesignCAD Workspace.
contact us at www.designcad.com
15
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Command Menu
Keyboard Shortcuts
To access menu commands using the mouse, click
on the menu title of interest. This action pulls
down the list of commands available on that
menu. You can now pick the command you want
by clicking on it.
For those who like to take shortcuts, many of the
commands in DesignCAD have a shortcut key.
It's often much faster to go directly to a command
using a shortcut rather than using the Command
Menu. For example, by pressing Ctrl+O you can
bypass the menu and immediately use the Open
command.
Keyboard shortcuts are listed beside the menu
commands. For example, Fit to Window has
CTRL+W beside it on the View menu.
For the keyboard-conscious, menu commands are
also available from the keyboard. You access a
menu by pressing Alt+letter, where letter is the
underlined letter in the menu title. To access the
File menu, for example, press Alt+F. You then see
a list of available commands, each of which also
has an underlined letter. To choose a specific
command when the menu is open, press the
underlined letter in the command name. To use
the Open command in the File menu, for
example, press Alt+F, then O.
To customize keyboard shortcuts, see Keyboard
Options.
Toolboxes
DesignCAD has a convenient set of icon
toolboxes that provides push-button access to
many frequently needed tasks. To use one of these
tools, click on it with the mouse.
To see the commands stored in a drawer, click on
the visible tool and continue to depress the mouse
button. After a moment, the drawer slides open,
revealing the tools it contains. Keeping the mouse
button down, move the cursor onto the tool you
want to use, and then release the mouse button.
16
For updates and additional information,
General Information
As you move the cursor over a new tool, the
Status Bar at the bottom of the screen gives a brief
description of that tool.
Using the Command
Press the Spacebar to display the Command Line.
Enter the name of the command or alias in the box
and press Enter. If any options are associated with
the command you have chosen, the window
appears as usual. Press the Tab key to enter the
window and navigate to the option you want. Set
the options and then press Enter to return to the
drawing.
NOTE: Many of the commands let you enter the
parameters for the command on the same line in the
Command box.
The most recently used command in a drawer is
the one that shows in the toolbox. Like most of
the toolboxes in DesignCAD, the Main Toolbox
can be docked to an edge of the drawing screen or,
if already docked, pulled loose to float anywhere
on screen.
Command Line Entry
Menu: none
Shortcut Key: Spacebar
Lets you choose a command by typing the name
of the command, or an alias, in the Command
Line.
With this method you don't have to select
commands from the menu or by other means.
Also, the program keeps a list of recently entered
commands. Once you have entered a command,
you can easily choose it again by pressing the
Spacebar and using the up or down arrow keys to
scroll to the command.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Editing the Command File
The program associates command names and
aliases
with
command
IDs
in
the
MACROCMD.INI file. When you enter a custom
command name, the program still identifies it
with the real command name. This gives you a
great deal of flexibility in customizing
commands. You can even have multiple aliases
for the same command.
Commented lines begin with a semicolon. They
are not allowed on the same line as an alias.
Please use caution when editing the
MACROCMD.INI file. Make a backup of the file
before you try to edit it. Edit only the Add Custom
Command section, part of which is shown below.
If you edit other sections, you may cause
commands to stop working correctly.
;======ADD CUSTOM COMMAND NAME
ENTRIES HERE======
;
;These sample commands are laid out following
the menu's structure.
17
DesignCAD Reference Manual
SvA=ID_SAVEFILE_AS
Press the Spacebar to activate the Command
Line. Start the Line command by entering “Line.”
Then press the Enter key. Next, press the
Spacebar again. In the Command Line enter
pointxyz 0,0,0 and press Enter to set the first
point. Press the Spacebar a third time. The
previous entry (pointxyz 0,0,0) remains in the
Command Line. Now change the 0,0,0 to 10,10,0
and press Enter. That sets the second point. Press
Enter again to end the Line command. The line is
drawn between those two points.
SvS=ID_SELECT_SAVE
Command Window
Creating an Alias
Toolbar Icon:
;
; File Menu
;
Nu=ID_DCAD_FILE_NEW
Ld=ID_DCAD_FILE_OPEN
QF=ID_DCAD_FILE_CLOSE
Sv=ID_SAVEFILE
First, create a blank line for the new alias. Then
enter the alias you want to use followed by the
equals sign (without spaces) and the actual name
of the DesignCAD command. It is not necessary
to comment out the existing alias.
Suppose you want to add Clo as an alias for the
File Close command. Go to the end of the
following line:
QF=ID_DCAD_FILE_CLOSE
Press Enter to start a new line. Now enter the new
alias as shown below:
clo=ID_DCAD_FILE_CLOSE
You may, of course, copy the DesignCAD
command name and paste it in instead of typing it
yourself. Save the file when you are sure the
information is correct. The next time you start
DesignCAD, it reads the file you have edited.
Then you can press the Spacebar and enter “clo”
in the Command Line to close a file.
A toggle which displays or hides the window for
the current drawing command.
Using the Command
Select a drawing command. The Command
Window button is pressed in, and if there are any
options for that command the window appears.
Click on the Command Window button to release
it, and the window for the drawing command is
hidden and your view of the drawing screen is
unobscured. If you decide that you need to set the
options for the drawing command, click the
button again and the window will reappear.
Example: Draw a line from the origin (0,0) to
(10,10).
18
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Getting Help
Tip of the Day
There are several ways to get help with
DesignCAD while you are working.
Menu: Help / Tip of the Day
DesignCAD Help
Opens the Tip of the Day window, showing
various tips for using DesignCAD.
Menu: Help / DesignCAD Help
Shortcut Key: F1
To get help quickly as you work, choose the
DesignCAD Help command. When the Help
window appears, you can display information on
DesignCAD commands, or get a definition for a
term you do not understand. You can also get help
whenever you see an error message or if you need
more information about an option in a window.
With Help, you can:
• Search for topics associated with a word or
phrase.
• View instructions in Help while you perform
a task in DesignCAD.
• Add your own notes to a Help topic.
• Mark topics you often use so you can jump
to them quickly.
• Print a copy of a Help topic.
You can view Help side by side with a drawing so
that both windows remain fully visible while you
work. To display Help and your drawing at the
same time, resize the windows so they do not
overlap.
contact us at www.designcad.com
To view another tip, click Next. Click Close to
close the Tip of the Day and return to
DesignCAD.
If the Show Tips at Startup option is checked,
the Tip of the Day will appear when you start
DesignCAD.
About DesignCAD
Menu: Help / About DesignCAD
Displays information about the program,
including the DesignCAD release date, who the
program is registered to, and the serial number.
The command also offers a direct Internet links
19
DesignCAD Reference Manual
the DesignCAD home page on the World Wide
Web. You can also find information about your
computer system.
New
Menu: File / New
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+N
Toolbox Icon:
Opens a new drawing document. It does not close
any drawing that you already have open.
Using the Command
Choose the New command. The New File
Wizard appears.
DesignCAD Website: If you have an internet
connection, you can go directly to the
DesignCAD home page.
System Info: Basic information about your
computer’s operating system, memory, and free
space on your hard drives.
File Options
This section covers what you can do with files:
opening, closing, saving, importing, and
exporting.
Opening, Closing, and
Saving
Before starting to work in DesignCAD, you need
to know how to create a new file, open an existing
file, and save files.
20
Open a Recently Used File: Browse for or
select a DesignCAD file from a list of the most
recently used files. Once you have selected a file,
click OK to open it.
Create a New Drawing: Start a new
drawing. A blank drawing appears on the screen,
but it does not close the current drawing. You can
switch from one drawing to the next using
Ctrl+F6.
Paper Space Template: Start a new
drawing using a Paper Space template. Select the
template you wish to use and click OK.
Specific Settings: Start the wizard that
guides you through a series of options for a new
drawing.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
• The first step lets you select format and
precision
settings
for
distance
measurements.
Choose the Open command.
• The next step lets you select format and
precision settings for angular measurements.
• The third step deals with Snap Grid and
Display Grid settings; it also allows you to
set the width of the drawing screen in Units.
• The fourth step lets you set print options,
these include: Print Units, Paper Margins,
and Paper Orientation. Large and Small
Cursor Step Sizes are set in the fifth step.
If the Save as Default option is enabled, all
subsequent new drawings will use the settings
you have selected. If this option is disabled, the
settings will only be used in the drawing you are
starting. Once you have finished setting all of the
options, click Finish.
Show New File Wizard: Uncheck this if you do
not want to see the New File Wizard again. If you
decide to turn the New File Wizard back on later,
select Options / Options, open the View tab, and
check Show New File Wizard.
Open
Menu: File / Open
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+O
Toolbox Icon:
Opens a drawing file and loads it onto the screen
as the current drawing.
Using the Command
contact us at www.designcad.com
In the Look In box select the location of the file.
In the Files of Type box select the type of file you
want to open. Enter or select the name of the file
you want to open. Click the Open button when
you have entered the necessary information.
If you already have a drawing on the screen, it
will not close that drawing but will open a second
drawing. If you already have several documents
open and try to start a new one, DesignCAD may
warn you that it's not possible to another
document.
In this case, close one or more of your drawings,
or other open applications, and try Open again.
The number of documents that you can have open
depends on the amount of memory on your
system, the number of other applications that are
open, the complexity of each drawing, the
number of view windows you have opened for
each drawing, and other factors.
Ignore Drawing View Data: DesignCAD will
ignore view angles and distances at which the
drawing was previously saved. DesignCAD loads
the drawing using the default views and viewing
angles for the appropriate drawing mode (i.e., 2D
Mode or 3D Mode).
21
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Save
Using the Command
Menu: File / Save
Choose the Save As command. The Save As
window appears.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+S
Toolbox Icon:
Saves the active drawing to disk. If the drawing is
new and has not yet been saved, you will be asked
to name the file you want to save.
Using the Command
Choose the Save command. If this is your first
time to save the drawing, the Save As box
appears. Enter the name of the file you want to
save and where you want to save it. Then click
OK. If you have saved the drawing before, the
Save command saves all changes to the drawing
since the last time you chose the Save command.
The drawing handles are automatically placed at
the lower left, lower right, and upper right front of
the drawing. The Set Drawing Handles (see Set
Drawing Handles) command can be used to
specify the specific handle locations for the
drawing.
Save As
Menu: File / Save As
Saves the active drawing to disk.
In the File Name box enter or select the name of
the file to save. In the Save In box enter the
location where you want to store the drawing. If
you want to save the drawing as a file type
different than the one you're working in, select the
type in the Files of Type box. Then click Save.
Save 2D Projection: Saves your 3D drawing as a
2D projection, so it can be opened as a 2D
drawing.
With Hidden Line Removal: Only available if
you have checked the Save 2D Projection option.
This option will remove all hidden lines from the
resulting 2D file.
Enable Hidden Line Cleanup: When saving
with Hidden Line Removal, this option
automatically cleans up the hidden line drawing.
This removes many of the duplicate lines in the
projected drawing.
22
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Save Selection Only: Select the portion of the
drawing to be saved as a separate file, then use
Save As with this option checked.
Save a Copy
Menu: File / Save a Copy
Saves a copy of the active drawing under a new
name, but doesn't change the name of the active
drawing. This makes it easy to save incremental
backups.
Using the Command
Choose the Save a Copy command. The Save
Copy As window appears. For explanations of
the options in this window, see Save As.
Clicking Yes saves the changes. Clicking No
closes the drawing, dropping all modifications
since it was last saved. Clicking Cancel or
pressing Esc cancels the Close command and
returns you to the drawing screen.
Close All
Menu: File / Close All
Closes all open drawings.
Using the Command
Choose the Close All command. If any of the
drawings have changed, the program gives you
the opportunity to save the changes.
Save as Symbol
See Save As Symbol.
Close
Menu: File / Close
Closes an open drawing.
Using the Command
Choose the Close command. If the drawing has
changed, the program gives you the opportunity
to save the changes.
Clicking Yes saves the changes. Clicking Yes to
All saves all of the changed drawings. Clicking
No closes the drawing, dropping all modifications
since it was last saved. Clicking No to All closes
all of the drawings, dropping all modifications
since they were last saved. Clicking Cancel or
pressing Esc cancels the Close All command and
returns you to the drawing screen.
Send Current Documents and
Send All Open Documents
Menu: File / Send / All Open Documents
Menu: File / Send / Current Document
contact us at www.designcad.com
23
DesignCAD Reference Manual
A Windows function that lets you send all the
open drawings, or just the current document,
through Microsoft Exchange for electronic mail
and fax functions.
Choosing Yes activates the Save As command.
Choosing No closes the program (or prompts you
to save the next drawing if multiple drawings
were open). Choosing Cancel returns you to the
DesignCAD drawing screen with no change.
Importing and Exporting
In addition to DesignCAD’s native format, you
can work with files from different CAD
applications.
Export
You can send the full DesignCAD drawing, if
desired, or to send an image (jpg format) of the
currently active view.
For more information, please refer to your
Windows documentation.
Menu: File / Export
Lets you export files in several formats.
Using the Command
Select the Export command and select the type of
file in the File of Type box.
Exit
Menu: File / Exit
Shortcut Key: Alt+F4
Closes DesignCAD.
Using the Command
Choose the Exit command. If you have any
unsaved drawings open, the program gives you
the opportunity of saving each one before the
program closes.
24
DesignCAD exports to the following file formats:
DWG and DXF: AutoCAD formats.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Select the desired version from the Version box.
Select the desired mesh type from the Export
Grid Surface As area. Select the desired hatch
type from the Export Hatch As area. The Export
Line Entity as 2-Point Line option determines
whether multi-segment lines will be exported as
separate 2-point lines for each segment or if
multi-segment lines will be exported as polylines.
Using the Command
Choose the Import command. In the Files of
Type box, find the type of file you want to import,
locate the file in the browser, and click Open.
HPGL: The Hewlett Packard graphics language.
HPGL options can be set once you have selected
HPGL in the SAVE AS TYPE box and clicked the
SAVE button in the window.
DesignCAD imports the following file formats:
IGES: Initial Graphics Exchange Specifications,
a standard format that many CAD systems
support.
DWG and DXF: AutoCAD formats. Blocks are
converted to DesignCAD blocks, with the
following limitations:
WMF: Windows Metafile. Many Windows
applications can read Windows Metafiles.
• DesignCAD explodes nested blocks from
the original drawing. Only the outer block
level is retained.
WPG: WordPerfect Graphic
RIB: RenderMan rendering package.
VRML: WRL format for Internet graphic files
that can be read by any 3D web browser.
Import
Menu: File / Import
Lets you import files in several formats.
contact us at www.designcad.com
• Rotated attributes in scaled blocks are not
"skewed" as they are in AutoCAD. Example:
There is a 45-degree attribute definition in a
block definition. Insert the block at
X-scale=1.5, Y-scale=1.0. The Attribute gets
distorted. When imported into DesignCAD,
the attribute is not distorted; it remains at its
original angle (relative to the block) and text
size.
25
DesignCAD Reference Manual
IGES: A standard format that many CAD
systems support. DesignCAD supports the
following IGES entities for input:
• 100 - Circular Arc
• 102 - Composite Curve
• 104 - Conic Arc
• 106 - Copious Data
• 108 - Plane
• 110 - Line
XYZ (or XY): DesignCAD can import text files
containing X,Y or X,Y,Z coordinates. The
following conditions apply to the Import XYZ
command:
• The coordinates for each point should be on
one line. They must be separated by either a
space, a comma, a semi-colon, or a tab.
• Individual line or curve entities must be
separated by at least one empty line in the
text file.
• 112 - Parametric Spline Curve
• Any line which starts with a semi-colon is
treated as a comment.
• 114 - Parametric Spline Surface
• Comments may appear anywhere in the file.
• 118 - Ruled Surface
• 120 - Surface Revolution
• 122 - Tabular Cylinder
• 124 - Transformation Matrix
• 212 - General Note
• 214 - Arrow
• 318 - Define Subfigure
• 408 - Insert Subfigure
• 412 - Rectangular Array
WMF: Many Windows applications can read
Windows Metafiles, and the Import command
allows you to bring those files into DesignCAD.
You can connect the points with straight lines or
smooth curves, or you can mark their position
with a plus sign or small circle. If you choose to
mark the points, you can set the size of the mark
or circle in the edit box. The size is set in Drawing
Units.
Batch Convert
Menu: File / Batch Convert
HPGL: The Hewlett Packard graphics language.
You can configure other applications for an HP
plotter, send the plotter output to disk, and import
that file into DesignCAD.
26
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Makes it possible to convert several files of
various types into DesignCAD format, all at one
time.
Using the Command
Choose the Batch Convert command and the
following window appears:
DesignCAD installation location unless you've
changed it in the File Locations folder in the
Options window) when the Convert button is
clicked. Otherwise the drawings are placed in the
same directory as the files that are being
converted.
Convert: Closes the window and begins
converting the batch.
Program Options
Menu: Options / Options
Keyboard Shortcut: Q
Cursor Options
Menu: Options / Cursor
Set the size of the cursor and the small and large
step sizes for it.
Add: Selects the files to be added to a batch.
Remove: Removes files from a batch.
Load: Loads a batch (.dbx) file that has been
created and saved previously.
Save As: Saves a batch (.dbx) file under a
specified filename.
Overwrite without warning when saving
DesignCAD drawings: Overwrites an existing
DesignCAD drawing with the same name as a
drawing that is being converted, without first
prompting the user.
Save DesignCAD drawings to default
DesignCAD drawing folder: Places the
converted DesignCAD drawings in the default
DesignCAD drawing folder (this is the
contact us at www.designcad.com
Cursor Type
• 3D Cursor: Causes the cursor to appear
closer or further away according to its
location on the Z axis.
• Crosshair: Turns the cursor into a pair of
cross hairs that extend to the ends of the
screen.
27
DesignCAD Reference Manual
• Fixed Cursor: Causes the cursor to remain
one size during the drawing session.
• Fixed Cursor Size: Sets the size of the
cursor in Drawing Units.
Cursor Step:
Relative to Screen: The cursor will always move
the same number of pixels across the screen,
regardless of the zoom factor.
Relative to Drawing: Makes the cursor always
move the same number of Drawing Units,
regardless of the zoom factor.
Large Step Size: Sets the number of Drawing
Units that the cursor moves when you press the
Arrow keys or Ctrl+Home or Ctrl+End.
Small Step Size: Sets the number of Drawing
Units the cursor moves when you press Shift
while using the Arrow keys or Ctrl+Home or
Ctrl+End.
Save As Default: Saves the changes to the next
session
Color Options
Set the color of the background, cursors, grid,
points and various selection and rubber-band
entities on the drawing screen.
Scheme: Select any of the provided color
schemes. If you make changes to colors, you can
save a new custom scheme by clicking Save As
and assigning a name. Custom schemes can be
deleted.
Click the Color box next to any screen entity to
select a new color for it.
Cursor: Sets the color of the 2D cursor, and for
the three axes of the 3D cursor.
Drawing Color: The default drawing color.
Background: The color used as the background
of the DesignCAD drawing windows.
Grid: The color of the drawing grid. This can also
be set in the Grid options, see Grid Options.
Rubber Band: The color of rubber-band entities.
Point: The color of point indicators used during
drawing commands.
Selection: The color of entities when selected.
28
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Selection Handle: The color of a selection
handle when a point or drawing entity is selected.
Selection Box: The color of the selection box that
appears when the cursor is used to drag an area
around objects to be selected.
Resizing Handle: The color of resizing handles
that appear around selections when the Option
/Use Resizing Handles (see Use Resizing
Handles) is enabled.
Restore Defaults: Return to the original color
settings.
Custom Colors
Menu: Options / Custom Color
Used to edit the currently selected drawing color,
the Basic Color Table, and the Custom Color
Table.
Using the Command
Choose the Custom Color command.
Move the Color Selector to change the color in
the Color box. Moving left or right will change
the hue of the color and moving up or down will
change the saturation of the color. The brightness
of the color can be adjusted by moving the arrow
beside the brightness bar. A custom color can also
be set by entering new values in the Red, Green,
and Blue boxes.
Add to Custom Table: Adds the color in the
selected cell to the Custom Color Table.
Load Colors From File: Loads a custom color
file.
Save Colors to File: Saves the current Basic
Color Table and Custom Color Table to a file that
can be loaded.
Save as Default: Saves the Basic Color Table and
Custom Color Table in new drawings and
subsequent DesignCAD drawing sessions.
Reset: Restores the original Basic Color Table
and Custom Color Table.
Reset/Copy on Selected Item Only: Only the
selected color cells will be reset or copied when a
function is performed. When the selected color is
the one you want to assign as the current drawing
color, click OK or press Enter. That color appears
in the Main Toolbox as the current color, and new
objects will be drawn in that color.
• Use the Lock icon to make either the Basic
Color Table or the Custom Color table
editable.
• To move colors in the Basic Color Table to
the Custom Color table, make sure that the
Basic Color Table is locked , the Custom
Color Table is unlocked, and click the Swap
button .
contact us at www.designcad.com
29
DesignCAD Reference Manual
• To move colors in the Custom Color Table to
the Basic Color table, make sure that the
Basic Color Table is unlocked , the Custom
Color Table is locked, and click the Swap
button .
• To move colors in the Basic Color Table to
the Custom Color table and colors in the
Custom Color Table to the Basic Color
Table, make sure that both tables are
unlocked and click the Swap button .
NOTE: Any time the Basic Color Table is changed, the
corresponding drawers in the Color Toolbox will also
change.
Menu Options
Allows you to customize how commands appear
on menus. You can also add commands you create
to any menu.
For example, you can group often-used
commands on a particular pull-down menu or
create a command with the BasicCAD
30
programming language and add it to a menu. You
can also record a macro and assign it to one of the
pull-down menus.
To find the menu where the command you wish to
add is located, click the appropriate menu in the
Categories box. These correspond to the
commands on DesignCAD's main menu. When a
main menu is selected in Categories, commands
on its corresponding pull down menu will appear
in the Commands box.
When you're looking for an executable file, a
macro, or a symbol in the lower three entries in
the Categories box, the label on the Commands
box changes to Files. The instructions below refer
to the Commands box, but they also apply to the
Files box. The box name changes depending on
what category you're looking at, but the box's
function remains the same.
Change: To change a command name, select the
main menu in which the command you wish to
change is located in the Menu to Change box.
Select the command to change in Position on
Menu box. Click in the Name on Menu box,
enter a new name, then click Change and OK.
Add: When you add a command to a pull down
menu, it's always inserted above the command
that appears in the Position on Menu box. In the
Categories box, select the main menu that
contains the command you wish to add. Choose
the command you wish to add to the menu from
the list of possible commands in the Commands
box. Select the main menu you want to add the
command to in the Menu to Change box. Choose
where you want to place the new command in the
Position on Menu box. (You'll want to select the
command that will be below your new
For updates and additional information,
General Information
command.) Click in the Name on Menu box,
enter a name for the command. Click Add, then
OK.
NOTE: If you want to set the prompt for the new
command using the Set Prompt option, you must do
so before clicking the Add button. To add an
executable file, you must click the Directory button to
find the file's location on the hard drive.
Remove: To delete a command from a menu,
scroll down and select the main menu in the
Menu to Change box. Scroll down and select the
command you want to remove in the Position on
Menu box. Click the Remove button, then click
OK.
Reset: Returns modified menus to their original
DesignCAD defaults.
Menu Bar: You can add, remove or rename
entire categories of commands from the main
menu command bar by clicking the Menu Bar
button, which brings up the Menu Bar window.
For example, you could create a set of commands
to handle certain symbols, and then add a
command category named Symbols to the menu
bar between the Window and Help headers.
To do this, enter the name of the new command
category in the Name on Menu Bar box, select
where you want to place the command in the
Position on Menu box, then click the Add button
and click OK. You may now add specific pull
down menu commands to the Symbols category
by using the Add command.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Any change made to a main menu category will
affect all its pull down menus. For instance, when
you remove a main menu command, all its
corresponding pull down menu commands are
removed as well.
Set Prompt: Lets you enter a prompt for the
command you are currently adding to the menu.
Type the prompt in the Prompt box then click
OK. Now click Add to add the command to the
menu.
NOTE: The Set Prompt option will only work on the
command that is currently being added to the menu. It
will not work on commands that are already in the
menu. To change the prompt for a command already in
the menu, you must set the prompt while adding
another instance of the command to the menu and then
remove the old instance.
Save as Default: Saves the menu changes for the
next time you run DesignCAD. Otherwise, your
menu modifications will be in effect only for the
current session and will be lost when you close
DesignCAD.
Load Menu File: Load a previously saved menu
file.
Save Menu File: Save the menu settings as an
external file. This file may then be used for one or
more DesignCAD Workspaces.
31
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Keyboard Options
Lets you change a shortcut key or assign one to
any menu command, executable file, or other
application. Shortcut keys let you go directly to a
command from the keyboard. You can also use
them to start an executable file - such as a Visual
Basic program or another DesignCAD
application - from within DesignCAD.
To change or create a shortcut, click in the New
Key box, scroll through the keys list and click a
key you want to assign. Check the ALT, CTRL or
SHIFT box to select which function key you want
to use with the other key. The new shortcut
combination is now listed to the right of the New
Key statement.
Click Assign to finish making the shortcut, and
the new shortcut appears in the Current Keys
box. Repeat the steps if you want to create other
shortcuts. Click the Save as Default checkbox if
you want DesignCAD to use these customized
keyboard settings the next time you open the
program. When the customization task is
complete, click OK.
To load keyboard shortcut settings from an
external file (*.dkf), click the Load button.
Browse to the location of the shortcut settings
file, select it, and click Open.
To find the command you're making a shortcut
for, click the appropriate menu command in the
Categories box. These correspond to the
commands on the Main Menu.
NOTE: If you assign shortcut keys to other applications
in Windows, they may take precedence over the
assignments in DesignCAD.
When a main menu command is selected in
Categories, commands on its corresponding
pull-down menu will appear in the Commands
box. Click a command name. If it has a shortcut
assigned, the keys will appear in the Current
Keys box.
32
Click the Save button to save the keyboard
shortcut settings as an external file (*.dkf). This
file may then be used for one or more
DesignCAD Workspaces.
To remove a shortcut key you've made, select the
command you want to change, click on the
shortcut in the Current Keys box, then click
Remove. You can remove all shortcuts and return
to default settings by clicking Reset All.
Dimension Options
See Dimension Options.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
File Location Options
View Options
Modify where DesignCAD stores the various
files it uses and produces. This gives you
complete control over file placement, no matter
how many hard drives or drive partitions you may
have on your computer.
Menu: View / Show/Hide
Scroll through the list of file paths and highlight
the file path you want to modify, then click the
Change button. The Path box appears. Scroll
through the list and select the drive that contains
the folder or directory you want to use, and select
the name of the folder you want to use.
Show/Hide: To activate a bar or toolbox, click
the checkbox beside its name.
Text Options
See Text (and Attribute) Options.
Sets which bars and toolboxes are displayed
during the drawing session.
New Toolbox: Creates a new Custom Toolbox.
You may create as many as 40 Custom Toolboxes.
Each one may contain command, macro, or
BasicCAD icons.
Delete Toolbox: Deletes a Custom Toolbox.
Edit Toolbox: Opens the Toolbox Options (see
Toolbox Options), with the current toolbox
selected. Only Custom Toolboxes can be edited.
Save Toolbox: Saves the selected custom toolbox
as an external file.
Numeric Format: Opens the Numeric Format
window, in which you can control the format of
coordinate and angular values displayed in the
contact us at www.designcad.com
33
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Coordinate Bar. Coordinates can be displayed as
decimal, fractional, engineering, or architectural.
Angles can be displayed as degrees, grads,
radians, or degrees, minutes, seconds.
Ruler Settings: Opens the Ruler Settings
window in which you can set the ruler divisions.
See Ruler.
Use Color Icon: Icons are displayed in color. If
not checked, icons are displayed in grayscale.
Use Large Icon: Large icons are displayed. If not
checked, small icons are displayed.
Show Tooltips: Displays a yellow text box beside
the cursor when the cursor is placed over a tool in
a toolbox.
Enable Off-Screen Bitmap: DesignCAD saves a
snapshot of the screen every time you perform
certain functions. This option should normally be
enabled because it makes the operation of
DesignCAD faster.
Use Single Line Command Bar: Options for
commands appear in the Command Line (the
space directly below the Command Menu that is
normally occupied by the Toolbar) instead of
command windows.
General Options
Controls general as well as coordinate and angle
options.
Display Drawing Backward: DesignCAD
regenerates objects in the drawing in the reverse
order of that in which they were created.
Enable Graphics Acceleration: Sets this option
on when using the Shading and Hidden Line
Removal commands.
Use Bounding Box for View and Drag:
Determines whether a Bounding Box or a bitmap
is displayed when you set the view or drag an
object by its selection handle.
Enable Drawing Data Display: DesignCAD
displays various forms of information when
drawing commands are used.
Display Symbol as Box: Represents symbols in
drawings with boxes instead of the symbol. This
feature greatly reduces redraw time of drawings
containing several symbols.
Save Parameters with Drawing: Saves your
drawing with the current environment features,
such as cursor step size, grid size and display, and
other parameters.
Show Text as Outline: Displays just the outline
of filled text entities.
Save Preview Bitmap with Drawing: A bitmap
for the Preview area of the Open window is
automatically saved with the drawing.
34
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Enable Direct Print from Toolbar: (Also called
Fast Print.) Affects the functionality of the Print
icon in the Main Toolbar. The option toggles the
icon to either bring up the Print Command
window or automatically print the current view of
the drawing.
Enable Right Click Popup Menu: Affects the
right mouse button. When checked, the right
mouse button brings up a right-click menu. All of
the options in the right-click menu are available
in other places in the program. When not
checked, clicking the right mouse button executes
the Gravity command, which moves the cursor to
the nearest point in the drawing and sets a point
there.
Browse Missing Symbol, Bitmap or Texture
Files when Loading Drawings: Displays a
browse dialog if a symbol, bitmap or texture file
cannot be found, so that you will be able to locate
it.
Group Object When Created: Objects that are
the result of an array, circular array, etc. are
automatically grouped when they are drawn.
Select Object When Created: An object is
automatically selected when it is drawn.
Enable Sticky Handles: Determines whether or
not DesignCAD remembers selection handles
that were previously set for the item using the Set
Handles command.
Enable Saving BAK Files: When checked, the
previous save is renamed to "filename.bak." If
you have saved a drawing since this option was
enabled, and save changes to a drawing that you
decide you don't want, you can just open the
"filename.bak" file.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Automatic Save: Saves a drawing automatically
at intervals defined in the Minutes box. An
automatic save stores the open drawing with a
name "filename(AutoSave).dcd." The original
file ("filename.dcd") is not modified until the you
perform either a Save or Save As command.
These commands update the "filename.dcd." If
the file is saved and the program terminates
normally, "filename.dcd" is updated and
"filename(AutoSave).dcd" is removed. If the
program crashes, the "filename(AutoSave).dcd"
file won't be removed, so you can open
"filename(AutoSave).dcd" to recover the drawing
as it was up to the last Automatic Save.
If you make a mistake and your drawing is
"autosaved," you can close the program without
saving
the
drawing
file.
The
"filename(AutoSave).dcd" file is removed and
the "filename.dcd" is unchanged from the last
Save or Save As command.
Zoom Increment: The zoom factor used for the
Zoom commands. The default value is .25 (or 25
percent).
Recent File List Contains: Determines how
many recent files will be listed in the File menu.
Coordinate System: Left-hand makes the
positive direction of the Z axis extend away from
you. Right-hand makes the positive direction of
the Z axis move toward you.
Precision: The number of digits that you want
displayed after the decimal point in coordinate
measurement.
35
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Angles: Mathematical means 0 degrees is the
positive X axis (three o'clock) and the degrees
progress counterclockwise. Geographical means
0 degrees is on the positive Y axis (twelve
o'clock) and the degrees progress clockwise.
Precision: The number of digits that you want
displayed to the right of the decimal in angular
measurement.
Working Plane of 2-D Mode: Click to select the
workplane DesignCAD will display when in 2D
Mode.
Save As Default: Saves the changes to the next
session
Grid Options
Menu: Options / Grid Settings
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+G
Set Snap Grid and Display grid preferences.
Display Grid: Causes the grid to be visible.
Grid Type: These grid types are based, by
default, on a horizontal baseline.
• Ortho: Orthogonal grid.
• Isometric: Aligned along lines measured
30º and 150º from the horizontal axis. This
type of grid is used in isometric drawing,
which uses perspective drawing techniques
to represent 3D objects.
• Polar: Points in the polar grid radiate from
the origin, and are aligned by their radial
distance from the center and their angular
distance from the horizontal axis.
Minor: Sets the distance between all grid lines.
Select X and Y size, or angular and radial values
for a polar grid.
• Color: Set the color used for the minor grid
lines.
Major: Controls for the intermittent (lighter by
default) grid lines.
• Divisions: Establishes the number of minor
grid lines by setting the number of divisions
between each major grid point.
• Color: Set the color used for the mojor grid
lines.
Grid Center: Enables you to use a "local" grid.
By default, the grid center is located at the origin
of the coordinate system, at (0,0) or (0,0,0). You
can reset the center point of the grid
Grid Style: Select Dots, Crosses, or Solid Lines.
Snap Grid: Snaps the cursor to the nearest point
on an invisible grid each time you set a point in
the drawing.
36
Grid Angle: Sets the projection angle when the
Isometric Grid type is selected.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Layer Options
Enable or disable layers, name layers, select
layers, and perform other layer functions. (See
also Layer Toolbox.)
the Tab key until the focus is on a layer
number. Use the up and down arrows on the
keyboard to select the layer number for
which you want to change the visibility
status. Press Alt+V to change the visibility
status of the layer.
• Editable (lock icon): Determines whether
or not the objects in the highlighted layer
may be edited. If a layer is not editable, it
means that even though you can see the
objects in the layer, you cannot modify them.
To change the editability of a layer using the
keyboard, press the Tab key until the focus is
on a layer number. Use the up and down
arrows on the keyboard to select the layer
number for which you want to change the
editability status. Press Alt+E to change the
editability status of the layer.
Layer Attributes
• Name: To assign names to the different
layers in the drawing, highlight the layer
number at the left and enter its new name in
the Name field. To change the layer name
using the keyboard, press the Tab key until
the focus is on a layer number. Use the up
and down arrows keys to select the layer
number for which you want to change the
name. Press the Spacebar. Enter the new
layer name and press Enter. Press Esc to
cancel.
• Visible (light bulb icon): You can hide
layers by making them invisible. This is
convenient when you need to reduce the
"clutter" in a large drawing. To change the
visibility of a layer using the keyboard, press
contact us at www.designcad.com
• Assign Color: Sets the color of all entities to
be drawn on that layer.
• Assign Line Style: Sets the line style of all
entities to be drawn on that layer.
You can assign a line weight for printing on
the selected layer by enabling the Enable
Paper-scaled Lineweight box.
• Color Reset: Restores the assigned color for
all layers to the DesignCAD default.
37
DesignCAD Reference Manual
• Line Style Reset: Restores the assigned line
style for all layers to the DesignCAD
default.
Hide All: Hides all layers in a drawing except the
current layer.
Enable Multilayer Editing: Allows you to
manipulate all visible objects in editable layers. If
this option is disabled, you can only manipulate
objects in the active layer; all layers except the
current layer are uneditable.
Show All: Makes all layers in a drawing visible.
Save As Default: Saves the changes to the next
DesignCAD session.
Lock All: Makes all layers in drawing uneditable,
except the current layer.
Unlock All: Makes it possible to edit all layers in
a drawing.
Set Color: Assigns a color for all objects in a
layer. All existing objects in the layer will be
changed to the chosen color after the command is
completed.
Delete Layer: Deletes all entities in the
highlighted layer.
Select Layer: This selects all objects in the
highlighted layer.
Separate: Sorts objects into layers by color. All
objects of the same color will be put into the same
layer, regardless of their previous layer.
Move Layer: Moves contents of one layer to
another.
Copy Layer: Copies the contents of one layer to
another.
Save Layer: Saves the contents of an individual
layer as a separate file.
Make Current: Sets the selected layer as the
active layer for the drawing.
38
New Password: Lets you set up a password for a
drawing. Once a password has been established,
you can lock the editability and visibility of
specific layers of the drawing. You can also
prevent the file from being exported as another
file type, loaded as a symbol, or saved as an older
DesignCAD file.
Click the New Password button. In the window,
enter the new password and confirm it. Passwords
can be up to 50 characters in length and are case
sensitive. Click the OK button.
WARNING: Do not lose your password! There is no
way of recovering a password-locked drawing without
the password.
Once the password has been established, the
Protect Selected Layer(s), Free Selected
Layer(s), Lock Show/Hide Status, and Unlock
Show/Hide Status buttons may be used to protect
selected layers in the list on the left side of the
window. To select multiple layers, click on a layer
number; then press and hold the Ctrl key on the
keyboard while clicking on additional layer
numbers. (See Layer Options.)
File Export Lock: If enabled, DesignCAD will
not export a copy of the drawing unless the
password has been given in the Password
Protection Manager.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Symbol Load/Merge Lock: If enabled,
DesignCAD will not load a copy of the drawing
into another drawing as a symbol. To disable the
lock, open the original drawing, run the
Password Protection Manager command, give
the password, disable this option, click the OK
button, and save the drawing.
To Name an unnamed layer, double click on it in
the layer list. a text field will appear. Type in the
layer name then press the ‘Enter’ key.
Define Group: This tool opens the Define Layer
Group dialog which allows you to create and
manage groups of layers.
Save as Older Version Lock: If enabled,
DesignCAD will not save a copy of the drawing
as an older DesignCAD drawing version unless
the password has been given in the Password
Protection Manager.
To disable password protection, click the New
Password button. Leave the password text boxes
blank and click the OK button. A window appears
to inform you that all password protection
settings will be removed and ask if you are sure
that you want to remove password protection.
Click the YES button.
Filter: This allows you to control which layers
are shown: There are five options: Active Layers
Only, Named Layers Only, Active and Named
Layers Only, All Layers, and Layer Groups Only.
Add Named Layer: Will create an automatically
named layer. this option is only available if the
Named Layers Only option, or the Active and
Named Layers Only option is slected as the Filter.
Sort Layers By...: This option allows you to set
theorder in which layers are shown, there are four
options: Name, ID, Status, and Content.
Name: Allows you to change the name of the
selected layer if it is already named. you cannot
use this field to name an unnamed layer.
contact us at www.designcad.com
• To create a group click the Add Group
button. When prompted, type in a name for
the group and click OK. Then Select the
layers you whish to add to the group and the
click ADD button.
• To delete a group, select the group in the
drop-down list, click the Delete Group
button, and click OK whn prompted for
verification.
• To remove layers from a group, select the
group in the drop-down list, select the layers
in the in the Group Layes list, and click the
Remove button.
To set any changes you have made in the Define
Layer Group dialog click the OK button. To
cancel out any change you have made click the
Cancel button.
39
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Layer Toolbox
Configure toolbox settings.
This toolbox contains options for manipulating
all the current layers in the drawing. (For details
on displaying toolboxes, see View Options.)
Layer List Options: Contains various ways to
order the list of layers.
Same Layer As: Click this icon and select an
entity on the layer you want to use.
Apply Layer to Selection: Places all selected
objects on the active layer.
Enable / Disable Multi-Layer Editing:
Determine whether entities on other layers can be
edited.
Material Options
See Material Options.
Light Source Options
See Light Source Options.
Toolbox Options
Menu: Tools / Customize / Toolbar
Categories: You can choose to insert commands,
macros, or BasicCAD programs into the Custom
Toolbox.
Available Tools: Choose which tools you want to
add to the Custom Toolbox from the list.
Current Content: This is a list of tools which are
currently in the Custom Toolbox.
Icon: This button displays the icon for the
highlighted tool.
Add: Inserts a selected tool into the Custom
Toolbox.
NOTE: You can also insert a command icon into a
Custom Toolbox by holding down Ctrl while clicking
and dragging the icon from another tool box.
Delete: Removes a selected tool from the
Custom Toolbox.
Directory: Allows you to choose the directory
for macros and BasicCAD files.
40
For updates and additional information,
General Information
New Toolbox: Prompts you for a Custom
Toolbox name and creates a new toolbox to which
you may add commands.
Delete Toolbox: Deletes the currently selected
Custom Toolbox.
Preferences
Menu: Options / Preferences
Provides the advanced user some control over
some of the more complex areas of DesignCAD.
Load Toolbox: This button loads the .dct file for
a Custom Toolbox.
Save Toolbox: Saves the toolbox settings as an
external file. This file may then be used for one or
more DesignCAD Workspaces.
Customize Coordinate Bar: Sets what values
are displayed in the Coordinate bar.
HPGL Export Settings:
NOTE: The Angle field is only available for 2D Mode.
• Fill Area Spacing (10 to 100 dots):
Specifies the distance between adjacent fill
lines in plotter increments (usually around
1/1000 of an inch).
• Optimize plot line direction: Specifies
whether DesignCAD will attempt to
rearrange the point order in adjacent plotted
lines to minimize pen movement.
Print Settings:
• Location for non-centered print: Choose
which corner of the page a non-centered
print will shift towards.
contact us at www.designcad.com
41
DesignCAD Reference Manual
• Print by Layer Order: Specifies whether
entities are printed in the order in which they
were drawn or in the order of the layers.
Symbol Explode Settings: (see example at the
end of this section)
• Layers of exploded symbols: Provides
fine-level control over the layer behavior for
exploded symbols and blocks (whether they
were loaded with the Load and Explode
option checked, or were exploded after
being loaded into the drawing).
Original: Default behavior. A symbol's
entities get exploded onto their original
layers. Entities that were defined on layer 0
of the symbol (or on layer 0 of any nested
symbols within the exploded symbol) move
to the layer on which the outermost symbol
was placed in the current drawing.
Flatten: All of the symbol's entities,
including those in nested symbols, get
exploded to the layer on which the symbol
was placed in the current drawing.
Original2: Like Original behavior, except
for entities that were on layer 0. Any entities
that were on layer 0 of a nested symbol move
to the layer on which the included symbol
was loaded in it's host symbol or drawing.
Flatten2: All of the symbol's entities get
exploded to the layer on which the symbol
was placed, except for entities that were on
layer 0. Any entities that were on layer 0 of a
nested symbol move to the layer on which
the included symbol was loaded in it's host
symbol or drawing.
42
• Explode top level symbol and block only:
Controls whether a symbol or block is
exploded recursively or if only the outermost
symbol or block is exploded. When this
option is checked, only the selected block or
symbol is exploded; any blocks or symbols
that were entities within the exploded block
or symbol remain intact. If the option is not
checked, then exploding a block or symbol
explodes All blocks and symbols contained
within the outer block or symbol, so that no
blocks or symbols remain.
Drawing I/O Settings:
• Skip font data when saving ASCII DC2 or
DC3 files: If checked, removes the font
name from the text strings in DC2/DC3 files.
This provides better compatibility with the
"classic" DOS versions of DesignCAD.
• Allow saving empty drawings: If checked,
DesignCAD will allow the user to save
empty drawings. This is useful for saving
drawings with preset options such as grid
size, default units of measurement, layer
names, and other information.
• Merge Layer 0 entities to the current
layer: Affects the way drawings are merged
into the current drawing, and the way Paste
handles entities on Layer 0. If this option is
checked, then Pasting Layer 0 entities from
the clipboard puts them on the currently
active layer; otherwise they will be pasted
onto Layer 0. When loading symbols with
"Load as Original Entities" checked, this
option also controls the placement of entities
that were on Layer 0 in the file being
merged.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Snap Settings:
• Enable snap commands to snap to entities
in a symbol or block: Allows you to snap to
entities inside a block or symbol entity. This
can be useful sometimes, but it may cause a
degradation in the performance of Running
Snaps.
Drawing Info
Menu: Help / Drawing Info
Displays the number of entities and points in a
drawing, along with various other information.
• Enable snap commands to snap to the
lines in a hatch pattern: Allows you to snap
to the internal points of a hatch entity. This
option may cause a degradation in speed if
Running Snaps are enabled.
Example: Symbol Explode
Symbol A contains a red line drawn in layer 0,
and a black box on layer 1.
Symbol B contains Symbol A on layer 7, a blue
circle on layer 9, and a green star on Layer 0.
Now you include Symbol B on layer 12 of your
drawing, and explode it.
• Original: The black box stays on layer 1, the
blue circle stays on layer 9, and a red line and
green star move to layer 12.
• Flatten: All four entities move to layer 12.
• Original2: The black box stays on layer 1,
the red line moves to layer 7, the green star
moves to layer 12, and the blue circle stays
on layer 9.
• Flatten2: The red line moves to layer 7, the
black box moves to layer 12, the green star
moves to layer 12, and the blue circle moves
to layer 12.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Setting the View
This section covers ways to control what appears
on the drawing screen.
NOTE: For 3D view settings, see View Toolbox.
Fit to Window
Menu: View / Fit to Window
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+W
Toolbox Icon:
43
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Zooms the active view window so that the entire
drawing is centered on the screen with all objects
visible.
Fit to All Windows
Zooms all the view windows so that the entire
drawing is centered on the screen with all drawn
objects visible.
Menu: View / Fit to All Windows
Pan
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Shift+W
Menu: View / Pan
Toolbox Icon:
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Shift+P
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Specific point to be moved
Point 2: New screen location for Point 1
Slides the drawing around on the screen.
44
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Using the Command
Using the Command
Choose the Pan command. The cursor turns into
a four-headed arrow. Drag the mouse across the
screen until the drawing is in the position you
want. Then release the mouse button. You can
also press and hold Ctrl+Alt instead of holding
down the mouse button.
Choose the Zoom command. In the window set
the Zoom Factor.
Another alternative is that you can set a point for
the "source" and "destination" of the drawing.
The first point is the original location and the
second point is the new location for that part of
the drawing.
Reset Drawing Size: DesignCAD resizes the
objects in the drawing according to the zoom
factor. Otherwise, only the apparent size of the
objects are changed.
Zooming
This section covers the various ways you can
increase or decrease the size of objects as they
appear on the screen.
The zoom factor is relative to the current size of
the drawing. If you zoom with a factor of two, the
drawing appears twice as large. If you zoom with
a factor of 0.25, the drawing is displayed at
one-fourth its current size.
Zoom
Menu: View / Zoom
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of zoom
Makes the drawing appear larger or smaller on the
screen. It does not affect the actual size or scale of
the objects in the drawing unless you choose the
Reset Drawing Size option.
contact us at www.designcad.com
45
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Zoom In
Zoom Window
Menu: View / Zoom In
Menu: View / Zoom Window
Shortcut Key: +
Shortcut Key: Z
Toolbox Icon:
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of zoom
Point 1: One corner of the area to be magnified
A quick way to zoom into your drawing (make
entities appear larger).
Point 2: Opposite corner of the area to be
magnified
Using the Command
Zooms in on your drawing, filling the screen with
a specified area of a drawing.
Select the Zoom In command. Position the cursor
at the zoom center and click the left mouse button.
Zoom Out
Menu: View / Zoom Out
Using the Command
Select the Zoom Window command. Drag a
rectangle around the area you want to zoom into.
That rectangle is then enlarged to fill the screen.
Shortcut Key: Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of zoom
A quick way to zoom out, or reduce the size of the
drawing as it appears on the screen.
Using the Command
Select the Zoom Out command and position the
cursor at the zoom center. Then click the left
mouse button.
46
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Using the Command
Select one or more entities in the drawing.
Choose the Zoom to Selection command. The
drawing is zoomed so that the selected entity is
displayed as large as possible while keeping the
entire selected entity visible and centered in all
the views.
Zoom Previous
Menu: View / Zoom Previous
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+M
Toolbox Icon:
Zoom to Selection
Menu: View / Zoom to Selection
Fits the currently selected entity or entities in a
drawing to all view windows. The drawing is
displayed at as large a zoom factor as possible
while maintaining the visibility of all of the
selected entities. If only one entity is selected, it
will be centered in all the view windows. Objects
or portions of objects that are not selected may be
visible, depending on their proximity to the
selected entities.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Reverts back to the zoom setting you used last. If
you select this command repeatedly, it goes
backwards through the entire sequence of zoom
operations since the last time you saved the
drawing.
Zoom Redo
Menu: View / Zoom Redo
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Shift+M
Toolbox Icon:
47
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Reverts to the last zoom setting before the Zoom
Previous command. For example, if you change
your mind about a zoom setting after using Zoom
Previous , you can select Zoom Redo to cancel
that zoom action.
Original Size
Menu: View / Original Size
Toolbox Icon:
Restores a zoomed drawing back to its original
size.
Aerial View
Menu: View / Aerial View
Makes it possible to see the part of the drawing
you're working on relative to the entire drawing,
even when you've zoomed in closely to a specific
portion of the drawing.
Using the Command
Select the Aerial View command and the Aerial
View window appears.
48
This command provides a bird's-eye view of the
drawing, even when the view window is zoomed
in on the drawing. The Aerial View window can
be sized and placed anywhere on the screen.
To change the focus of the active view window,
just click on the red crosshairs and drag them to
the new focus location. To zoom in on a different
area, set two points to define a zoom window.
Refreshing and
Regenerating
If your screen gets cluttered with old entities or
stray lines, or you have made changes that are not
reflected, you may need to refresh or regenerate
the screen.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Refresh
Regenerate Double Line Entities
Toolbox Icon:
Menu: View / Regenerate Double Line Entities
Toolbox Icon:
Refreshes the active drawing window. It cleans up
images, such as cursor cross hairs, that have been
left on the screen. Choose this icon when you do
not want to redraw the screen but only refresh it.
NOTE: When working with large, detailed drawings,
using Regenerate takes more time than refreshing it. If
you just want to clean up the effects of previous cursor
locations or selection handles, use the Refresh
command.
Regenerate
Menu: View / Regenerate
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+R
Toolbox Icon:
Redraws the entire drawing in wireframe form.
This erases any shaded or hidden-line areas of the
screen. This command affects only the active
view window.
Regenerate All
Menu: View / Regenerate All
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Shift+R
Redraws the entire drawing in wireframe form in
every open view window. It erases any shaded or
hidden line areas of the screen.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Redraws all of the double line entities in the
drawing. Sometimes deleting a line or entity that
intersected a double entity will give the
appearance that part of the double entity was
erased. This command refreshes the double
entities, removing any apparent gaps.
See Double Line Mode.
Window Options
In DesignCAD you can work with multiple
windows. This can mean several panes of the
same file or panes from different files. This
section covers how you can create and display
these windows.
New Window
Menu: Window / New Window
Opens a new view of a drawing. DesignCAD
allows several different windows, or views, to be
opened simultaneously. These can be zoomed or
panned independently of each other.
DesignCAD Tile
Menu: Window / DesignCAD Tile
Arranges the active drawing windows according
to the DesignCAD Tile Settings. The default
setting places the Perspective view in the large
49
DesignCAD Reference Manual
window on the right side of the screen, and the
Front, Top, and Side views stacked vertically on
the left. This is a convenient window arrangement
for working in 3D space, when using 3D
Selection Mode, and when working in 2D or 3D
Mode with a large object which contains small
items that need to be zoomed for detailed
drawing.
Set As DesignCAD Tile
Menu: Window / DesignCAD Tile Settings / Set
As DesignCAD Tile
Changes the DesignCAD Tile setting to the
current view configuration. After rearranging the
view windows, choose this command to set the
configuration.
NOTE: The DesignCAD Tile settings for 2D Mode and
3D Mode are stored as different settings. Therefore,
changes made to the DesignCAD Tile setting while in
2D Mode will not affect the setting for 3D Mode, and
vice versa.
Example: Reverse the default DesignCAD Tile
setting
DesignCAD Tile Settings
This command contains two sub-commands:
Restore DesignCAD Tile
Menu: Window / DesignCAD Tile Settings /
Restore DesignCAD Tile
Changes the DesignCAD Tile setting back to its
default configuration: the Perspective view in the
large window on the right side of the screen, and
the Front, Top, and Side views stacked vertically
on the left.
50
To move a view window, click in the title bar for
the view to be moved. While holding the mouse
button down, drag the window to its new position.
To place the window, release the mouse button.
Move the Front, Top, and Side views from the left
side of the screen to the right. Move the
Perspective view from the right side of the screen
to the left. Select the Set as DesignCAD Tile
command. Until the DesignCAD Tile setting is
changed again using the Set As DesignCAD Tile
command or the Restore DesignCAD Tile
command, this is the view configuration that will
be used every time the DesignCAD Tile
command is selected.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Cascade
Tile Vertical
Menu: Window / Cascade
Menu: Window / Tile Vertical
Arranges open drawing windows so that they
overlap on the screen.
Arranges open windows by arranging them
evenly and vertically across the screen.
Tile Horizontal
Menu: Window / Tile Horizontal
Arranges open windows by arranging them
evenly and horizontally across the screen.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Arrange Icons
Menu: Window / Arrange Icons
Organizes the view icons at the bottom of the
window.
51
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Windows
Digitizer
Menu: Window / Windows
This section covers commands you can use when
tracing your drawing with a digitizer.
Provides a convenient dialog that shows all open
drawings and views, and makes it easy to switch
between drawings. You may also close a drawing
from this list, or save a copy of one of the open
drawings.
Using the Command
Choose the Windows command and the
following window appears:
Digitizer Tracing Mode
Menu: Tools / Digitizer / Digitizer Tracing Mode
Lets you zoom the screen image of the drawing
you are tracing while retaining the present scale
on the digitizer pad.
Using the Command
Make sure there is a check mark next to the
Digitizer Tracing Mode indicating that it's
active. Use the Zoom commands to zoom the
current screen image of your drawing. The Zoom
commands will not change the relationship
between the drawing information being entered
and the digitizer pad. Zoom commands only
change the size or location of the drawing on the
screen.
Align Drawing
Menu: Tools / Digitizer / Align Drawing
Activate: Brings the drawing to the top and
makes it active.
Point 1: Point on the screen
OK: Closes the window and returns you to the
drawing area.
Point 3: Point on the screen
Point 2: Corresponding point on the digitizer pad
Save: Saves the drawing.
Point 4: Corresponding point on the digitizer pad
Save As: Saves the drawing under a new name.
Synchronizes the digitizer pad with the display
quickly and easily. You should have already set
up Digitizer Tracing Mode before you align the
drawing.
Save a Copy: Saves a copy of the associated
drawing under a new name, but you keep working
on the current drawing. This makes it easy to save
incremental backups.
Close Window(s): Closes the selected view.
52
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Using the Command
Choose the Align Drawing command and set a
point of reference on the drawing screen. Set a
second point with regard to the digitizer pad that
will correspond to the first point set on the
drawing screen. Now set a third point as another
point of reference on the drawing screen. Finally,
set the fourth point with regard to the digitizer
pad; this point will correspond to the third point
which was set with respect to the drawing screen.
This will tell DesignCAD the relationship that the
area of the digitizer pad should have with the
drawing screen.
NOTE: DesignCAD will ignore this command if you do
not have a digitizer or if it is not recognized by your
computer.
Create Digitizer Menu
3.
4.
5.
6.
Menu: Tools / Digitizer / Create Digitizer Menu
Creates a digitizer menu. The menu created with
this command does not appear on the screen. The
menu contains several selection boxes. These
boxes are spaces where commands are selected.
7.
Using the Command
To create a digitizer menu, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Draw the menu template. This is the paper
template that will be affixed to the digitizer.
To start with, draw a border box the size of
the menu. The menu can be any size, but the
larger the menu template is, the more of the
digitizer drawing area the menu will take up.
On the template, draw individual
"command" boxes for each DesignCAD
command you want on the menu. These
contact us at www.designcad.com
8.
command boxes can be any size you want.
Draw text or a picture to be associated with
each command in the command box.
Print the finished template at a scale of 1.
Cut it out and affix it to the digitizer, inside
the active drawing area of the digitizer.
Choose the Create Digitizer Menu
command. Choose the method of creation in
the Digitizer Menu window, and click OK.
Now set a point in the lower left corner of the
digitizer template. Set a point in the upper
right corner of the digitizer template.
Next, set a point in the lower left corner of
the command box. Set a point in the upper
right corner of the command box.
Enter the command name in the Command
box. The DesignCAD macro command
names can be found in the DesignCAD
Macro Command Name section of the
MACROCMD.INI file. The command
names appear to the right of the equal mark
in the MACROCMD.INI file.
Set two more points for the next command
box, or press the Enter button to end the
command.
53
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Load Digitizer Menu
Close Digitizer Menu
Menu: Tools / Digitizer / Load Digitizer Menu
Menu: Tools / Digitizer / Close Digitizer Menu
Loads the "data" portion of a digitizer menu. The
"paper" portion of the menu should be attached to
the digitizer before the digitizer is loaded. A
maximum of 10 digitizer menus can be loaded at
once.
Point 1: Point inside the menu area
Using the Command
First, attach the paper template onto the digitizer.
Choose the Load Digitizer Menu command. The
Load Digitizer Menu box appears. Choose the
digitizer menu name in the File Name box, then
click OK or press Enter.
Now set a point in the lower left corner of the
digitizer menu. A rubber-band box shows how the
digitizer menu will be loaded. Set a point in the
upper right corner of the digitizer menu.
Save Digitizer Menu
Menu: Tools / Digitizer / Save Digitizer Menu
Point 1: Point inside the digitizer menu
Saves the current digitizer menu. This command
saves the menu in .DGM file format.
Using the Command
After creating the digitizer menu, choose the
Save Digitizer Menu command and set a point
inside the menu area. The Save Digitizer Menu
window appears. Enter the name of the new
digitizer menu in the File Name box and click
Save.
54
Closes the active digitizer menu.
Using the Command
Choose the Close Digitizer Menu command. Set
a point inside the menu area. The digitizer menu
is closed.
Add Menu Item
Menu: Tools / Digitizer / Add Menu Item
Point 1: Point inside the menu area
Adds a command to an existing digitizer menu.
Using the Command
Open the digitizer menu to be changed. Choose
the Add Menu Item command and set a point in
the area the new command is to occupy. The
Digitizer Menu Command window. Enter the
name of the new command in the Command box.
Click Continue to add another command or Done
to close the window.
Remove Menu Item
Menu: Tools / Digitizer / Remove Menu Item
Point 1: Point inside the menu area
Removes a command from an existing digitizer
menu.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Using the Command
Open the digitizer menu to be changed. Choose
the Remove Menu Item and set a point in the
area occupied by the command you want
removed. The command is removed from the
digitizer menu.
The Macro Options icon opens a window in
which you can set different options for the macro.
Macros and Executables
A macro is a saved set of drawing actions that can
be used later as a single command.
Macro Record
Menu: Tools / Macro Record
Records a macro that can be used later as a single
command.
Using the Command
When you use the Macro Record command, you
are first asked for the macro name. (The Set
Initial Reference Point option is the same as the
Record Starting Point option which is described
below.) Select a name and a location for the
macro in the Record Macro box and click Save.
Then the Macro Record toolbox appears on the
screen:
The icons represent Record / Continue, Pause,
Macro Options, and Stop.
Record Starting Point: Determines whether or
not a starting point is used for the macro. If this
option is enabled, a starting point is required at
the beginning of the recording and when the
macro is executed. The entities drawn during the
recording and execution of the macro will have
identical spatial relationships with their starting
points.
If this option is disabled, no starting point is
required during the recording or subsequent
executions of the macro. The entities drawn
during the execution of the macro will be located
at the same drawing coordinates as when they
were recorded.
Record Layer: Checking this box causes the
macro to run in the same layer in which it was
created.
Record Command Parameters: Checking this
box saves option information in the macro. For
example, if you create a sphere with this option
enabled, the macro will retain information such as
number of latitudinal and longitudinal facets, and
whether you created it in Vertex, Pole, or
contact us at www.designcad.com
55
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Midpoint format. If you leave this option
disabled, then you will be asked for that
information each time you run the macro.
Record Points: The points set in specific
drawing commands will be retained in the macro.
Record Color: Creates all objects in the same
colors in which they were recorded.
Record Line Style: Record the drawing's current
line style with the macro.
After you enter the macro name, everything you
draw on the screen becomes part of the macro.
You can pause recording by clicking on the Pause
button, and resume by clicking on the Record
button.
When you are finished recording your macro,
click the Stop icon or choose Stop Recording
from the Tools menu. The macro can then be run
using the Macro Execute command.
Example: Draw a box and a sphere of specific
sizes in several drawings.
Select the Macro Record command. Make sure
the Set Initial Reference Point option is enabled.
Name the macro TEST.D3M and click Save. Set
a starting point. Draw a box and a sphere on the
screen. Click the Stop icon. The macro will be
saved under the selected file name. Then, select
the Macro Execute command and choose
TEST.D3M from the window. Set a starting point
for the macro and DesignCAD will carry out the
recorded series of actions.
TIP: You can assign Toolbox buttons to the macros you
create. See Toolbox Options.
56
Stop Recording
Menu: Tools / Stop Recording
Ends the Macro Record command.
Using the Command
After you have finished recording a macro,
choose Stop Recording. The macro will be saved
under the file name entered in the Macro Record
command.
Continue Recording
Menu: Tools / Continue Recording
Restarts the recording of a macro. After
suspending the recording of a macro, use this
command to resume recording.
Using the Command
After stopping or pausing a macro recording,
choose the Continue Recording command. The
macro resumes recording.
Pause Recording
Menu: Tools / Pause Recording
Suspends the recording of a macro.
Using the Command
While recording a macro, choose the Pause
Recording command. The macro stops recording
until you choose the Continue Recording
command.
Record Options
Menu: Tools / Record Options
The Record Options command can be activated
while the macro is being recorded. This command
allows you to save and change options within the
macro.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
See Macro Record for details of the specific
options you can change.
Macro Toolbox
Menu: Tools / Macro Toolbox
This command is a toggle command that either
displays or hides the Macro Toolbox.
Command History
Menu: Tools / Command History
Lists the commands that have been used in the
current drawing session, starting with the most
recent. Commands in the list may be executed
using the Command History window.
Using the Command
Macro Execute
Select the Command History and the commands
are listed in the following window:
Menu: Tools / Macro Execute
Shortcut Key: %
Runs a DesignCAD macro. A macro is a saved set
of drawing actions that can be used later as a
single command.
Using the Command
Choose the Macro Execute command, enter the
macro name when asked for it, and click Open.
Set a starting point for the macro if required. The
macro begins its execution.
Example: Draw a box and a sphere of specific
sizes in
Choose a command from the list by clicking on it
with the mouse. Click Execute to start the
command.
Stop Macro
To return to the DesignCAD drawing screen
without starting a command, click Cancel.
Menu: Tools / Stop Macro
To clear the command history, click Clear.
Shortcut Key: &
Run Executable
Halts the execution of a DesignCAD macro.
However, you cannot access the Command Menu
or the shortcut key to stop the macro if a drawing
or shading or similar command is in operation.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Menu: Tools / Run Executable
Lets you run an executable from within
DesignCAD.
57
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Choose the Run Executable command. From the
Run Add-On window, select or enter the name of
the file and its location. When you have supplied
the information, click the Open button. The
executable initializes.
To stop an executable, select the program's Exit
command.
Images
This section covers all the ways you can bring
images into DesignCAD, and how you can trace
images within DesignCAD.
Load Image File
Menu: File / Image / Load Image File
Point 1: Lower left corner for image placement
Point 2: Upper right corner for image placement
Adds a graphic image from another file to your
drawing. If you only set a single point, the image
will use that point as the lower left corner and be
retrieved at full scale. If you set two points, the
image will be scaled to fill a rectangle with those
two points as opposite corners. The image is
never rotated in 3D space; it always appears "flat"
relative to the screen, regardless of your viewing
angles.
This command is very useful in adding
illustrations to your drawings. For example, it's
possible to add a scanned photograph to be
displayed along with your drawing.
Save Image File
Menu: File / Image / Save Image File
Point 1: First corner of rectangular region to save
Point 2: Opposite corner of rectangular region to
save
Saves a screen image (or part of one) as a graphics
file. The saved file can be used with other
applications such as word processors and desktop
publishing systems. This is a convenient way to
transfer a shaded image to other applications.
Using the Command
Choose the Save Image File command, and an
X-shaped cursor appears in the drawing window.
To select a portion of the window to save in a
common graphic format, set a point in two
opposite corners of the region to be saved. To
save the entire window as a graphics file, press
Enter without setting any points. The Save Image
window appears.
Using the Command
Choose the Load Image File command. Choose
the type of file to be added to the drawing from
the drop-down list in the Files of Type box. In the
Look In box enter the location of the image. In
the File Name box enter the name of the file to
load or select the file from the area below the
Look In box.
58
Save Image As: Lets you save the image in the
current display mode, wireframe, quick shading,
smooth shading, or hidden line removal.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Image Size: Set the width and height of the image
in pixels.
Same as Current Display: Resets the values for
the width and height of the image to be saved.
OK: Saves the changes you have made and opens
the Save Image File window. Enter the name and
location for the new graphic file and click OK to
save it.
Cancel: Disregards the changes you have made
and returns you to your drawing.
Scan Image
Menu: File / Image / Scan Image
Takes an image from a TWAIN compatible
scanner that has been specified with the Select
Scanner Source command. A TWAIN scanner
allows you to run the scanner directly from within
DesignCAD. The image can later be converted
into a vector image with the Auto Trace Bitmap
command. This allows scanned artwork to be
used in a DesignCAD drawing.
Using the Command
Place the image in the scanner. Make sure that the
scanner has been specified with the Select
Scanner Source command. Select the Scan
Image command.
NOTE: Scanners vary in their capabilities and features,
and this is reflected in the window that appears when
the Scan Image command is used. Depending on the
scanner's features, it may be possible to adjust the
image's orientation, the direction of the scan, the
resolution, etc. Refer to the scanner's software
documentation or on-line Help for more information.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Use the scanner's own software to scan the image.
The image is scanned and imported into
DesignCAD. Use the Auto Trace Bitmap
command to trace the bitmap as a series of
vectors.
If you are using a scanner that is not TWAIN
compatible, you can still use scanned images in
DesignCAD, but it takes more steps to process the
image. Switch to the scanner software or driver to
execute the scan, then return to DesignCAD.
Once the image has been scanned as a bitmap, use
the Load Image File command. After loading the
image, use the Auto Trace Bitmap command to
trace the bitmap as a series of vectors.
Select Scanner Source
Menu: File / Image / Select Scanner Source
Selects the scanner for use with the Scan Image
Command.
Using the Command
Choose the Select Scanner Source command.
Select the correct scanner source for use with the
Scan Image command from the window, and
click the Select button.
Auto Trace Bitmap
Menu: Tools / Auto Trace Bitmap
Creates vector outlines of specified colors in
bitmaps. This allows the image to be manipulated
in DesignCAD. With a color or black and white
scanner, a drawing or other art can be scanned and
saved as a bitmap, then each color can be traced
to produce a DesignCAD drawing.
59
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Bring a bitmap into DesignCAD with the Load
Image File command. When the bitmap is
displayed, select it and choose the Auto Trace
Bitmap command. The following window
appears:
slider closer left and right. The Auto Trace results
will automatically update when one of these
options is changed.
Once you have selected the bitmap to be traced
and set all of the options to the desired levels,
click the Trace button. DesignCAD will trace the
bitmap. If you like the results, click the Close
button to close the Auto Trace Bitmap window.
Once you are satisfied with the result, select the
bitmap and delete it. The new vector image of the
bitmap remains in the drawing.
The Remove Bitmap after Trace option can be
checked so DesignCAD will automatically delete
the bitmap from the drawing once it has been
traced.
The color to be traced is displayed on the Tracing
Color button. To change color, click this button.
The cursor turns into an eyedropper. Either in the
thumbnail image at upper-right of the window or
in the main drawing area, position the eyedropper
on the item you want to trace. Click the mouse
button. The sample is taken from the color at the
eyedropper tip. The Tracing Color button will
change to the color of the item you selected.
If there are multiple bitmaps in the drawing,
you can click this button, then click on the bitmap
you wish to trace.
NOTE: This command can only trace and convert one
color at a time. If the bitmap image has entities in more
than one color, you must execute the Auto Trace
Bitmap command for each colored item you want
traced.
Printing and Paper Space
This section covers how to prepare your drawing
for printing, and all the printing options.
Paper Space
Paper Space is essentially the printing mode. In
paper space you can define areas and views you
want to print.
The results of an Auto Trace are affected by the
Picture Type, Detail Level, Color Level,
Smooth Level, Noise Level, and Thinning Level
options. Experiment with these options for
optimal results. To change these values, click and
hold the indicator using the mouse, then move the
60
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Paper Space Mode
Menu: File / Paper Space View Frame Setup /
Paper Space Mode
Create View Frame: Create a printable
view window for which you set the placement,
size, and view options.
Toolbox Icon:
Makes it possible to print multiple views of the
same drawing in a single print job. Options such
as perspective, shading, light source, focal point,
view settings, and zoom can be set for each
separate view created in the Paper Space.
Using the Command
Choose the Paper Space Mode command, which
puts you into Paper Space Mode with the most
recently-define layout. However, if no layouts
have been created yet, the command first displays
the Paperspace Configuration window (see
Paper Space Configuration) It also automatically
creates a viewframe to fit the page, with the
viewframe scale set to 100%. This view frame
can be scaled and more customized view frames
can be added using the Create View Frame
command, available on the Paper Space window
or the View Frame menu which appears once
Paper Space Mode is enabled.
NOTE: To exit Paper Space mode, select File / Paper
Space or click the Paper Space icon to deselect it.
There are several options available in the window
which can be set for each view frame.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Select the View Settings and Drawing Display
Size for the View Frame. Now move the cursor to
the location in the Paper Space at which you want
to place the first corner of the View Frame. Press
and hold the mouse button. Drag the mouse until
the rubber-band preview is the size you want the
View Frame. Release the mouse button. The
rubber band preview is replaced with a View
Frame border with your drawing inside.
The View Frames can also be drawn using the
Point Polar and Point Relative commands.
61
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Pick an Entity as View Frame: Uses
simple 2D entities, that have been drawn while in
Paper Space Mode, as view frames. Just draw the
entity, click on this option and then click on the
entity you just drew. That entity is used as a view
frame for the drawing.
Change View Setting: Provides several
different view options for an individual View
Frame can be set using this command.
Fit to View Frame: Centers the drawing in
the View Frame, with all objects visible.
Center on View Frame: To center the
drawing in the View Frame without changing the
zoom factor, use this command instead of Fit to
View Frame.
Fit Drawing to Paper: Resizes the view
frames so that all view frames will fit within the
paper space at the largest possible size.
Set Focal Point: Drags the drawing in the
View Frame by its center point.
Pan Drawing: Slides the drawing across
the View Frame using a reference point and the
new location for that point.
• View Setting: Determines which view of the
drawing is shown in the View Frame. The
views listed are the same as those in the
Projection list-box in the View toolbox.
• Angles and View Distance: Set the vertical
or horizontal angle of the drawing, rotate the
drawing angle, or set the view distance.
• Preview: Previews the view setting changes
made to the current View Frame of the
drawing.
Draw Outline Box: Displays or hides an
outline border around the selected View Frame.
This command works as a toggle, showing or
hiding the border.
62
Light Source & Layer Settings: Sets these
options for the current View Frame. See Layer
Options and Light Source Options.
Section Zoom: This command uses a zoom
window to zoom in on a specific area of the
drawing.
Zoom In: Zooms in at increments preset by
the program.
Zoom Out: Zooms out at increments preset
by the program.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Change Zoom Factor: Changes the zoom
factor of the currently selected view frame
interactively. Click on this option and move the
cursor into the Paper Space area. Press and hold
the mouse button. Move the cursor up to increase
the zoom factor or down to decrease the zoom
factor. When the desired appearance is achieved,
release the mouse button.
Save Current Layout as Template: Saves
the current Paper Space Template, including all
View Frames and the options set for each.
Edit Layout: Opens the Paper Space
Template window so you can change the paper
size and margins for the current template.
Add a New Layout: Opens the Paper
Space Template window so that a template can
be added to the Paper Space Layout list box.
Delete Current Layout: Deletes the
currently selected template in the Paper Space
Layout list box.
Paper Space Configuration
Info Box: When a view frame is selected,
clicking this button opens the Info Box which
contains information about the view frame such
as view settings, the view frame's dimensions,
and the drawing display size. Most of this
information can be changed in the Info Box.
Menu: File / Paper Space View Frame Setup /
Paper Space Configuration
Sets up the area to be used for the Paper Space
Mode. This command should be used to ensure
that the Paper Space that is about to be created
will print correctly when the time comes.
Preview: Shows a preview of how the
printed Paper Space will look including shading
and hidden line removal.
NOTE: To see the page layout including margins, use
the Print Preview command on the Toolbar.
Display Method: Designates a display method
for the current view frame. The changes to the
Display Method will only be seen with the
Preview command in the Paper Space window.
Paper Space Layout: Select a different Paper
Space template in which to display the drawing.
contact us at www.designcad.com
63
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Choose the Paper Space Configuration
command and the following window appears:
Margin: Set the margins from the top, bottom,
left, and right.
Load Layout: Opens the Paper Space Template
window which allows the selection of a
previously saved Paper Space Template.
OK: Saves the changes you have made and opens
Paper Space Mode.
Cancel: Disregards the changes you have made
and returns you to your drawing.
Load Paper Space Template
Menu: File / Paper Space View Frame Setup /
Load Paper Space Template
Load or change a Paper Space Template.
Using the Command
Choose the Load Paper Space Template
command and the following window appears:
Name: The name of the currently selected Paper
Space Template.
Units: The unit of measurement used for
specifying the margins for the Paper Space
Configuration. Notice that the Height and Width
values also automatically convert to the selected
unit of measurement.
Paper Size: The paper size that your printer uses.
Width and Height: Measurements of the paper
size selected in the units of measurement that are
currently selected in the Units list box.
Portrait and Landscape: Vertical or horizontal
paper orientation.
64
Select the template you wish to use and click
Load. To use a blank template, click New. Your
drawing is arranged in the Paper Space according
to the template you selected.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
To change the template, follow the same steps.
Your drawing is rearranged in the Paper Space
according to the new template.
Delete Current Layout
Automatic Rendering
Deletes the current paper space layout.
Menu: File / Paper Space View Frame Setup /
Automatic Rendering
Save Current Layout as
Template
A toggle that determines whether
Frames that have been set up to
hidden line removal or shading in
Mode will be rendered when the
Template is opened.
or not View
appear with
Paper Space
Paper Space
If Automatic Rendering is disabled, the drawing
will initially display faster in Paper Space Mode
because the view frames will open in wireframe,
but the view frames that have hidden line removal
or shading turned on, will still be previewed and
printed that way.
Paper Space Layout
These commands are used to save your paper
spaces as templates.
NOTE: These commands are only available when
DesignCAD is in Paper Space Mode.
Current Layout Configuration
Menu: Layout / Delete Current Layout (within
Paper Space Mode)
Menu: Layout / Save Current Layout as Template
(within Paper Space Mode)
Saves the current Paper Space Template,
including all the View Frames and the options set
for each.
Using the Command
While in Paper Space Mode, choose the Save
Current Layout as Template command. The
command can also be selected by clicking on the
Save Current Layout as Template icon in the
Paper Space Mode window. Specify the name of
the template and the location where you want to
save it and click OK. The Paper Space Template
is saved. Saving the template saves every View
Frame's location and size, along with the specific
options Templates you create and save can be
loaded using the Load Paper Space Template
command.
Menu: Layout / Current Layout Configuration
(within Paper Space Mode)
Opens the Configuration (see Paper Space
Configuration), which you can use to modify the
current paper space.
contact us at www.designcad.com
65
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Print
Using the Command
Menu: File / Print
Choose the Print command, and the Print
window appears:
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+P
Toolbox Icon: Fast Print for the entire drawing
Fast Print for the current view
NOTE: By default, clicking the Print icon automatically
sends the current view to the currently selected printer
and prints it at the largest size possible on a single
sheet of paper. You can change this by selecting
Options / Options, opening the General tab, and
unchecking Enable Direct Print from Toolbar.
Outputs your drawing to a printer or plotter. The
drawing is printed at the view and perspective of
the current view.
DesignCAD offers many options, but you don't
have to use them all. If you want to print your
drawing on a single sheet of paper and the
maximum size, just select Fit to Paper and click
Print. The other options can be used to print to
scale, rotate the drawing 90 degrees, set the
margins, and so forth.
Printer: Select the printer for the pending print
job from the list of available printers by clicking
on the arrow to the right of the Printer field. If
you would like to see the properties for the
selected printer, click the Setup button.
NOTE: If you do not see the printer you would like to
use for the print job in the list of available printers, make
sure the printer is installed correctly in Windows. If you
have problems, consult your Windows documentation
66
For updates and additional information,
General Information
and your printer manual. Make sure you have not only
the correct driver installed, but also that it is the most
recent driver from the manufacturer.
Units: The unit of measurement for the paper on
the printer. Don't confuse this item with Drawing
Units. Drawing Units are the units of
measurement of the drawing itself, not the printer.
Drawing Size: The size of the box that would just
fit around the current view if the drawing were
projected onto a flat surface. The size is given in
DesignCAD Drawing Units.
Area: The size of your printed drawing.
Scale: A ratio that represents the number of paper
units that will be used to print one Drawing Unit.
Suppose, for example, that you are printing the
front view of a 2x2 box, and you have chosen
"inches" for the paper units. If you set Scale to
1.0, then one inch of paper will be used for each
Drawing Unit and the box will be printed out at
two inches by two inches on the paper. If you set
Scale to 2.0, then two inches of paper will be used
to print each Drawing Unit, and the box will be
printed at four inches by four inches. With a Scale
of 0.25, the box will be printed at 0.5 inches by
0.5 inches. See Printing to Scale.
Height and Width: The height and width of the
printed drawing on the paper if printed at the
current scale. If you are printing multiple panels,
this number is the total height or width of the
drawing across all panels.
Center Drawing: Centers the drawing on the
paper.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Fit to Paper: Outputs the drawing on a single
page in the largest possible size. If this option is
selected, the Scale, Height, and Width cannot be
changed.
Include Hidden Layers: Takes the entire
drawing (including hidden layers and unselected
objects) into consideration when determining the
scale and center position of the printed drawing.
This is an easy way to print transparencies.
Horizontal: How far the drawing will be printed
from the left edge of the leftmost piece of paper
for the print job. Positive values move the
position of the printed image to the right.
Vertical: How far the drawing will be printed
from the top edge of the topmost piece of paper
for the print job. Positive values move the
position of the printed image down.
Print Selection Only: Only the currently
selected object or objects will be printed. If no
objects are selected, this box is not available.
Print by Layer Order: Sends the drawing to a
plotter one layer at a time.
NOTE: The status of the Print by Layer Order option
is not saved in the drawing file, thus you will need to
reselect it when you get ready to plot the drawing in
subsequent drawing sessions.
Save Current Print Settings with Drawing:
Saves the options set in the Print window so that
the drawing can be printed again without resetting
the options. This option also makes it possible to
print the drawing with the same options using
direct print from the Toolbar.
67
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Print to File: Sends the print information to a file
rather than to the actual printer. This is convenient
if you need to print or plot your drawing at
another location. It can also be used to transfer the
drawing image to other applications.
one-quarter of the drawing. This makes it
possible to print drawings at a large scale with
standard paper sizes.
Optimize Plot with Color Sorting: Sends the
drawing to a plotter one color at a time.
NOTE: The status of the Optimize Plot with Color
Sorting option is not saved in the drawing file, thus you
will need to reselect it when you get ready to plot the
drawing in subsequent drawing sessions.
Copies: The number of copies to be printed.
Print: Starts the printing process.
Close: Saves the changes you have made to the
options in the Print window closes the Print
window, and returns you to your drawing.
Setup: Displays the page setup options for the
currently selected printer. See Page Setup.
Preview: Displays the Print Preview screen,
which shows exactly how your drawing will look
on paper. See Print Preview.
Cancel: Disregards any changes you have made
to the Print window and closes the Print window.
Panel Options
This group of options gives you information
about how multiple panels will be handled. If a
drawing is scaled too large to fit on a single page,
DesignCAD will print the portions of the drawing
on separate sheets of paper which can then be
assembled. For example if a drawing is printed in
four panels, then each panel would contain
68
Panels: 1 (1x1): The total number of panels to be
printed, and how many across by how many
down.
Mark: How to mark the boundaries of the
individual panels.
• None: No panel marking is done.
• Corner Mark: A registration mark is
printed at each of the corners of the panels.
This makes it easy to align the panels after
printing.
• Outline Box: Boxes are drawn around each
panel to indicate margin locations. Each
panel can be trimmed to the edge of these
boxes so that when the panels are assembled
edge-to-edge, the alignment of the panels
will be correct. This way no paper overlap
will interfere with the image.
Mark Panel Number: Each panel will be
numbered. This is useful in arranging the panels
correctly when assembling the finished printout
of the drawing.
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Enable Panel Overlap: Eases the assembly of
paneled drawings. This option creates a specified
image overlap between the panels. This
eliminates the need for precise panel trimming
before assembly.
Type Options
These options let you print your drawing in
several forms:
Overlap Size: The amount of overlap
DesignCAD prints on a panel when the Panel
Overlap option is used. The Overlap Size is
applied to each side of every panel that overlaps
another panel.
Paper Options
This group of options lets you choose your paper
orientation and margins.
For the differences between wireframe, quick
shade, smooth shade, and hide, see Object
Display.
Dimension: Prints dimensions in the drawing.
Text: Prints text regardless of whether it is on the
near side, inside, or far side of a shaded solid.
This option also shows text in views in which the
hidden lines have been removed.
Orientation: Portrait is a vertical orientation,
Landscape is horizontal. This can also be set via
the Setup button on the Print window.
Paper Size: The currently selected paper size.
Margin: The size of the page margins, measured
from the top, bottom, left, and right.
Line: Prints lines regardless of whether they are
on the near side, inside, or far side of a shaded
solid. This option also shows all lines in views
that have the hidden lines removed.
Arrow: This option prints arrows regardless of
whether they are on the near side, inside, or far
side of a shaded solid. This option also shows all
arrows in views that have the hidden lines
removed.
Pen Width: This option can be used to increase
the print width of the lines in a drawing. With
some high resolution printers, the zero width lines
contact us at www.designcad.com
69
DesignCAD Reference Manual
are difficult to see or do not print as complete
lines. This option alleviates some problems with
printing zero width lines.
Print as Black and White: Some colors print
very lightly on black and white printers. When
you are not using a color printer to print your
color drawings, check this option to print all
drawing entities as if they were black.
Shade Image with OpenGL: Uses OpenGL
shading to print the drawing.
Pen Plot Hidden Line: Send the print/plot
information necessary for a hidden line removal
to a pen plotter.
Print Display Grid: If you have used a display
grid in your drawing and the drawing is in 2D
Mode, this option tells DesignCAD whether or
not to print the Display Grid with the drawing.
Enable Transparency: Show transparencies
when a drawing contains objects that have been
assigned materials that have transparent qualities.
Enable Fogging: Add a fog effect to the printed
drawing.
Fogging
Function:
Linear
produces
proportionally more fog the "deeper" into the
drawing you go. Exp produces a less dense fog
than Linear. Exp2 also produces a less dense fog
than Linear, following a different function than
Exp.
front of the drawing. A value of -1 starts the fog
one drawing-depth in front of the drawing's front.
A value of 0.5 starts the fog in the middle of the
drawing.
NOTE: This position and scaling will vary depending on
the size of the drawing, the viewing angle, and distance
settings.
Fog Stop Position: The point in the drawing
where the fog reaches its maximum thickness.
Like the Fog Start Position, this value is a scale
factor based on the depth of the current view of
the drawing.
Fog Color: The desired base color for the fog. To
select the color, click the color box and select a
color from the palette.
Apply Fog to Background: The entire drawing
background becomes the same color as the fog.
Batch Print
Menu: File / Batch Print
Prints several specified files at one time.
Using the Command
Choose the Batch Print command and the Batch
Print window appears:
Fog Density (%): The maximum fog density.
Fog Start Position: The point in the drawing
where the fog is at its minimum. This value is a
scale factor based on the depth of the drawing
from the front to the back at the current view
settings. A value of 0 starts the fog at the very
70
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Print: Sends the batch to the specified printer.
Close: Closes the window and returns to
DesignCAD without printing or retaining any
changes.
Print Preview
Menu: File / Print Preview
Toolbox Icon:
Add: Select the files to be added to a batch.
Shows exactly how your drawing is going to look
on paper. There are also several options that can
be adjusted from the Print Preview window.
Remove: Remove files from a batch.
Load: This option is used to load a batch (.dbp)
file that has been created and saved previously.
Save As: Save a batch (.dbp) file under a
specified filename.
Use Existing Drawing Print Settings When
Available: Use existing print settings, if the
current print settings have been saved with the
drawing by enabling the Save Current Print
Settings option in the Print window.
Print in Paper Space When Available: Prints
the drawing in Paper Space Mode, if a Paper
Space has been configured for the drawing. See
Paper Space.
Set Maximum Number of Panels: Makes it
possible to constrain all of the files for the batch
print to a specific number of panels.
Print As: Specifies whether the batch will be
printed as Wireframe, Shading, Hide, or Hide
(Pen Plotter).
contact us at www.designcad.com
Print: Prints the drawing.
Change Printer Setting: Brings up the Print
Command window, making it possible to change
the settings for the print job. Pressing Enter will
print the drawing. To get back to the Print
Preview screen, click the Close button.
71
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Center Drawing: If the drawing fits on a single
piece of paper, this command will center the
drawing on the paper. If it is a multi-paneled
drawing, this command centers the drawing so
that there is the same amount of white space
above and below the drawing and the same
amount of white space on each side of the
drawing.
Fit to Paper: Outputs the drawing on a single
piece of paper in the largest scale possible.
Print Region: Lets you define a region of the
drawing to be printed. Move the mouse to one
corner of the region. Hold down the left button
and drag a rectangle around the region. Release
the mouse button at the opposite corner.
Show Single Panel: Shows only the currently
selected panel, enlarged to fit the screen.
Show All Panels: Shows all panels of the
drawing on the screen.
Mark/Unmark Skipped Panel: Works as a
toggle to select or deselect individual panels and
determine whether or not they will be printed.
Panels that will not be printed are grayed out.
Left Page or Right Page: In a multi-paneled
view, selects the panel to the left or right of the
currently selected panel. In single-paneled view,
changes the view so that the panel being viewed
is the one to the left or right of the panel currently
being viewed.
Close Print Preview: Returns to the Print
window.
When the entire drawing is shown, either on a
single sheet or in panels, there are blue scaling
and moving nodes around the drawing.
The small blue box at each corner is a scaling
node and can be used to scale the drawing. To
scale the drawing, click on one of the scaling
nodes and hold down the mouse button. Move the
mouse until the drawing is scaled to the desired
size, then release the mouse button.
The small blue box on the top, bottom and each
side of the drawing is a moving node. To move
the drawing, simply click and hold on one of the
moving nodes or one of the blue lines around the
drawing. Use the mouse to move the drawing to
the desired location, then release the mouse
button. If you move the drawing past the edge of
the pages shown, DesignCAD automatically adds
pages as needed for the print job.
Page Setup
Menu: File / Page Setup
Used to change some of the DesignCAD printer
options. This window can also be accessed by
clicking the Setup button in the Print window.
Up Page or Down Page: In a multi-paneled view,
selects the panel directly above or below the
currently selected panel. In a single-paneled view,
changes the view so that the panel being viewed
is the one directly above or below the panel
currently being viewed.
72
For updates and additional information,
General Information
Size: Select the paper size for your drawing from
a list of standard sizes.
Source: Select the paper source from a list of
standard printer paper sources.
Orientation: Portrait is a vertical orientation,
Landscape is horizontal.
Margins: The size of the page margins, measured
from the top, bottom, left, and right.
Printer: Brings up the window for selecting the
printer for the pending print job.
OK: Saves the changes you have made and
returns you to your drawing.
Cancel: Disregards the changes you have made
and returns you to your drawing.
contact us at www.designcad.com
73
DesignCAD Reference Manual
74
For updates and additional information,
3
2D Drawing Tools
Points
Most 2D and 3D commands require points. You
can snap to existing points or create new points.
This section covers the various point options in
DesignCAD.
Setting Points
Points form the basis of all drawing commands,
determining the location of a line or curve, the
diameter of a circle, or the radius of an arc.
You can select point commands from the
Command Menu or the Snap Toolbox, or you can
use shortcut keys. The Snap Toolbox works the
same way as the Main Toolbox does. To choose a
point command, click on the icon for the
command.
Setting a point is easy. Press the Ins key or click
the left mouse button. That's all there is to it. The
right mouse button activates the Gravity
command (if the Enable Right Click Popup
Menu option in the General Options - see
General Options - is disabled).
See also Snap Points.
Coordinates
The location of the cursor is displayed in the
Coordinate Toolbox. (For details on displaying
toolboxes, see View Options.)
You can use the Coordinate Toolbox to see
exactly where the cursor is, or to enter exact
values.
Example: Creating a line
Choose the Line command. For the first point,
place your cursor inside the X field of the
Coordinate Toolbox and enter 20. Press Tab to
jump to the Y field and enter 10.
Press Tab again or press Enter to place the first
point of the line at (x=20, Y=10). Move your
cursor to see the rubber-band line (do not click to
place the point). Its total length and “delta”
coordinates are indicated - the distance in X and
Y measured from the first point (not the absolute
coordinate).
Look at the Coordinate Toolbox. X and Y contain
the actual coordinates of the second point. DX
and DY contain the relative distances - measured
from the first point at (20, 10). D is the overall
length of this segment, and A is the angle
measured from horizontal.
NOTE: In 3D Mode, the Coordinate Toolbox also has
fields for Z coordinates
contact us at www.designcad.com
75
DesignCAD Reference Manual
To place the second point, place the cursor in the
X field and enter 30. Enter -5 for Y and press
Enter or Tab to place this point.
Now you can start to draw the second segment of
this line. The Overall length is the total of all
segments. The Current length is the length of
just the current segment.
Restrict points that can be set to a fixed value of
X, Y or Z.
Using the Command
Select the Lock X (or Y, or Z) command. Set a
point at the coordinate at which you want to set all
points while the coordinate is locked. Snap
commands and Point XYZ are useful for setting
the point.
While a coordinate is locked, a lock icon appears
beside that coordinate in the Coordinate Toolbox.
A locked coordinate may be changed by typing a
new value for that coordinate directly into the
Coordinate Bar. Just remember that if you change
a value in the Coordinate Bar, you need to press
the Enter key to return the focus to the drawing
area.
In the Coordinate Toolbox, DX and DY reflect
the length measured from the (30, -5) point. The
D and A fields contain the length and angle of just
the current segment.
Once the coordinate no longer needs to be locked,
select the Lock command again to disable it.
Only one coordinate may be locked at one time.
Lock X Coordinate is handy if you are drawing
in the Side View of your drawing and want to
make sure that you are always using the same
value of X.
Lock Y Coordinate is very helpful when you are
drawing in the Top View and want to maintain a
constant Y value.
Locking Coordinates
Menu: View / Lock X (or Y, or Z) Coordinate
Lock Z Coordinate is useful when you are
drawing in the Front View and want to draw on a
fixed Z depth.
Shortcut Key: Shift+X, Y, or Z
Toolbox Icon: Lock symbol in Coordinate
Toolbox.
Point 1: Point to specify the desired X coordinate
76
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Pointmark
Tickmark
Menu: Draw / Pointmark
Menu: Draw / Tickmark
Toolbox Icon:
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Location for point mark.
Point 1: Point on line, curve, or arc
Marks a point in the drawing with a small cross,
box, circle or combination of these elements.
Point 2: Point indicating on which side of line,
curve, or arc tick marks are to be drawn
Using the Command
Draws short lines, or tick marks, along a line,
curve, ellipse, or circle entity. These tick marks
are spaced at specified intervals along the entity.
Choose the Pointmark command in the Toolbox.
Select the marker style by clicking a button in the
window.
Using the Command
Choose the Tickmark command and the
following window appears:
To draw the point mark the same size as another
point mark in the drawing, click the Same As
button. Then click a point mark in the drawing.
Set a point where you want the point mark. A
mark is placed there. Set more points for any
additional point marks. Press the Enter key to end
the command.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Enter the number of Sections of large tick marks
- this determines the number of large tick marks
to be evenly measured out along the length of the
item being marked.
If you would rather determine the exact distance
between large tickmarks click the Change button
in the window. The Sections box will be replaced
with the Mark Distance box. This box lets you
77
DesignCAD Reference Manual
specify the exact distance between the large tick
marks. To switch back to the Sections box, click
the button again.
Enter the number of Divisions of tick marks - this
divides each section up with small tick marks.
Enter the Large Tickmark and Small Tickmark
sizes. Set a point on the existing line. Set a point
to indicate on which side of the line the tick marks
will be drawn. If both points are set in the same
location, the tick marks will be centered on the
line. Tick marks will be drawn at even intervals
along the line, on the side of the second point.
Toolbox Icon:
NOTE: When Snap commands are selected from the
Snap Toolbox, you have the option of making them set
a point or just move to the position; however, if you
select a Snap command from the Point menu, a point
will always be set.
Gravity
Menu: Point / Gravity
Example: Draw tick marks along a 10 unit line.
Shortcut Key: . (period)
Draw a 10-unit-long line using the Line
command and choose the Tickmark command.
Enter 10 in the Sections box and 4 in the
Divisions box. Set a point on the line. Decide on
which side of the line the tick marks should be
placed. Set another point to that side of the line.
The tick marks will be drawn as follows: 10
one-unit sections, 4 divisions to each section.
Mouse Shortcut: Right Mouse Button
Toolbox Icon:
This very useful command moves the cursor to
the nearest point in the drawing and sets a point
there. It enables you to set a point exactly on
another point without having to "zero in" on it.
Using the Command
Snap Points
Snaps are points that the cursor can automatically
jump to, such as grid points, an endpoint or
midpoint of a line, or the center points of an arc.
See Grid and Snapping.
To snap without setting points, use Move Cursor
Only.
78
When you choose the command while in 3D
Selection Mode, the cursor moves to the nearest
point in 3D space. In 2D Selection Mode, the
cursor moves to the nearest point on the screen
and does not take into account the point's location
in 3D space.
This is an important difference. If you want to be
able to snap to the nearest point on the screen, you
should use the 2D Selection Mode. However, in
2D Selection Mode, the cursor may seem to move
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
in an arbitrary manner along the Z axis when you
snap to a point because the cursor takes on the Z
value of the point that it snaps to.
In 3D Selection Mode, the cursor may seem to
jump to a point other than the nearest point on the
screen. This is because it goes to the nearest point
in the drawing, in 3D space. That point may not
be the point that appears closest on the screen.
Example: Set a point exactly on the right
endpoint of a line.
Select the Gravity command. Move the cursor to
a point near the right end of the line. Click the
mouse button. The cursor snaps to the right
endpoint and sets a point.
Example: Set a point exactly on a line in your
drawing.
Choose the Line command again and then, before
setting a point, choose the Line Snap command.
Move the cursor close to the line and click the left
mouse button. The cursor snaps to the line and
sets the starting point of your second line.
Plane Snap
Menu: Point / Plane Snap
Shortcut Key: F7
Toolbox Icon:
Line Snap
Menu: Point / Line Snap
Shortcut Key: K
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Point on or near the plane to which you
want to snap
Moves the cursor to the nearest location on the
nearest surface and sets a point there.
Using the Command
Moves the cursor to the nearest line and sets a
point there. It can be very useful in conjunction
with drawing commands. For example, if you are
drawing a line and want one of the endpoints to lie
exactly on another line, you can use Line Snap to
accomplish this without having to "zero in" on the
line.
Choose the Plane Snap command and set a point
near the plane you want a point on. The cursor
snaps to that plane and sets a point there.
Using the Command
Toolbox Icon:
Choose the Line Snap command and set a point
near the line to which you want to snap. The
cursor snaps to the nearest point on the line and
sets a point there.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Intersect-1
Menu: Point / Intersect-1
Shortcut Key: F4
Point 1: Line on which you want to find an
intersection
79
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Finds the nearest intersection to a point.
Using the Command
Choose the Intersect-1 command. Set a point on
the line on which you want to find the
intersection. The cursor will move to the nearest
intersection of that line and a point will be set
there.
This command works on lines, circles, arcs,
planes, and curves.
Example: Find the intersection of a line and a
circle.
Select the Intersect-1 command. Set the cursor
on the line and click the left mouse button. The
cursor will move to the intersection of the line and
the circle, and a point will be set there.
This command works on lines, circles, arcs,
planes, and curves.
Example: Find where two lines intersect in a
"web" of intersecting lines.
Choose the Intersect-2 command and set a point
on one of the lines. Next set a point on one of the
intersecting lines. The cursor will move to the
intersection of the two lines.
Line Plane
Menu: Point / Line Plane
Toolbox Icon:
Intersect-2
Point 1: Set a point on the intersecting line
Menu: Point / Intersect-2
Point 2: Set a point on the intersecting plane
Shortcut Key: Shift+F4
Sets a point at the intersection of a line and a
plane.
Toolbox Icon:
Using the Command
Point 1: First line of intersection
Point 2: Second line of intersection
Locates the intersection of two entities, using two
points as references.
Select the Line Plane command. Set one point on
the line and a second point on the plane. If the line
does not touch the plane, a point will be set where
the intersection would be if the line were
extended.
Using the Command
Select the Intersect-2 command. Set a point on
each entity. The cursor will move to the point at
which they intersect. If the lines do not meet, then
the cursor will move to a point where they would
meet.
80
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Midpoint
Center of Gravity
Menu: Point / Midpoint
Menu: Point / Center of Gravity
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+K
Toolbox Icon:
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Point on the object
Moves the cursor to the midpoint of the closest
line or line segment and sets a point there.
Using the Command
Select the Midpoint command, move the cursor
near the line you want to snap to, and select the
line.
NOTE: In 2D Mode, this command will snap to the
midpoint of a line's projection on the XY plane, not to
the midpoint of the actual 3D line.
Finds an object's center of gravity. For example,
you can use this command to find the volumetric
center of complex solids. This command is also
useful for finding the geometric center of a plane.
Using the Command
Select the Center of Gravity command and set a
point on or near the object. The cursor snaps to
the object's center of gravity.
Midpoint2
Menu: Point / Midpoint2
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Shift+K
Toolbox Icon:
If you select this command from the Point menu,
it will always set a point. If the Move Cursor
Only button is pressed on the Snap Toolbox and
you select the command from the Snap Toolbox,
the command will just move to the position
instead of setting a point there.
Moves the cursor to the midpoint of two points,
and sets a point there.
Using the Command
Select the Midpoint2 command. Set two points.
The cursor snaps to a position midway between
the points and sets a point there.
contact us at www.designcad.com
81
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Tangent Snap
Origin
Menu: Point / Tangent Snap
Menu: Point / Origin
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: New location for the drawing's origin
Point 1: Point near the circle or arc
Sets the origin (0,0,0) anywhere in the drawing.
This can be convenient if you want to use
coordinates relative to a particular point on the
drawing.
Sets a point for a line or curve tangent to an
existing circle or arc.
Using the Command
Set the first point for a line. Choose the Tangent
Snap command. Move the cursor near an existing
circle. A small box appears to show where the
cursor will snap if the current cursor position is
used. Set a point. The cursor snaps to the nearest
tangent location and sets a point. Continue setting
points for the line or press Enter to end the
command and draw the line.
Using the Command
Choose the Origin command. Set a point
anywhere on the screen. The location of this point
becomes the new origin. The origin remains the
same until it is changed again. The X,Y,Z location
on the coordinate bar reads 0,0,0 at the selected
origin.
Point XYZ
Menu: Point / Point XYZ
Shortcut Key: : (colon)
Sets a point by specifying the X, Y, and Z
coordinates of that point.
Using the Command
Select the Point XYZ command. Enter the
coordinates in the X, Y, and Z boxes and click
OK. You can also move the cursor to the new
location without setting a point there.
NOTE: If you are not in 2D Mode, the line and circle
must lie in the same plane.
82
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Point Relative
Menu: Point / Point Relative
Shortcut Key: ' (single quote)
Set a point relative to the last point set, the origin,
a reference point, or relative to the cursor
position. The position of the new point is given in
horizontal (X), vertical (Y), and depth (Z)
distances from the specified location.
Using the Command
Choose the Point Relative command. Enter the X
coordinate in the DX box, the Y coordinate in the
DY box, and the Z coordinate in the DZ box.
Normally you'll want to use the Last Cursor
Position option. Click OK button to set the point.
If you select the command from the pull-down
menu, the Last Cursor Position option will not
be available because the cursor is off the screen.
The same occurs if you use the keyboard (Alt+P,
then R) to activate the command. If you have set
no points and you activate the command from the
Command Menu, the point is placed relative to
the origin or a reference point. If you press the '
(apostrophe) shortcut key, then you have the Last
Cursor Position, Origin, and Reference Point
options.
Example: Draw a circle with a radius of exactly
10 units.
Select the Circle (Center, Outside) command
and set a point for the center. Then press the '
(apostrophe) key to select the Point Relative
command. Enter 10 in the DX box. Press Enter to
complete the circle.
Point Polar
Menu: Point / Point Polar
Shortcut Key: ; (semicolon)
Sets a point by specifying the distance and angle
(polar coordinates) of the new point from the last
point set.
This command is used inside another drawing
command (such as Line) to set a point at a
specific angle and distance from the last point set
or the last cursor position.
Using the Command
Choose the Point Polar command. In the Point
Polar box, enter the Distance and Angle from a
given location.
You can move the cursor to the new location
without setting a point by selecting that option.
If the Reset Values to Zero Next Time option is
selected, the DX, DY, and DZ values will be reset
to zero the next time the command is used.
Otherwise DesignCAD will remember the DX,
DY, and DZ values and default to those the next
time the command is used.
contact us at www.designcad.com
83
DesignCAD Reference Manual
You can specify the angle in either the X-Y, Y-Z,
or X-Z plane. You can also specify whether you
want the new point to be relative to the Last
Cursor Position, Origin, Reference Point, or
Last Point.
The options available depend on how you select
the command. If you select the command from
the pull-down menu, you will not have the option
of Last Cursor Position because the cursor is off
the screen. The same occurs if you use the
keyboard (Alt+P, then A) to activate the
command. If you have set no points and you
activate the command from the Command Menu,
the point is placed relative to the origin or a
reference point. If you press the ; (semicolon)
shortcut key, then you have the Last Cursor
Position, Origin, and Reference Point options.
You can move the cursor to the new location
without setting a point by selecting that option.
If Reset Values to Zero Next Time is selected,
the Distance and Angle values will be reset the
next time the command is used. Otherwise,
DesignCAD will remember the Distance and
Angle values and will default to them the next
time the command is used.
Example: Draw a 20-unit line in the X-Y plane
at an angle of 45 degrees.
Select the Line command and set the first point.
Then press the ; (semicolon) key to choose the
Point Polar command. Enter 20 for Distance and
45 for Angle and check the X-Y Plane and Last
Point options. Press Enter to execute the
command. The second point of your line will be
20 units away from the first at a 45-degree angle.
Press Enter to insert the line into your drawing.
84
Gravity Move
Menu: Point / Gravity Move
Shortcut Key: , (comma)
Snaps the cursor to the nearest point in the
drawing, but it does not set a point there.
Using the Command
This command lets you move the cursor to
another point precisely without having to "zero
in" on it. As soon as you choose the command, the
cursor moves to the nearest point in the drawing,
without setting a point.
Gravity Move is often convenient for moving the
cursor to a point in the drawing to get to a known
location before using the cursor keys or the Point
Relative command.
In 3D Selection Mode, the cursor moves to the
nearest point in 3D space. In 2D Selection Mode,
the cursor moves to the nearest point on the
screen and doesn't take into account the point's
location in 3D space.
This is an important difference. If you want to be
able to move to the nearest point on the screen,
you should use the 2D Selection Mode. However,
in 2D Selection Mode, the cursor may seem move
in an arbitrary manner along the Z axis when you
snap to a point because the cursor takes on the Z
value of the point that is moved to.
In 3D Selection Mode, the cursor may seem to
jump to a point other than the nearest point on the
screen. This is because it goes to the nearest point
in the drawing in 3D space. That point may not be
the point that appears nearest on the screen.
Example: Move the cursor to the right endpoint
of a line.
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Select the Gravity Move command. Move the
cursor to a point near the right end of the line.
Click the mouse button. The cursor moves to the
right endpoint but does not set a point there.
Point Control
Menu: Point / Point Control
Shortcut Key: J
The Point Control submenu contains several
simple commands. These commands can be used
after the first point is set in a drawing command
to insert another point relative to the first by a
specified angle or distance.
Using the Command
After selecting a drawing command and setting
the first point, select Point Control and a menu of
simple commands appears. Choose the desired
command from this listing. The movement of the
cursor is restricted according to the command.
NOTE: The Custom Distance command is available in
2D mode and 3D mode. The other Point Control
commands are available in 2D mode only.
Vertical, Horizontal: Forces the cursor to move
parallel to the Y or X axis.
30 Degrees, 45 Degrees, etc.: Restricts
movement of the cursor to a 30-degree,
45-degree, etc. angle.
Degrees Plus, Degrees Minus: Restricts the
cursor movement to 5.0 degrees more or less than
the previous angle. Two points must be set with
one of the drawing commands before this
command is accessible. These two points
determine the previous angle to which the
Degrees More or Less command adds or
subtracts 5 degrees.
Previous Angle: Before becoming accessible,
the two points must be set with one of the drawing
commands. These first two points determine the
angle at which the this command restricts the
cursor. The third point is set so that a straight line
could be drawn through all three points.
Custom Angle: Restricts cursor movement to an
angle entered in the Angle window. Leave the
Release Fixed Angle on Point Set option
checked to release the cursor when you set a
contact us at www.designcad.com
85
DesignCAD Reference Manual
point. Uncheck the checkbox to use the Custom
Angle command for several points along the
same angle.
Release Fixed Angle on Point Set: This is just
another way to enable or disable the same option
that is available in the Custom Angle window.
Same Angle as a Line: After setting the first
point in a drawing command, choose this
command and set a point on an existing line. The
cursor is restricted to the angle defined by the line
for the insertion of the next point.
Same Angle as Two Points: After choosing this
command, set two points. This command restricts
the cursor to the angle defined by these two
points.
Angle Away from a Line: Lets you place a point
on a line. The cursor is restricted to a specified
angle away from that line. Set the desired angle in
the window.
Angle Away from Two Points: Allows you to set
two points that define an angle. If an imaginary
line were drawn through the two points, the
cursor is restricted to a specified angle away from
that imaginary line. Set the desired angle in the
window.
Fixed Distance: Lets you set a point a fixed
distance from the previous point. The distance
used by this command may be changed by using
the Custom Distance command.
86
Custom Distance: Lets you change the distance
used in the Fixed Distance command. Uncheck
the Release Fixed Distance on Point Set option
if you want to set multiple points using the Fixed
Distance command.
Release Fixed Distance on Point Set: This is
just another way to enable or disable the same
option available in the Custom Distance
window.
Same Distance as Two Points: Uses two points
to determine the distance that the next point will
be set away from the previous point in a drawing
command. For instance, this command is useful if
you are drawing a line and want the current
segment to be the same length as a previous
segment in the line or a line segment in another
line in the drawing. Just select the command, and
set a Gravity point on both ends of the existing
segment. The next point is constrained to that
distance from the previous point in the line
currently being drawn. Move the cursor to the
desired angle and click the mouse button.
Same Angle and Distance as Two Points: Uses
two points to determine the angle and distance
that the next point will be set away from the
previous point in a drawing command. For
instance, this command is useful if you are
drawing a line and want the current segment to be
drawn at the same angle and length as a previous
segment in the line or a line segment in another
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
line in the drawing. Just select the command, and
set a Gravity point on both ends of the existing
segment. The next point is constrained to that
angle and distance from the previous point in the
line currently being drawn. Just move the cursor
to determine the direction of the segment and
click the mouse button.
Example: Set the second point for an arc using
the Same Angle as a Line command.
Choose the Arc (Endpoints, Center) command.
Set the first point for the arc. Choose the Same
Angle as a Line command and set a point on the
existing line that lies at the desired angle. The
cursor is restricted to that angle. Set the second
point for the arc. Set a third point for the radius of
the arc. The angle between the two endpoints of
the arc is the same as that of the line.
Lines
This section covers methods for creating various
types of lines and curves.
Double Line Mode
Menu: Options / Double Line Mode
Toolbar Icon:
When simple 2D lines and curves are drawn in
Double Line Mode, DesignCAD draws two
parallel entities at the same time. Double Line
Mode simplifies several common types of
drawings, including house plans and land plots.
Using the Command
Choose the Double Line Mode command simple
2D entities such as arcs, circles, curves, and lines
will automatically be drawn with duplicate
parallel entities.
The Double Line Toolbar to control where and
how the parallel entities are drawn. (See View
Options for displaying toolbars)
Double Line Width: Sets the width of the entity
(the amount of space between the two parallel
entities) in Drawing Units.
contact us at www.designcad.com
87
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Align: Select Center, Left, or Right to set the
position of the width of the double entity. If Left
is selected, the width of the entity will extend to
what would be your left if you were standing on
the first point set for the entity facing the second
point set for the entity.
NOTE: The Explode command can be used to explode
a double entity into vectors. If you are going to cross
one double entity over another, explode the existing
double entity and uncheck the Auto Trim box before
drawing the second double entity to ensure that all four
entities will be visible in the intersection.
Apply to Selected Double Lines: Applies the
current options to selected double entities in the
drawing.
Apply to All Double Lines: Applies the current
options to all double entities in the drawing.
Same As: Match the parameters of an existing
double entity. Click on the double entity already
in the drawing that has the properties you want to
assign to the options in the Double Line bar.
Save As: Select Double Line, Plane, or Line to
determine how the entity will be recognized and
saved in the drawing.
NOTE: If the double entity is drawn with the Left or
Right option, you will be able to snap to both sides of
the finished double entity. If the double entity is drawn
with the Center option selected, you will be able to
snap to both sides and the center of the double entity.
Cap: Specify which ends of the double entity are
capped or left open.
Hatch: Select a hatch pattern with which to fill the
entity. The Filled option must be checked for the
hatch pattern to be used.
NOTE: You can convert existing entities to double-line
entities. See Convert to Double Line. See also
Double Line to Plane and Double Line to Wide
Line.
MultiLine Mode
Menu: Options / MultiLine Mode
Toolbar Icon:
Filled: Draws a filled entity, otherwise the double
line will be hollow.
Auto Trim: Automatically trims the entity where
it overlaps itself or another double entity.
88
When separate 2D lines, curves, arcs, circles, and
ellipses are drawn in "Multiline" mode,
DesignCAD simultaneously draws a set of
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
parallel objects. The same operations, as those
permitted for "Double Line" objects, are also
available for multiline objects. In essence,
"Multiline Mode" is "Double Line Mode" with
advanced
capabilities for setting line
representation.
The Multiline style list contains all multiline
styles available in a given document. The
Selected element of the list corresponds to the
style that DesignCAD uses to draw a new 2D
object in "Multiline" mode. This style is
considered the current style.
When "Multiline" mode is active, the created 2D
lines, curves, arcs, circles, and ellipses are
displayed as multiline objects, with the current
multiline style used.
Each multiline style has a Name, shown on the
list, and a Description (Description field). Style
name is specified at the time of creation, and can
be changed by the user. Styles can have identical
names. Style description is optional, and can be
used, for instance, to specify more precisely the
purpose and particular details of using a given
style.
Creating Multiline styles
The Multiline Style dialog
(Menu: Options / Multiline style…) is used to
create and edit multiline styles:
Add New: is used for adding a new style. When
you add a new style, you need to enter its name
and description (if desired). New style will have
the current settings for Lines, Caps, and
Properties. Thus, to create a new style you can
select an existing one, and change it as desired.
There can be a maximum of 64 styles for one
drawing.
Rename: is used to change the name of the
current style.
Delete: is used to remove the current style.
Load: is used to load styles from a file. Multiline
styles can be loaded from any *.dcd file created in
DesignCAD 16. After pressing "Load" you can
contact us at www.designcad.com
89
DesignCAD Reference Manual
select the file, which contains the required styles,
in the "Load multiline style" dialog ("Open"
button).
The list under the button (on the left) will show all
multiline styles that exist in the file. To transfer a
style into the current document, use "Add" and
"Add All" buttons, to cancel the transfer "Remove" and "Remove All". "Remove" and
"Remove All" buttons work only for the styles
added from the list on the left. Existing styles
cannot be removed using this dialog.
By default, when a new document is created,
styles are loaded from Multiline.sys file. It is a
regular *.dcd file with the extension changed, and
it can be opened in DesignCAD. To set the default
styles, you can open this file, create or load the
required styles, save the file as *.dcd, and then
change its extension to *.sys.
To work with styles of the entire document, and
also to set the style to be used, this dialog can be
called from (Menu: Options / Multiline style…).
To change multiline style of the current multiline
object, you can invoke its InfoBox, and press
"Change Style" button there. In this case, all
operations for adding, removing, and loading
styles will be inaccessible, and "Multiline style"
list will contain, apart from all styles of the
document, one more style: it will have the name
of one of existing styles with the word (Current)
appended to it. This is the style that is currently
used to display the selected object.
All style settings are located on three pages:
"Lines" - settings for positioning lines relative
each other, and controlling their display
properties; "Caps" - settings for multiline caps;
"Properties" - general style settings.
Lines page
If the program cannot find this file, then when a
new document is created, one style will be added
automatically: it will have the name Double Line,
and style line settings that are used in Double
Line Mode.
Editing Multilines
Multiline styles can be edited in the same
"Multiline Style" dialog.
90
This page contains all settings for positioning
lines relative each other, and controlling their
display properties (color, style, width, scale).
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
All information about lines used in the current
multiline style is presented in the spreadsheet.
Offset is used as the parameter for sorting.
Caps page
After selecting a line in the spreadsheet, user can
edit its properties and settings.
Line Color - defines line color. When "Color by
Layer" flag is set, DesignCAD will use the color
of the layer, where the object was created.
Line Type - defines line type. Here you can
choose one of the types available in DesignCAD.
Line width - line width (in millimeters). This
width does not depend on document scale, and
always stays the same. It is similar to "Fixed
Lineweight" for single lines and curves.
Line Scale - scale applied to the selected line
type.
When "Line Style by Layer" flag is set, type,
width and scale of the line will match those
specified for the layer, where the object is located.
Line Offset - relative offset of lines, which
determines the distance between them. The offset
is calculated from a certain 0 axis, in scale units
used in DesignCAD at the moment. For example,
if a style uses 4 lines, the first of which has offset
equal to 2, and the fourth - equal to 8, the width of
such line will be 6.
To add a line, select an empty row in the
spreadsheet, set line properties, and press "Add
line" button.
To delete a line, select it, and press "Remove line"
button. The only limitation for this operation each multiline style must have at least 1 line
defined.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Defines shape, style, and color of lines for caps.
There are separate settings for start and end of a
multiline.
Line flag - when this flag is set, the
corresponding boundaries (start or end points) of
the first and last lines are connected with a line.
Outer Arc flag - when this flag is set, the
corresponding boundaries (start or end points) of
the first and last lines are connected with an arc.
Inner Arc flag - when this flag is set, all
boundaries of internal lines (between the first and
the last one) are connected in pairs, with arcs. The
pairs are formed from the lines on opposite sides,
e.g. the second line is connected with the next to
last one.
Angle field - determines the tilt angle of the cap.
The angle is calculated from the lower line. The
angle is specified in degrees, from 0 to 180. It is
used only for multilines. For other multiline
objects, it is automatically set at 90 degrees.
"Line color", "Line type", "Line width", "Line
scale", "Color by Layer" and "Line Style by
Layer" define the settings for style and color of
91
DesignCAD Reference Manual
the line for the corresponding cap; they are
similar in functionality to control elements of
Lines page, bearing the same names.
Alignment - settings for aligning a multiline
object.
Properties page
Joints - settings for representation of line
inflection points.
These settings are used only for multilines; they
are turned off automatically for all other multiline
objects.
This page contains all other settings for multiline
style. These include "Fill" and "Alignment"
settings, as well as "Joints" - settings for
representation of line inflection points.
Fill - contains the following settings for multiline
object fill:
"Line color", "Line type", "Line width", "Line
scale", "Color by Layer" and "Line Style by
Layer" define the settings for style and color of
the line; they are similar in functionality to
control elements of "Lines" and "Caps" pages,
bearing the same names
Fill color - defines the color of the fill.
Display Joints - when this flag is set, a straight
line (with color and style specified by
abovementioned settings) will be drawn between
the points on the 1st and last lines, corresponding
to the point on the multiline object (except the 1st
and last points, because the caps are drawn there).
Color by Layer - when it is specified, the color
of the layer, where the multiline object was
created, will be used for the fill.
Some of multiline style settings for existing
objects are available in InfoBox, and can be
changed without using "Multiline style" dialog.
Hatch - defines the style, scale and tilt angle of
the fill.
Use Fill - determines whether fill will be used.
Enable Seed Point - links fill to a point. When
this flag is set, the fill will be displayed the same
all the time, regardless of line position and
operations performed with it.
92
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Converting to a multiline
Line
Single lines and curves can be converted to
multiline objects using "Convert to MultiLine"
dialog (Menu: Edit / Convert to MultiLine).
Menu: Draw / Lines / Line
Shortcut Key: V
Toolbox Icon:
Draws a single or multi-segment 2D or 3D line. A
valid line entity must contain two or more points.
Using the Command
Here, the you can select an existing multiline
style and click close to the object that he wants to
convert. If conversion is possible (the object is a
single 2D line, a curve, an arc, a circle or an
ellipse), the selected object becomes a multiline
object.
It is possible to convert a group of selected
objects using "Convert Selected Lines" button. In
this case, only those objects will be converted, for
which conversion is possible.
Choose the Line command and set points for the
line. You will see a rubber-band line connected to
each point you set. When you have set the points,
press Enter or double-click the mouse to end the
command.
NOTE: This command is similar to the Plane command
except the Plane command creates a surface instead
of a line.
TIP: You can use the Make Plane command to convert
lines into planes so they can be shaded.
Ortho Line
Menu: Draw / Lines / Ortho Line
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Beginning of line
Point 2: End of first segment
contact us at www.designcad.com
93
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Point 3-n: End of second and subsequent
segments (optional)
Draws lines with segments that are parallel to the
X, Y, or Z axis. If you set points that are not
parallel to one of these axes, the command
automatically shifts the line to be parallel to the
nearest matching axis.
Using the Command
Choose the Ortho Line command and set a
beginning point for the ortho line. Set any number
of points to draw the line. Then press Enter or
double-click the mouse to end the command.
Example: Draw a line parallel to the X axis.
Select the Ortho Line command and set a point
on the screen. Move the cursor to the right and up.
Notice that the rubber-band line only moves
along the X axis. Set a point for the body of the
line and move the cursor up. Again the line is
drawn exactly parallel to an axis. Set another
point and press Enter to complete the command
and add the line to the drawing.
Ortho Line-2
Menu: Draw / Lines / Ortho Line 2
Point 1: Beginning of the line
Point 2: Direction of 1st segment
Point 3: Length of 1st segment; length &
direction of 2nd segment
Points 4-n: even number: direction of segment;
odd number: previous segment length; current
segment length & direction
Like the Ortho Line command, this command
draws lines that are parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis.
However, the points set in this command function
differently.
With the Ortho Line-2 command, the first point
set is the beginning of the line. The second point
determines only the direction of the first line
segment, not the length. After the second point is
set, the length of the first line segment continues
to change when the cursor moves. The third point
determines the direction of the second line
segment and the length of both the first and
second line segments. After the third point is set,
all even numbered points function like the second
point, determining only the direction of the line
segment. All the following odd numbered points
work like the third point and determine the length
of the previous line segment and the length and
direction of the current line segment.
Using the command:
Choose the Ortho Line-2 command. Set a
beginning point for the line. Move the cursor in
the desired direction for the first segment and set
a second point. Notice how the rubber-band line
is bent in the direction you specified, but the
length of both segments continues to change
when you move the cursor. When you have both
segments the length you want them and the
second segment the desired direction, set a third
point. Set any number of points to draw the line.
Then press Enter or double-click the mouse to
end the command.
NOTE: This command only works in 2D Mode. Also,
Orthogonal Mode needs to be disabled.
Example: Draw a bent line.
94
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Choose the Ortho Line-2 command. Set a point
for the beginning of the line. Now, move the
cursor down and to the right. Notice how the
rubber-band line will only move straight along
the X-Axis or the Y-Axis. Set a point so that the
line goes down along the Y-Axis. Now, move the
cursor up and down. Notice how the length of the
first segment gets longer or shorter with the
movement of the cursor. Move the cursor to the
right and set a point so that the line forms an "L"
shape. Press Enter to complete the command and
add the line to the drawing.
NOTE: This command only works on the current
workplane in 3D Mode. The default workplane is the XY
plane. This plane can be changed in the General
Options (see General Options).
TIP: Two commands can be used to "clean up" a line
drawn with the Sketch command. See Smooth Line
by Point Reduction and Smooth Line by Slope
Detection.
Arrow
Menu: Draw / Lines / Arrow
Shortcut Key: >
Toolbox Icon:
Sketch
Menu: Draw / Lines / Sketch
Point 1-n: Body of the arrow
Toolbox Icon:
Point n: Arrowhead
Draws an arrow using two or more points.
Using the Command
Draws freehand by following the cursor's
movement.
Using the Command
Choose the Sketch command. Press and hold
down the left mouse button. Move the cursor in a
curve motion. Release the mouse button. A curve
is drawn, following the cursor's movement.
contact us at www.designcad.com
95
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Use the options in the window to set the
arrowhead size and type. A double-headed arrow
can also be specified.
Curve
Menu: Draw / Lines / Curve
Shortcut Key: C
Toolbox Icon:
Draws a cubic spline curve through three or more
points. The points for a curve do not have to lie in
the same plane.
The curve can be saved as a line by checking Save
as a Line.
Set the first point at the tail and work toward the
arrowhead.
TIP: To make a "corner" in the curve, set two
consecutive points in the same location. This will cause
two separate curves to be drawn, one on each side of
the corner.
Bezier Curve
Menu: Draw / Lines / Bezier Curve
Toolbox Icon:
NOTE: The Arrowhead Size option is actually a ratio
of the current text size.
Point 1: Beginning of the Bezier curve
Point 2: First control point for the curve
(beginning tangent)
Point 3: Pass-through point
96
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Point 4: Second control point (tangent for point
3)
Parallel
Point 5: Pass-through point (optional)
Shortcut Key: =
Point 6: Third control point (tangent for point 5)
Toolbox Icon:
Menu: Draw / Lines / Parallel
Point 7-n: (Optional points in pairs)
Using the Command
The first point is the endpoint of the curve, and
the second point is the control point. The curve at
the first point will be tangent to the second point.
The third point is the endpoint, and the fourth
point is the tangent. Each subsequent pair of
points is a point for the curve to pass through and
a control point to define the tangent at that
location.
Moving a control point further from the curve
makes the curve sharper. Points must be set in
pairs. If you set an odd number of points, the last
point is ignored.
Point 1: Existing line
Point 2: Location for parallel line
Draws a line parallel to any existing line, curve,
or arc.
Using the Command
Choose the Parallel command. Set a point on the
original line and a point for the location of the
parallel line.
This command works on 3D lines as well as lines
that lie on a single plane.
Example:
Draw
multi-segment line.
a
line
parallel
to
a
Select the Parallel command. Set a point on the
line and move the cursor away from it. A
rubber-band line is drawn parallel to the first line
at the current cursor distance. When the line is
where you want it, set the second point.
contact us at www.designcad.com
97
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Parallel by Distance
Perpendicular to a Line
Menu: Draw / Lines / Parallel by Distance
Menu: Draw / Lines / Perpendicular to a Line
Toolbox Icon:
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Line to be offset
Point 1: End point of perpendicular line
Point 2: Direction of parallel line from original
line.
Point 2: Point on line to which new line is drawn
perpendicular
Draws a parallel line a specified distance from
any other line or curve. The distance of the
parallel is set in the window. The direction of the
parallel from the original line is established by
setting a point on the screen.
Draws a line perpendicular from a point to an
existing line.
Using the Command
Choose the Parallel by Distance command and
enter how far you want the parallel from the
original line in the Distance box in the window.
Set a point on the original line. A rubber-band line
shows how the parallel line will look. Next, move
your cursor to the side of the original line on
which you want the parallel to be drawn and set a
point. A parallel line will be drawn at the
specified distance.
98
Using the Command
Choose the Perpendicular to a Line command.
To restrict the command in a complex drawing so
that only selected lines can be used, click the
Selected Entities Only option. Set one point for
the location and starting point of the
perpendicular line and a second point on the line
to which the perpendicular line will be drawn.
NOTE: This command is similar to the Perpendicular
From a Line command, but this command uses the
point away from the line for the perpendicular location.
Perpendicular From a Line uses the point on the
existing line for the perpendicular location.
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Perpendicular from a Line
Menu: Draw / Lines / Perpendicular from a Line
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Reference point
Point 2: Direction of perpendicular
Draws a line perpendicular to an existing line.
The perpendicular line is drawn from a point on
the existing line in the direction of the second
point set. You can enter the length for the
perpendicular line in the window.
Example: Draw a 20-unit line perpendicular
from a certain point on another line in your
drawing.
Select the Perpendicular from Line command.
Enter 20 for the Length in the window. Set a
point on or near the line, at the point through
which you want the perpendicular line drawn. A
rubber-band line, 20 Drawing Units in length,
will be drawn from the line and through Point 1.
If you move the cursor to the other side of the line,
the perpendicular line will flip to the other side as
well. Set the second point when the line extends
in the desired direction.
Using the Command
Choose the Perpendicular from a Line
command. Enter the Length for the perpendicular
line in the window.
Tangent to a Circle
Menu: Draw / Lines / Tangent to a Circle
Toolbox Icon:
Set a reference point on or near the line from
which you want the perpendicular line drawn. A
rubber-band line appears. Then set a second point
away from the first line. A perpendicular line is
drawn from the existing line through the first
point in the direction of the second point.
NOTE: This command is similar to the Perpendicular
to a Line command, but this command uses the point
on or near the existing line for the perpendicular
location. Perpendicular to a Line uses the point away
from the line as the reference for the perpendicular
location.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Point 1: Endpoint for the tangent line
Point 2: Point near the circle
Draws a line tangent from a point to a circle,
ellipse, arc, or elliptical arc. There are two
possible lines that can be drawn tangent to a circle
from a single point. The line drawn is the one
closest to the second point.
99
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Choose the Tangent to a Circle command. Set a
point for the beginning of the line. After the first
point is set, a rubber-band line shows how the line
will be drawn. Set a point on or near the circle or
arc. A line will be drawn from the first point
tangent to the circle or arc.
arc. The endpoint of the line will be even with the
second point. A line will be drawn from the first
point to the second point, tangent to the circle or
arc.
Tangent between Circles
Menu: Draw / Lines / Tangent between Circles
Toolbox Icon:
NOTE: If you are not in 2D Mode, the line and circle
must lie in the same plane.
Tangent from a Circle
Menu: Draw / Lines/ Tangent from a Circle
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Point on or near circle
Point 2: Endpoint for the tangent line
Draws a line tangent from a point on a circle,
ellipse, arc, or elliptical arc to another point.
Using the Command
Choose the Tangent from a Circle command. Set
a point on or near the circle or arc. After the first
point is set, a rubber-band line shows how the
tangent will be drawn. Set a point for the end of
the line on or near the line tangent to the circle or
100
Point 1: Point on or near the first circle.
Point 2: Point on or near the second circle
Draws a line tangent to two circles, two arcs, or
an arc and a circle. There are four possible lines
that can be drawn tangent to any two circles. The
command draws a line closest to the two points
that you set in the command.
Using the Command
Choose the Tangent between Circles command.
Set a point on or near the first circle or arc. After
the first point is set, a rubber-band line shows how
the line will be drawn. Set a point on or near the
second circle or arc. A line will be drawn tangent
to the two circles or arcs.
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
NOTE: The Tangent commands do not work on circles
that have been saved in vector form. These entities are
not true circles. They are line entities approximating
circles. Also, if you are not in 2D Mode, the two lines
must lie in the same plane.
Contour Line
Menu: Draw / Lines / Contour line
Points 1-3: Points to define the contour plane
Surface Intersection
Draws a line through all locations where solids or
grid surfaces intersect a specified YZ, XZ, XY, or
custom plane.
Menu: Draw / Lines / Surface Intersection
Using the Command
Toolbox Icon:
Make sure that the current drawing contains at
least one solid or grid. (Grid surfaces are created
with the Surface Connect and Surface Patch
commands.)
Point 1: Point on first surface or plane
Select the Contour Line command. The
following window appears.
Point 2: Point on second surface or plane
Draws a line at the intersection of two surfaces.
This command can be used on grid surfaces as
well as planes.
Using the Command
Choose the Surface Intersection command. Set a
point on each of the intersecting surfaces. A line
is drawn along the intersection.
If Custom Plane is selected, set three points to
define the "contour plane." A contour line is
drawn through all locations where solids and/or
grid surfaces intersect the custom plane.
If YZ Plane, XZ Plane, or XY Plane is selected,
set a single point to define the location of the
"contour plane." The contour plane incorporates
the point set and lies parallel to the plane
indicated in the selected option. A contour line is
drawn through all locations where solids and/or
grid surfaces intersect the contour plane.
You can choose to run the Contour Line
command on the current selection only by
activating that option in the window.
contact us at www.designcad.com
101
DesignCAD Reference Manual
To save any resulting closed, contour lines as
planes, enable the Save Closed Contour Lines
as Planes option.
Construction Lines
Construction lines are used to aid in drawing.
They are temporary lines that can be removed
later.
Construction Line
Arcs
This section covers methods of creating arcs
(partial circles) and partial ellipses.
Arc
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Arc
Shortcut Key: A
Toolbox Icon:
Menu: Tools / Construction Line
Point 1-2: Points through which the construction
line passes.
Draws a 2D or 3D construction line.
Using the Command
Choose the Construction Line command. If you
want the construction line to extend in only one
direction, make sure the One Direction Only
option is enabled.
Point 1: Center of the arc
Point 2: Start of the arc
Point 3: Orientation of the arc (optional)
Draws an arc which spans a given angle.
Using the Command
Set one point for the beginning of the
construction line. Set a second point through
which the construction line passes. The
construction line is drawn.
The command will remain active, so additional
construction lines may be drawn. To end the
command, press Enter.
Choose the Arc command. Enter the arc angle in
the Angle field in the window. Finally use the
mouse to specify a center point, a starting point,
and an optional third point to orient the arc in 3D
space.
There are two choices for the format of the arc,
which you can set in the window:
Show Construction Lines
Menu: View / Show Construction Lines
Make lines drawn using the Construction Line
command visible or invisible (toggle function).
102
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc. You should normally use the arc format
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
because it is more efficient and precise. You can
use the line format if you need to distort the arc by
scaling or stretching.
to look a different view to see it as an arc. In the
Top view, this arc should look like the 60-degree
arc in the illustration above.
Example 1: Draw an arc in the XY plane with a
radius of 10 and an angle of 60 degrees.
Arc (Radius, Begin-End)
Change the view setting to the Front view.
Choose the Arc command and enter 60 degrees in
the Angle field. Set a point anywhere on the
screen for the arc's center. Choose the Point
Relative command from the Point menu or press
the ' (single quote) key, and enter 10 for DX. Set
a third point anywhere on the screen with the
mouse or arrow keys. Your arc should look like
the one in the illustration below.
Toolbox Icon:
Example 2: Create a 120-degree arc similar to
the one in the figure.
Point 3: Orientation (3D Mode only)
Set the angle as described above, and place the
points as shown in the illustration below.
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Arc (Radius, Begin-End)
Point 1: Start of arc
Point 2: End of arc
Draws an arc of predetermined radius by
specifying the beginning and ending points of the
arc and setting an optional third point to orient the
arc in 3D space.
Using the Command
There are two choices for the format of the arc,
which you can set in the window:
Example 3: Create a third arc at an angle of 60
degrees which is parallel to the XZ plane.
Set the angle as above. Set the center point, then
a point for the radius. For the third point press '
(single quote) key for the Point Relative
command, and set DZ to 10. In the Front view
this arc appears to be a straight line. You will have
contact us at www.designcad.com
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc. The arc format stores a center point,
endpoint, and orientation point in the drawing.
The line format stores a series of points for the
line approximating the arc.
103
DesignCAD Reference Manual
This command automatically creates an arc with
a span of less than 180 degrees, the smallest
possible arc based on the supplied radius and the
first two points set.
Example: Create an arc with a radius of 20.
Select the Arc (Radius, Begin-End) command.
Enter the Radius as 20 in the window. Set a point
somewhere around the center of the screen. Move
the cursor up and to the right a couple of inches
and set a second point. Now, move the cursor
between the two points. Notice that DesignCAD
forms a rubber-band arc. Set a third point to
determine the orientation of the arc. The arc is
inserted into the drawing.
Arc (3-Point)
Draws an arc using a specified starting point, a
second point through which the arc passes, and
the endpoint of the arc.
Using the Command
There are two choices for the format of the arc,
which you can set in the window:
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc. The arc format stores a center point,
endpoint, and orientation point in the drawing.
The line format stores a series of points for the
line approximating the arc.
You can draw arcs with this command in either a
decreasing or increasing angular direction. This
means that the arc can be drawn in either direction
from its starting point.
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Arc (3-Point)
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Beginning of the arc
Point 2: A point along the arc
Point 3: Endpoint of the arc
104
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Arc (Center, Begin, End)
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Arc (Center, Begin, End)
Toolbox Icon:
The first point you set becomes the center of the
arc. The second point sets both the radius and the
start angle of the arc. The third point sets the
ending angle of the arc, and will not necessarily
lie on the endpoint of the actual arc that is drawn.
Point 1: Center of arc
Point 2: Beginning of arc
Point 3: End of arc
Draws an arc using the center, beginning, and end
points of the arc.
Using the Command
There are two choices for the format of the arc,
which you can set in the window:
NOTE: Arcs drawn with this command are created in
such a way that the arc can only span a positive angle
from its starting point, so the arc will be drawn
counterclockwise from point 2 to the span angle on the
arc determined by point 3.
Arc (Endpoints, Center)
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc. If you Specify Radius, the radius is
independent of the distance between the first and
second points.
The arc format stores a center point, endpoint,
and orientation point in the drawing. The line
format stores a series of points for the line
approximating the arc.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Arc (Endpoints, Center)
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Beginning of the arc
Point 2: End of the arc
Point 3: Center (radius) of the arc
105
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Draws an arc using points set for the beginning,
end, and radius of the arc. This command is
similar to the Arc (Radius, Begin-End)
command except the radius is determined by the
third point rather than by entering a radius in the
window.
Tangent Arc
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Tangent Arc
Toolbox Icon:
Using the Command
There are two choices for the format of the arc,
which you can set in the window:
Point 1: First point of line tangent to arc
Point 2: Second point of line tangent to arc
Point 3: Direction in which the arc is to be drawn
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc. The arc format stores a center point,
endpoint, and orientation point in the drawing.
The line format stores a series of points for the
line approximating the arc.
The first point determines the beginning of the
arc. The second point defines the end of the arc.
After the second point is set, a rubber-band arc
shows how the arc will be drawn. Set a third point
for the center of the arc. An arc is then drawn
counterclockwise from the first point to the
second point.
Draws an arc with a specified radius by defining
a line tangent for one end of the arc.
Using the Command
Select the Tangent Arc command and enter the
Radius in the window. Enter the length for the arc
in the Length box.
NOTE: The length of the arc is measured along the arc
and is a linear measurement. It is not an angular or
chord measurement.
Set the first point for the imaginary line to which
the arc is be drawn tangent. Set the second and
final point for the line; this point will also serve as
the starting point of the arc. (These first two
points may be set on the endpoints of an existing
line - Use the Gravity command for this.) After
the second point is set, a rubber-band arc is drawn
106
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
and shows how the arc will be drawn. Move the
mouse to determine the orientation of the arc. Set
the endpoint for the arc.
Quarter Circle
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Quarter Circle
Shortcut Key: (
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Beginning of the quarter circle.
Point 2: Endpoint for the quarter circle.
Point 3: Orientation of the quarter circle
(optional, 3D Mode only)
Draws a quarter circle, or 90 degree arc, between
two points.
Using the Command
There are two choices for the format of the arc,
which you can set in the window:
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc. You should normally use the arc format
because it is more efficient and precise. You can
use the line format if you need to distort the arc by
scaling or stretching.
Set a point for the beginning of the quarter circle.
After the first point is set, a rubber-band circle
shows how the quarter circle will be drawn. Set a
point for the end of the quarter circle. Set a third
point to determine the orientation of the quarter
circle or press Enter to draw the quarter circle
using the current orientation. A quarter circle, or
90 degree arc, will be drawn counterclockwise
from the first point to the second point.
Semi Circle
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Semi Circle
Shortcut Key: )
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Beginning of the semicircle
Point 2: Endpoint of the semicircle
contact us at www.designcad.com
107
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Point 3: Orientation of the semicircle (optional,
3D Mode only)
Elliptical Arc
Draws a semicircle, or 180 degree arc, between
two points.
Toolbox Icon:
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Elliptical Arc
Using the Command
Choose the Semi Circle command. There are two
choices for the format of the arc, which you can
set in the window:
Point 1: Center of the ellipse
Point 2: Beginning of the arc
Point 3: End of the arc
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc. You should normally use the arc format
because it is more efficient and precise. You can
use the line format if you need to distort the arc by
scaling or stretching.
Set a point for the beginning of the semicircle.
After the first point is set, a rubber-band
semicircle shows how the semicircle will be
drawn. Set a point for the end of the semicircle.
Set a third point to determine the orientation of
the semicircle or press the Enter key to draw the
semicircle using the current orientation. A
semicircle will be drawn counterclockwise from
the first point to the second point.
108
Draws an elliptical arc, or part of an ellipse or
oval, between two points.
Using the Command
Choose the Elliptical Arc command. There are
two choices for the format of the arc, which you
can set in the window:
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc.
Set a point for the center of the arc and then set a
point for the beginning of the arc. After the
second point is set, a rubber-band arc shows how
the arc will be drawn. Set a point for the end of the
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
arc. An elliptical arc is drawn from the second
point, counterclockwise around the ellipse to the
third point.
Elliptical Arc (Center, Axes,
Angles)
Menu: Draw / Arcs / Elliptical Arc (Center, Axes,
Angles)
Toolbox Icon:
Choose the Elliptical Arc (Center, Axes,
Angles) command. There are two choices for the
format of the arc, which you can set in the
window:
If you select Draw as a Line, the arc will be
drawn as line segments that follow the shape of an
arc. Otherwise the arc will be stored as an actual
arc.
Set a point for the center of the arc. Set a point for
the major axis and a point for the minor axis. Set
a point for the beginning of the arc. After the
fourth point is set, a rubber-band arc shows how
the arc will be drawn. Set a point for the end of the
arc. The elliptical arc is drawn.
Point 1: Center of the elliptical arc
Point 2: Major axis
Point 3: Minor axis
Point 4: Beginning of the arc
Point 5: End of the arc
Draws an elliptical arc, or part of an ellipse or
oval, using a point for the major axis, a point for
the minor axis, a point for the beginning of the
arc, and a point for the end of the arc.
Using the Command
contact us at www.designcad.com
Circles
This section covers methods for creating full
circles and ellipses. For partial circles and
ellipses, see Arcs.
109
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Circle (Center, Outside)
Menu: Draw / Circles / Circle (Center, Outside)
Shortcut Key: O (the letter, not the number)
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of the circle
Point 2: Point on the circle
Point 3: Orientation of the circle (optional)
Draws a circle based on a point at the center and
a point on the outside of the circle. A third point
can be used to specify the plane on which the
circle lies.
Normally, you'll want to save the circle in the
Circle form. If you want to use the circle as you
would a solid, select Plane. Save the circle as a
Line if you want to be able to scale the circle or
treat it as a line entity.
Set a point near the center of the screen. Move the
cursor away from the first point in any direction.
Notice that a rubber-band representation of the
circle is drawn using the cursor location as a point
on the circle. Set a point when the circle is of the
desired radius. Now, hold down Ctrl+Shift while
moving the mouse forward or backward. This
moves the cursor away from or toward you on the
Z axis respectively. As you do this, the circle will
pivot on the hinge set by the first two points.
When the circle lies in the plane that you want it
to, set the third point.
Using the Command
Select the Circle (Center, Outside) command.
The window displays three choices for how you
want to save the circle:
Circle (Diameter)
Menu: Draw / Circles / Circle (Diameter)
Circle: Stored as an actual circle in the drawing.
Toolbox Icon:
Plane: Stored as a circular plane with 120 sides;
plane circles can be shaded.
Line: Stored as a line entity.
Point 1: A point on the diameter of the circle
110
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Point 2: A point for the opposite end of the
diameter
Point 3: A point to align the circle in 3D space
(optional)
lies in the plane you want it to, set the third point.
If you just want to set two points, press Enter after
you have set them.
Draws a circle between two points, so that the two
points lie on the diameter of the circle.
Using the Command
Select the Circle (Diameter) command. The
window displays three choices for how you want
to save the circle:
Circle (3-Point)
Menu: Draw / Circles / Circle (3-Point)
Toolbox Icon:
Circle: Stored as an actual circle in the drawing.
Plane: Stored as a circular plane with 120 sides;
plane circles can be shaded.
Point 1: Any point on the circle
Point 2: A second point on the circle
Line: Stored as a line entity.
Point 3: A third point on the circle
Normally, you'll want to save the circle in the
Circle form. If you want to use the circle as you
would a solid, select Plane. Save the circle as a
Line if you want to be able to scale the circle or
treat it as a line entity.
Draws a circle that passes through three points.
The three points must not lie in a straight line.
Set two points for the circle diameter. If
necessary, you can set a third point to define the
plane on which the circle lies: hold down
Ctrl+Shift while moving the mouse forward or
backward and notice how the circle swings on a
hinge set by the first two points. When the circle
Using the Command
Select the Circle (3-Point) command. The
window displays three choices for how you want
to save the circle:
Circle: Stored as an actual circle in the drawing.
contact us at www.designcad.com
111
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Plane: Stored as a circular plane with 120 sides;
plane circles can be shaded.
Line: Stored as a line entity. This makes it
possible to scale the circle or treat it as a line
entity with other commands.
Set a point on the screen through which the circle
will pass. Move the cursor away from the first
point in any direction and set a second point.
Now, as you move the cursor, you see a
rubber-band circle, showing you how the circle
would look if you set the final point at the cursor
location. To draw the circle in a different plane,
move the cursor along the Z axis by holding down
Ctrl+Shift and moving the mouse forward or
backward. This will move the cursor out or in
along the Z axis respectively. The circle will pivot
and change size according to the location of the
third point on the Z axis. When the circle lies in
the desired plane and is the correct size, set the
third point.
Circle (Center-Radius)
Menu: Draw / Circles / Circle (Center-Radius)
Toolbox Icon:
Using the Command
Select the Circle (Center-Radius) command.
The window displays three choices for how you
want to save the circle:
Circle: Stored as an actual circle in the drawing.
Plane: Stored as a circular plane with 120 sides;
plane circles can be shaded.
Line: Stored as a line entity. This makes it
possible to scale the circle or treat it as a line
entity with other commands.
Enter the Radius of the circle in the window. To
use the same radius as another circle, click the
Same As icon. A rubber-band circle shows how
the circle will be drawn. Set a point for the center
of the circle. Press Enter or set a second point to
orient the circle. Press Enter or set a third point to
tilt the circle using the first two points as a hinge.
Circle Tangent to 2 Lines
Menu: Draw / Circles / Circle Tangent to 2 Lines
Point 1: Center of the circle
Toolbox Icon:
Point 2: Orientation of the circle (optional)
Point 3: Orientation of the circle (optional)
Draws a circle of a specified radius with a point
set for the center. Two more points can be used to
orient the circle in 3D space.
112
Point 1: First line tangent to circle
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Point 2: Second line tangent to circle
Draws a circle of a specified radius which is
tangent to two lines. The two lines must lie in the
same plane unless you are currently in 2D Mode.
Using the Command
Select the Circle Tangent to 2 Lines command.
The window displays three choices for how you
want to save the circle:
NOTE: If the two lines do not lie in the same plane, and
the circle is drawn tangent to the two lines while in 2D
Mode, the circle is drawn at the Z coordinate the cursor
was on before the switch to 2D Mode. This will be
apparent when you switch back to 3D Mode.
Circle Tangent to 3 Lines
Menu: Draw / Circles/ Circle Tangent to 3 Lines
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: First line tangent to circle
Circle: Stored as an actual circle in the drawing.
Plane: Stored as a circular plane with 120 sides;
plane circles can be shaded.
Line: Stored as a line entity. This makes it
possible to scale the circle or treat it as a line
entity with other commands.
Enter the Radius of the circle in the window. Set
a point on each of the two lines which are to be
tangent to the circle. A circle with the specified
radius is drawn tangent to the two lines.
Point 2: Second line tangent to circle
Point 3: Third line tangent to circle
Draws a circle which is tangent to three lines. The
three lines must lie in the same plane unless you
are currently in 2D Mode.
Using the Command
Select the Circle Tangent to 3 Lines command.
The window displays three choices for how you
want to save the circle:
Circle: Stored as an actual circle in the drawing.
Plane: Stored as a circular plane with 120 sides;
plane circles can be shaded.
contact us at www.designcad.com
113
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Line: Stored as a line entity. This makes it
possible to scale the circle or treat it as a line
entity with other commands.
Set a point on the first line. Set a point on the
second line. After the second point is set, a
rubber-band circle shows how the circle will be
drawn. Set a point on the third line. A circle is
drawn tangent to the three lines.
Point 3: Point through which the ellipse passes
Draws an ellipse, or oval. Points are set for the
center and axes.
Using the Command
Choose the Ellipse command. The window
displays three choices for how you want to save
the ellipse:
Circle: Stored as an actual circle in the drawing.
Plane: Stored as a circular plane with 120 sides;
plane circles can be shaded.
NOTE: If the three lines do not lie in the same plane,
and the circle is drawn tangent to the three lines while
in 2D Mode, the circle is drawn at the Z coordinate the
cursor was on before the switch to 2D Mode. This will
be apparent when you switch back to 3D Mode.
Ellipse
Menu: Draw / Circles / Ellipse
Toolbox Icon:
Line: Stored as a line entity. This makes it
possible to scale the circle or treat it as a line
entity with other commands.
Set a point for the center of the ellipse. After the
first point is set, a rubber-band ellipse shows how
the ellipse will be drawn. Set a point for one axis
of the ellipse. Set a point through which the
ellipse passes. An ellipse will be drawn passing
through the second and third points with its center
at the first point.
Point 1: Center of the ellipse
Point 2: One axis of the ellipse
114
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Planes
2D planes are closed boundaries that act as
surfaces - they can be shaded like a 3D object.
This section covers 2D planes, which are flat.
(For 3D surfaces, see Surfaces.)
DesignCAD checks to see if the points form a
valid plane. If they do not, you will have the
option to allow DesignCAD to adjust the points
so that they form a plane.
Plane
Menu: Draw / Planes / Plane
Shortcut Key: P
Toolbox Icon:
Points 1-2: Starting point and edge of the plane
Points 3-n: Points around the perimeter of the
plane
Draws a plane or flat surface by setting points
around the perimeter of the surface. The points of
a plane must lie on a single plane in 3D space.
You cannot, for example, have a plane entity with
a bump in it. (You can use surface commands
such as Surface Connect and Extrude for that.)
NOTE: Be careful not to confuse the Plane command
with the Line command. Plane entities have surface
area, like a piece of paper, and can be shaded. Line
entities have no surface area, like a piece of thin wire,
and they cannot be shaded.
Example: Create a plane along five specific
points in your drawing.
Select the Plane command. Set the first point.
After the first point is set, a rubber-band drawing
of the plane appears, showing how the plane will
Using the Command
Choose the Plane command. Set a starting point
for the plane. Set another point for one edge of the
plane, and then set at least one more unique point
(i.e., not on Point 1 or Point 2) to set the plane.
When you have set all the points you want, press
Enter to end the command.
contact us at www.designcad.com
115
DesignCAD Reference Manual
look when subsequent points are added. Press
Enter after all the points have been set and a plane
is drawn on the screen.
Using the Command
Choose the Polygon (Edge) command. Enter the
number of sides for the polygon in the Number of
Sides box.
Set two points to designate one side of the
polygon. If the drawing is in 3D Mode, a third
point can be used to determine the plane on which
the polygon lies.
Polygon (Edge)
Menu: Draw / Planes / Polygon (Edge)
Toolbox Icon:
If you select the Save as a Line option, the
polygon will be saved as a line instead of a plane
entity.
This command is similar to the Polygon
(Center-Vertex) command, but with this
command you set two points for one edge of the
regular
polygon.
With
the
Polygon
(Center-Vertex) command, you set a point at the
center and a point at a vertex or midpoint of a side
of the polygon.
Point 1: Start of one side of the polygon
Example: Draw a polygon in your drawing.
Point 2: End of one side of the polygon
Select the Polygon (Edge) command. Set a point
for the beginning of one of the sides. Then move
the cursor away from Point 1. A rubber-band
polygon will be drawn using the cursor position
as Point 2. When the polygon is the desired size,
set Point 2. Hold down Ctrl while moving the
mouse up or down and the polygon will swing on
the axis of the first two points. When the polygon
lies in the desired plane, set the last point.
Point 3: Orientation of the polygon (3D Mode
only)
Draws a regular polygon - a convex shape in
which each side is the same length. The number
of sides can be entered in the window.
116
For updates and additional information,
2D Drawing Tools
Polygon (Center-Vertex)
Parallelogram
Menu: Draw / Planes / Polygon (Center - Vertex)
Menu: Draw / Planes / Parallelogram
Toolbox Icon:
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of the surface
Point 1: First point for the baseline
Point 2: A corner of the surface
Point 2: Second point for the baseline
Point 3: An orientation point to align the surface
in space (3D Mode only)
Point 3: Upper-right corner
Draws a regular polygon - a convex shape in
which each side is the same length.
Using the Command
Choose the Polygon (Center-Vertex) command.
Enter the number of sides for the polygon in the
Number of Sides box. In the Type box you can
choose to draw the polygon either from center to
a vertex or to the midpoint on one of the sides.
Draws a parallelogram defined by three points as
described above.
Using the Command
Choose the Parallelogram command. Set the
first point for the baseline of the parallelogram.
Set a point for the opposite end of the baseline.
After the second point is set, a rubber-band
parallelogram shows how the parallelogram will
be drawn. Set a point for the upper-right corner of
the parallelogram. A parallelogram is drawn with
three of its corners at the three points.
Set a point for the center of the polygon. Set a
second point to designate a vertex or the midpoint
of a side of the polygon. A third point can be used
to determine the plane on which the polygon lies.
If you select Save as a Line, the polygon will be
saved as a line entity instead of a plane.
contact us at www.designcad.com
117
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Example: Draw a parallelogram.
Select the Parallelogram command. Set a point
for the parallelogram's lower-left corner. Next,
select the Point Relative command (' key). In the
Point Relative box, enter 6 in the DX box and -3
in the DY box. Press Enter or click OK. Use the
mouse or the arrow keys to determine the width
and slant of the parallelogram. When the
rubber-band parallelogram is positioned
correctly, click the mouse or press the Insert key.
A parallelogram is drawn with its baseline
aligned with the angle of the first two points.
Set a point on the existing line. Then set a point to
establish the location of the plane.
Perpendicular Plane
Menu: Draw / Planes / Perpendicular Plane
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Existing line
Point 2: Point on the line to form the center of the
plane
Creates a plane perpendicular to any given point
on a line or curve.
Using the Command
Choose the Perpendicular Plane command. You
can set the width of the created plane in the Plane
Width field.
118
For updates and additional information,
4
3D Objects
Moving Around in a 3D
Drawing
Make sure that the 2D Mode button is not pushed
in; this tells you that you are in 3D Mode.
If the button is pushed in, click it to turn off 2D
Mode and put DesignCAD in 3D Mode. Next,
select the Options menu, look down the menu to
the 2-D Selection Mode command, and make
sure there is not a check mark to the left of the
command name. If there is a check mark, select
the command to disable it.
You can move the cursor in the drawing screen
using either the mouse or the keyboard.
(X in the Front view). Pressing only Ctrl forces
the mouse to go along the other axis in the plane
(Y in the Front view).
The mouse normally moves in increments of one
screen pixel. This distance varies depending on
your zoom factor and the original size of the
drawing. To constrain the mouse to move in
increments of a particular size (1.0, 0.25, etc.),
turn on the Snap Grid and set the Snap Grid Size
(see Grid Options). If the change causes your
mouse to move in a jerky manner, reduce the
value in the Snap Grid Size box. You may have
zoomed in on a region only slightly larger than
the snap increments.
Keyboard
In Front View or Perspective View, the mouse
moves in the XY plane. To move the mouse along
the third axis, first choose a drawing or point
command. Then simultaneously press the Ctrl
and Shift keys and continue holding down the
keys as you move the mouse. Forward mouse
motion moves the cursor in the positive direction
along the axis, and a backward motion moves the
cursor in the negative direction.
When using the keyboard, you move about the
screen using the arrow keys. The left and right
arrows move you along the horizontal axis (which
of the axes is "horizontal" depends on your view
angles). The up and down arrows move you along
the vertical axis. Press and hold the Shift key
while using the left, right, up, and down arrows to
move along the horizontal and vertical axes in
smaller increments or "steps." To move in the
third direction, press the Ctrl key in combination
with Home or End. To move the cursor in smaller
increments in the third direction, press Shift in
combination with the arrow keys or Ctrl+Home
or Ctrl+End.
When a drawing command is active, holding
down the Shift key alone forces the mouse to
move along one axis in the current viewing plane
You can also specify the size of the cursor
movement when using the arrow keys. Use the
Options / Cursor command to set the Large
Mouse: When you use the mouse, the cursor
normally moves along two of the three axes
(which two depends on your viewing angles).
contact us at www.designcad.com
119
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Step Size (regular arrow keys) and Small Step
Size (Shift+arrow keys) to convenient values.
(See Cursor Options.)
hold down the Ctrl+Shift keys and move the
cursor along the third axis. Set the second point
when the box is in position.
Solids
This section covers the 3D solid objects available
in DesignCAD, such as boxes, spheres, and
cones.
Box
Menu: Solids / Box
Shortcut Key: ]
Toolbox Icon:
Sphere
Menu: Solids / Sphere
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: First corner of the box
Point 2: Opposite corner of the box
Draws a 2-D or a 3-D box. A 2-D box is defined
as a Plane. A 3-D box is defined as a Solid.
Point 1: Center of the sphere
Using the Command
Point 2: Point on surface of the sphere
For a 2-D box, set a point for a corner of the box.
A rubber-band box shows how the box will be
drawn. Set a second point for the opposite corner.
Draws a solid sphere.
To draw a 3-D box, set a point for one corner of
the box. Move the cursor until the opposite corner
of the box is where you want to place it. Then
120
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Using the Command
Hemisphere
Choose the Sphere command. Specify the
number of sides or facets around both the
longitude and latitude of the sphere in the
window. The more facets the sphere has, the more
spherical it appears.
Menu: Solids / Hemisphere
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of the flat face
Point 2: Radius of the flat face
Point 3: Direction of the dome
The first point is the center of the sphere. The
second point determines the radius of the sphere.
This point can lie in one of three places: Pole,
Vertex, or Midpoint.
Vertex: The equator of the sphere is inscribed by
a circle of that radius. (The second point lies on
the equator at one of the longitudinal divisions.)
Midpoint: The equator of the sphere
circumscribes a circle of that radius. (The second
point will be on the equator midway between two
longitudinal lines.)
Draws a solid hemisphere.
Using the Command
Choose the Hemisphere command. Specify the
number of sides or facets around both the
longitude and latitude of the sphere in the
window. The more facets the sphere has, the more
spherical it appears.
Pole: The second point is at the pole and the axis
lies along the line between Points 1 and 2
Choose whether the second point represents a
point at a vertex of the rim, or a midpoint of one
of the flats on the rim.
contact us at www.designcad.com
121
DesignCAD Reference Manual
When you draw the hemisphere, you may find it
helpful to think of the object as a covered bowl.
Point 1 is set for the center of the cover. Point 2 is
somewhere on the rim. Point 3 defines the
direction of the bottom of the bowl from Point 1.
Choose the Cylinder command. You can specify
the number of sides or facets around the cylinder
in the window
You can also choose whether the midpoint or
vertex of the facets will be located at the radius
defined by Point 2. If you choose Vertex, the base
of the cylinder is inscribed by a circle of that
radius. If you choose Midpoint, the base of the
cylinder circumscribes a circle of that radius.
Cylinder
Menu: Solids / Cylinder
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of the cylinder face
Point 2: Radius of the cylinder
Cone
Point 3: Length and direction of the cylinder
Menu: Solids / Cone
Draws a solid cylinder.
Toolbox Icon:
Using the Command
122
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Point 1: Center of the base of the cone
Torus
Point 2: Edge of the base of the cone
Menu: Solids / Torus
Point 3: Height and direction of the cone
Toolbox Icon:
Draws a solid cone.
Using the Command
Select the Cone command. You can specify the
number of sides or facets around the cone in the
window.
Point 1: Center of the torus
Point 2: Center of the cross-section
Point 3: Radius of the cross-section
The Torus command draws a solid torus.
Vertex: The base of the cone is inscribed by a
circle of that radius.
Midpoint: The base of the cone circumscribes a
circle of that radius.
Set a point for the center of the base of the cone,
a second point at the edge of the base, and a third
point for the cone height.
Using the Command
Choose the Torus command. You can specify the
number of sides or facets around both the
longitude and latitude of the torus in the window.
The more facets the torus has, the smoother it
appears.
Vertex: The center for the cross-section of the
torus is inscribed by a circle of the radius defined
by the distance from Point 2 to Point 1. The torus
is inscribed by a circle of the radius defined by the
distance from Point 3 to Point 2.
contact us at www.designcad.com
123
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Midpoint: The center for the cross-section
circumscribes a circle of that radius. The
cross-section of the torus circumscribes a circle of
that radius.
Using the Command
Choose the Tube command. You can specify the
number of sides or facets around the tube in the
window.
Vertex: The inner/outer radius of the tube is
inscribed by a circle of that radius.
Midpoint: The inner/outer radius of the tube
circumscribes a circle of that radius.
Set a point for the center of the tube and a second
point for the inner or outer radius of the tube.
Now set a third point for the length of the tube.
Finally, set a fourth point for the other radius of
the tube (if the second point was the inner radius,
set the outer radius or vice versa).
Tube
Menu: Solids / Tube
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of the tube
Point 2: Radius 1 (inner or outer)
Point 3: Length of the tube
Point 4: Radius 2 (outer or inner)
Draws a solid tube.
124
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Truncated Cone
Menu: Solids / Truncated Cone
Toolbox Icon:
Set a point for the center of the base of the cone,
a second point at the edge of the base, and a third
point for the cone height. Next, move the cursor
inward toward the center and set the fourth point
for the edge of the truncated point of the cone.
Point 1: Center of the base of the cone
Point 2: Edge of the base of the cone
Point 3: Height of the cone
Point 4: Edge of the top of the cone
Draws a solid truncated cone.
Pyramid
Using the Command
Menu: Solids / Pyramid
Select the Truncated Cone command. You can
specify the number of sides or facets around the
cone in the window. The more facets the cone has,
the smoother it appears.
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of the pyramid's base
Point 2: Radius of the pyramid
Vertex: The radius of the cone is inscribed by a
circle of that radius.
Point 3: Height of the pyramid
Midpoint: The radius of the cone circumscribes
a circle of that radius.
Using the Command
contact us at www.designcad.com
Draws a solid pyramid.
125
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Select the Pyramid command and enter the
number of sides or facets for the pyramid in the
window.
Draws a solid box with filleted (rounded) corners
and edges.
Using the Command
Select the Rounded Box command and specify
the number of facets (or "faces") for the corners
and edges and the radius of these facets.
Vertex: The radius of the pyramid is inscribed by
a circle of that radius.
Midpoint: The radius of the
circumscribes a circle of that radius.
pyramid
Set a point for the first corner of the rounded box.
Move the cursor along the X, Y axes, and a
rubber-band box appears to help you determine
the size of your box. When the box is the desired
size, press Ctrl+Shift to move the cursor in the Z
axis. The rounded box is drawn at the size
specified by the two points set and by the values
entered for the options in the window.
Rounded Box
Menu: Solids / Rounded Box
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: First corner of the box
Point 2: Opposite corner of the box
126
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Wall
Menu: Solids / Wall
Once the first wall is set, adjacent walls are easily
added.
Shortcut Key: [
Rounded Cylinder
Toolbox Icon:
Menu: Solids / Rounded Cylinder
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: First corner of wall
Point 2: Opposite corner of wall
Draws a vertical wall of a specific thickness. It is
useful when placing walls in a building model.
Using the Command
Choose the Wall command and specify the wall
thickness.
All you need do is draw a 2D box; the thickness
you enter is automatically applied in the third
direction. Set a point for the first corner of the
wall. As you move the cursor, a rubber-band box
shows how the wall will be drawn. Set a second
point for the opposite corner of the wall face.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Point 1: Center of the first end
Point 2: Point on diameter of the first end
Point 3: Point on the diameter of the second end
Draws a cylinder with rounding applied to one or
both ends.
Using the Command
Select the Rounded Cylinder command and
specify the number of facets (or "faces") for the
corners and edges, and the radii of each cylinder
end.
127
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Set a point for the center of the first cylinder end.
Move the cursor along the X, Y axes, and a
rubber-band box appears to help you determine
the diameter of your cylinder. When the cylinder
is the desired size, set a second point. Then move
in the perpendicular direction and set a third point
to set the opposite end of the cylinder. The
Number of Sections determines the smoothness
of the rounding.
Ellipsoid
Menu: Solids / Ellipsoid
Toolbox Icon:
Using the Command
Choose the Ellipsoid command and set the
number of facets in both directions. You can
either enter the three radius values, or deselect
Specify Radius and use the cursor to size the
ellipsoid.
Set the first point at the center of the ellipsoid. If
you are setting the radius points using the cursor,
set two more points for the major axis and minor
axis. If you entered the radius values, the second
point determines the orientation of the ellipsoid.
Draws a solid “football” shape - an oblong solid
with radii defined for all three directions.
128
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Surfaces
Using the Command
This section covers 3D surfaces - zero-thickness
objects equivalent to sheets or pieces of paper.
(The 2D Plane commands also create surfaces,
but these are flat. See Planes.)
Select the object you want to sweep, and choose
the Sweep command. The following window
appears:
These surfaces can be thought of as “grid”
surfaces; they are created from a set of contour
lines (rather than boundary curves) with implicit
surfaces between them.
Sweep
Menu: Draw / Sweep
Shortcut Key: W
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of rotation
Point 2: Second point for axis of rotation (Two
Point rotation only)
Makes a circular extrusion of selected objects.
This command is used to create a circular Solid
object from a single line outlining the silhouette
of the object. You can also use this command to
make a spiral-shaped object such as a spring or a
bolt by specifying an offset for the sweep.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Axis: You can select from five options for the axis
of rotation. The object is swept around the first
point set, parallel to the axis specified here. You
can choose one of the main axes, an axis defined
by two points, or an axis defined by an existing
line.
Number of Copies: The number of times the
original shape is replicated. The more copies you
make, the smoother the end result appears, but
more copies also take longer to shade or edit. For
most purposes you will probably want at least 10
copies per revolution (one copy every 36
degrees).
Span Angle: The number of degrees the object
will sweep about its axis. For a complete, circular
extrusion, enter 360°. If you are creating a spiral
shape, you can enter more than 360° to achieve
more than one revolution. For example, enter
1440 to get four complete revolutions.
129
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Vertical Offset: The distance along the axis of
rotation that the final copy is from the original.
For normal, circular sweeps, this should be set to
zero. If a value is used here, DesignCAD draws a
spiral-shaped object instead of a circular object.
Choose the X-Axis and set a point to the right of
the handle. DesignCAD sweeps the connected
lines and forms the spool.
Vertical Offset Velocity: The ratio between the
initial pitch of the offset and the final pitch of the
offset. If a value of 5 is used, the final pitch will
be 5 times greater than the initial pitch. If a value
of 0 or 1 is used, the pitch will remain constant.
Radius Ratio: The distance from the selection
handle to the axis is used for the sweep radius at
the beginning of the sweep. The final radius for
the sweep equals the beginning sweep radius
multiplied by the Radius Ratio.
If a value of 1 is used for the Radius Ratio, the
radius stays the same throughout the sweep. If a
value greater than 1 is used, the distance from the
axis to the extrusion increases throughout the
sweep. If a value less than 1 is used, the distance
from the axis to the extrusion decreases
throughout the sweep.
Example: Draw a spool.
First, draw the outline or shape of the spool
(shown below) and select it. Then choose the
Sweep command. Enter 20 in the Copies box and
360 for Span Angle. Leave the offset as 0.
130
Extrude
Menu: Draw / Extrude
Shortcut Key: X
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1-n: Distance and direction for the extrusion
path
Extends a 2D object into three dimensions,
connecting it from one point to another with
surfaces. For example, you can extrude a floor
plan upward to make the walls of a house, or you
can extrude a circle to make a pipe or bar.
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Using the Command
Select the object to be extruded and choose the
Extrude command. The following window
appears:
Set a reference point and one or more points for
the object to be extruded to. The object is
extruded so the selection handle is placed at each
point set.
The reference point represents the location of the
selected object's handle. The other points
represent the distance and direction of the
extrusion points. They form a parallel to the
actual extrusion path.
To extrude at a fixed angle, click Fixed Angle and
then enter an angle measurement in the
Extrusion Angle box. Positive angle values
make the extruded end larger; negative values
make it smaller. Set the points for the extrusion
and then press Enter.
The object does not move to the reference point.
Instead, the extrusion starts at the current location
of the object. Therefore, it is most convenient to
just set the reference point on the handle of the
object. Press Enter when you have set all the
points.
To use a different scale at points along the
extrusion, click Varying Scale. A point list will
appear in the window. Set the scale for the points
of the extrusion by moving through the point
numbers in the window and setting the Extrusion
Scale. The scale is relative to the extruded
object's original size and not necessarily to its size
at the previous point. Set the points for the
extrusion and then press Enter.
Remember Scales: Used in situations where the
Varying Scale option is being used repeatedly. If
checked, the scales for each additional point are
remembered from command to command.
contact us at www.designcad.com
131
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Extrude Along a Curve
Menu: Draw / Extrude Along a Curve
Shortcut Key: Ctrl + Shift + X
Toolbox Icon:
Extrudes an object along a path defined by a line,
curve, or other drawing entity. It is possible to
specify varying scales along the path by setting
multiple points along it.
Using the Command
Select the object to be extruded and choose the
Extrude Along a Curve command. The
following window appears:
object's original size and not necessarily to its size
at the previous point. Set the points for the
extrusion and then press Enter.
Orientation: Controls the orientation of the
cross-section as it moves along the path. The
options here are the same as those for Array
Along a Curve (see Array).
Degree of Fineness: Provides some measure of
control over the number of cross-sections that are
generated. A value of 0 forces the command to
use the same number of cross-sections as were
used in Version 14 and earlier.
Remember Extrusion Scales: Used in situations
where the Varying Scale option is being used
repeatedly. If checked, the scales for each
additional point are remembered from command
to command.
Surface Patch
Menu: Draw / Surface Patch
Toolbox Icon:
Select the curve to extrude along. The extrusion is
created.
To use a different scale at points along the
extrusion, click Varying Scale. A point list will
appear in the window. Set the scale for the points
of the extrusion by moving through the point
numbers in the window and setting the Extrusion
Scale. The scale is relative to the extruded
132
Point 1: First line
Point 2: Second line
Point 3: Third line
Point 4: Fourth line (optional)
Fits a smooth surface between any three or four
lines, curves, or arcs which meet at their
endpoints to form a closed area.
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Using the Command
Choose the Surface Patch command and specify
the grid spacing for the surface.
Stretches a surface between two or more lines.
The lines can be planes, lines, curves, arcs, or
circles. The original lines to be connected can be
any shape and at any orientation in 3D space.
Using the Command
Set a point on each line entity you want to patch.
The line entities must share endpoints and make
up a closed area or the Surface Patch command
does not work properly. Press Enter when you are
finished. The lines are then connected with a grid
surface.
Choose the Surface Connect command. Set a
point on each line entity to be connected and
changed into a Solid. Press Enter to end the
command, when you have the necessary points.
Connection Type: There are three options for the
connecting surface:
• Normal: Makes a ruled surface between
each pair of lines.
Surface Connect
Menu: Draw / Surface Connect
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Q
Toolbox Icon:
• Curved: Forms a ruled surface "bent" to
follow the curve defined by the points set
between the original lines. It is a straight or
linear fit between the original lines.
Point 1: First line to be connected with a surface
Intermediate Points: Lines or points to define
surface path
Point n: Last line to be connected with a surface
contact us at www.designcad.com
133
DesignCAD Reference Manual
• Smooth: Forms the smoothest possible
surface over the original lines.
No. of Planes per Line: The number of
individual planes to be constructed in the
connecting surface along the original lines.
No of Intermediate Breaks: The number of
planes to be constructed in the connecting surface
between each pair of original lines. With the
Normal and Smooth options, you set a point on
each of the original lines to be connected. With
the Curved option, you can set additional points
in between the original lines to force the surface
to curve through those intermediate points.
Use Original Points: Forces the command to
connect the original points of the cross-section
lines and ignore the No. of Planes Per Line
option. This option retains the true shape of the
lines being connected. If this option is disabled,
the vertices of the surface are distributed equally
along the length of each line and can result in
some corners being clipped off.
This option only works correctly if each line
being connected has the same number of points
and is useful when connecting a surface along a
series of arrayed/copied lines or planes.
Retain Original Point Order: Connects points
of each line to the corresponding points on the
following line (i.e., Point 1 is connected to Point
1, Point 2 to Point 2, etc.). Like the Use Original
Points option, this option is most useful when
connecting a series of arrayed/copied lines or
planes.
134
When this option is enabled, it doesn't matter
which point or points are used when selecting
each line to be connected; unexpected twists are
eliminated in the final surface. If this option is not
selected, the selected point of each line is
connected to the selected point of the next one,
which can result in unintended twists in the
surface for closed cross-sections.
3D (Solid) Editing
Operations
This section covers ways you can combine solids,
otherwise known as Boolean operations.
See also: Section Delete and Section Cutoff.
Solid Add
Menu: Solids / Solid Add
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+J
Point 1: First Solid
Point 2: Solid to be added to first
Adds one Solid object to another. It makes a
single Solid out of two Solids, and eliminates any
unnecessary remaining surfaces.
Using the Command
Choose the Solid Add command and set a point
on each of the Solids to be added. The Solids are
then combined into a single Solid, and any
internal surfaces are removed.
NOTE: For best results, the solids should overlap
rather than meet exactly at a single face. For example,
if you want to stack a cube on top of another, make one
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
cube just a little taller, and place the other cube so that
the overall height is correct. When you add the solids,
the overlapping volume is removed.
Example: Make a single solid from a cylinder
passing through a box.
Using the Command
Choose the Solid Intersect command. Set a point
on each of the intersection Solids. The
overlapping area remains.
Select the Solid Add command and set a point on
the box. Set a second point on the cylinder.
DesignCAD redraws the two objects as a single
Solid, removing any unnecessary surfaces.
Solid Subtract
Menu: Solids / Solid Subtract
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+U
Point 1: Solid to be removed (template)
Solid Intersect
Point 2: Solid to be subtracted from
Menu: Solids / Solid Intersect
Removes one Solid from another Solid that it
overlaps. the solids should overlap rather than
meet exactly at a face.
Point 1: First Solid
Point 2: Second Solid
Removes all parts of two overlapping Solids
except the part that both Solids share. This part
forms a new Solid.
contact us at www.designcad.com
135
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Using the Command
Choose the Solid Subtract command. Set a point
anywhere on the solid to be subtracted (the one
that will be used as a template for the hole). Set a
second point on the solid to be subtracted from.
The first solid is removed from the second solid.
Choose the Solid Exclusive Or command. Set a
point on each of the solids. The common volume
between the two solids is removed. The only
portions that remain are portions that were
exclusive to one or the other of the two original
solids.
NOTE: For best results, the solids should overlap
rather than meet exactly at a face.
Example: Subtract common volume from an
intersecting box and a cylinder.
Select the Solid Exclusive Or command and set
a point on each of the solids. DesignCAD
removes the shared volume and redraws the
remaining portions.
NOTE: To erase the cut lines that remain after this
command, see Hidden Edge and Hidden Edge by
Section.
Solid Exclusive Or
Menu: Solids / Solid Exclusive Or
Point 1: First Solid
Point 2: Second Solid
Subtracts the volume in common between two
solids. If a portion or portions of both of the solids
remain, the portions are still recognized as a part
of their original solid.
136
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Solid Segregate
Slice
Menu: Solids / Solid Segregate
Menu: Solids / Slice
Point 1: First Solid
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+L
Point 2: Second Solid
Points 1-3: Points to define the cutting plane
Isolates the common volume between two solids.
This command is like the Solid Exclusive Or
command, but the common volume is cut out of
the two solids and becomes a separate solid,
rather than be subtracted from them.
Point 4: Region to be removed
Using the Command
Select the Slice command. The Slice window
appears.
Choose the Solid Segregate command. Set a
point on each of the solids. The common volume
between the two solids is cut out and becomes a
third solid. The only portions that remain as the
two original solids are portions that were
exclusive to those solids before the command was
executed..
Deletes parts of the drawing in front of or behind
a predefined or custom plane.
Using the Command
If a main plane is selected, set a single point to
define the location of the cutting plane. Then set
a point either in front of or behind the location of
the cutting plane. All parts of the drawing that lie
on that side of the cutting plane will be cut and
erased at the specified location using a plane that
lies parallel to the plane indicated in the selected
option.
NOTE: For best results, the solids should overlap
rather than meet exactly at a face
contact us at www.designcad.com
If the second point is not used and the Enter key
is pressed, then all entities and parts of entities
will be cut at the cutting plane location, but will
not be erased.
137
DesignCAD Reference Manual
If Custom Plane is selected, set three points to
define the cutting plane. Then set a point either in
front of or behind the cutting plane. All parts of
the drawing that lie on that side of the cutting
plane will be erased.
If the fourth point is not used and the Enter key is
pressed, then all entities and parts of entities will
be cut at the cutting plane location, but will not be
erased.
Slice by Curved Surface
Menu: Solids / Slice by Curved Surface
Point 1: Solid to be sliced
Point 2: Surface to be used to slice solid
Slices a solid using a curved surface.
Using the Command
Select the Slice by Curved Surface command.
Set a point on the solid to be sliced. Set a point on
a curved surface that intersects the solid. The
138
curved surface may be drawn using the Surface
Patch or Surface Connect command. The solid
is cut using the curved surface.
Cross Section
Menu: Solid / Cross Section
Points 1-3: Points to define the plane of the cross
section
Draw cross sections of solids that intersect a
specified YZ, XZ, XY, or custom plane.
Using the Command
Make sure that the current drawing contains at
least one solid. (The Cross Section command
does not work on surface grids drawn using the
Surface Connect and Surface Patch commands;
grids do not have volume.) Select the Cross
Section command.
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
If a main plane is selected, set a single point to
define the location of the cross-section plane. The
cross-section plane incorporates the point set and
lies parallel to the plane indicated in the selected
option. A plane is drawn for each portion of a
solid that intersects the cross-section plane.
If Custom Plane is selected, set three points to
define the cross-section plane. A plane is drawn
for each portion of a solid that intersects the
cross-section plane.
Cross sections can be moved away from their
solids and shaded since they are plane entities.
Solid Interference Check
Menu: Solids / Solid Interference Check
Point 1: First solid to check for interference
Point 2: Second solid to check for interference
Checks two solids to see if they overlap one
another at any point.
Using the Command
To use this command, select the command and set
a point on each solid. DesignCAD will display a
window stating whether or not interference is
detected.
Using the Command
Select the objects you want to define as one Solid,
and choose the Solid Define command. The
Solids are defined as one Solid.
A Solid must be a closed set of planes and
surfaces. This command does not verify whether
the current selection is a legitimate Solid. If you
define an invalid Solid, operations such as Solid
Add or Solid Subtract command may not work
correctly.
Solid Explode
Menu: Solids / Solid Explode
Reduces a selected Solid into its component parts:
planes, surface meshes, and lines. Each
component can then be manipulated individually,
without affecting the rest of the former Solid.
Using the Command
Select the Solid to be exploded and choose the
Solid Explode command. The Solids now regain
their individual properties and can be
manipulated as individual components.
NOTE: Once a solid is exploded, it cannot be used in
solid commands such as Solid Add and Solid
Subtract. To combine objects into a solid, use Solid
Define.
Solid Define
Menu: Solids / Solid Define
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+D
Combines all the currently selected entities as a
single Solid. This allows you to build Solids from
a collection of planes, extrusions, and surfaces.
contact us at www.designcad.com
139
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Hammer
Menu: Edit / Hammer
Point 1: Source point on the grid (point where the
hammer hits)
to be modified with the Hammer command, you
should make the spacing dense enough to get a
smooth result.
Point 2: Destination point (where the hammer
forces the grid)
Reshapes a surface grid.
Using the Command
Choose the Hammer command. In the window
choose the options you want.
NOTE: The Hammer command only affects surfaces
created with the Surface Connect or Surface Patch
commands. It does not affect planes, lines, curves,
arcs, or extruded objects. It can be useful in creating
specially shaped surfaces.
Working Planes
The size of the area affected by this command can
be specified by entering the Radius. Clicking
Free Edges lets the command warp the edges of
the surface that is being hammered. You can also
select whether the modified portion of the surface
is to have a rounded or sharp point.
The working plane is the plane on which 2D
objects are created. In 2D mode, the working
plane is always the XY plane, but when working
in 3D, you can switch the working plane.
Set Working Plane
Menu: View / Working Plane / Set Working Plane
Point 1: Origin of workplane
When you have specified the options you want,
set a point on the surface grid at the location it is
to be modified, and a point for the destination of
that location. The surface is "hammered."
Point 2: X axis of workplane
The Hammer command only moves existing
points (intersections) on the grid. It does not
create any new points. When you construct a grid
Sets a specified plane as a temporary substitute
for the XY plane. It adjusts mouse and cursor
movements accordingly. This feature is very
convenient for doing work along oblique faces of
complex objects.
140
Point 3: Orientation of workplane
Point 4: A point defining the front of the plane
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Using the Command
Choose the Set Working Plane command. Set
four points for the workplane. Point 1 becomes
the new origin. Point 2 determines the X axis of
the workplane. Point 3 establishes the orientation
of the plane. Point 4 determines the front side of
the plane.
Then set the name and confirm the orientation of
the working plane.
the plane DesignCAD recognizes as the front.
When you have done this, the program redraws
the pyramid with the front of the plane facing you.
Working Plane Properties
Makes it easy to switch from one workplane to
another when multiple workplanes have been
defined for a drawing.
Using the Command
After at least one workplane has been defined (in
addition to the default workplane) with the Set
Working Plane command, select the Working
Plane Properties command. The following
window appears.
TIP: If the entire drawing is not visible after using the
Set Working Plane command, use the Fit to All
Windows command to readjust the views.
Example: Work on the face of a pyramid.
Set the first point on the lower left corner of one
of the faces. This point sets the origin for the
workplane. Set the second point at the lower right
corner of the same face. This sets the X axis for
the workplane. Set the third point on the apex of
the pyramid. This sets the orientation, or tilt, of
the plane. The last point determines which side of
The lower window on the left of the window
shows a list of the defined workplanes. The top
window on the left gives the specifics for the
selected workplane.
Set as Active Working Plane: Sets the selected
workplane as the current workplane.
contact us at www.designcad.com
141
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Reset Working Plane: Resets the default
workplane as the current workplane.
Rename: Opens a window in which you can
rename the workplane and/or change its
description.
vertical viewing angle (the viewer's rotation
about the X-axis), and the tilt (the viewer's
rotation about the Z-axis).
Delete: Deletes the selected workplane.
Reset Working Plane
Menu: View / Working Plane / Reset Working
Plane
Reverses a Set Working Plane command. It
restores the original coordinate system to the
drawing, deleting any reference to the temporary
coordinate axes set up by the Set Working Plane
command.
3D View Settings
When working in 3D, you will often need to
change the angle or orientation at which you see
the model. This section covers ways to change the
view, as well as ways to save views for future
reference.
View Toolbox
The View Toolbox contains useful tools for
modifying the way you look at your drawing in
3D space. You can change the horizontal viewing
angle (the viewer's rotation about the Y-axis), the
NOTE: For information on displaying toolboxes, see
View Options.
You can change the orientation of the drawing
visually by dragging the mouse. You can choose
from a set of predefined viewing angles, or you
can define your own view. No matter what
direction you want to approach your drawing
from, DesignCAD's View Toolbox lets you get
there. Like the snap tools, these tools can be used
inside another command.
From the Projection List, select the standard
view you want to see: Side View, Top View, etc.
You can adjust the angle incrementally in all three
directions by clicking the Move Camera buttons.
You can also set the View Distance and use the
arrow buttons to adjust the distance
incrementally.
Set Viewer Points: Set two points - the first for
the viewer position and the second for the view
direction.
142
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Set View by View Center, Set View by Drawing
Center: Set the view center and drag the mouse
around (keeping the left button pressed) to adjust
the view.
Set View
Menu: View / Set View
Shortcut Key: Y
Changes the viewer location.
Using the Command
Select the Set View command and move the
cursor to the view window. Hold down the left
mouse button and drag the cursor across the
screen with the mouse. The view changes as you
drag the mouse. To preview the drawing at a view
position, release the mouse button. Press Enter
when you have the desired view.
You can change the perspective of the view by
moving the cursor in and out on the Z axis (by
pressing Ctrl+Shift and moving the mouse). This
command can be undone with the Zoom
Previous command.
Set View by Drawing Center
Menu: View / Set View by Drawing Center
To change the view, set the view center and drag
the mouse around (keeping the left button
pressed) to adjust the view.
Save Current View
Menu: View / Save Current View
Saves the current view settings as a custom view
selection in the View Toolbox (see View
Toolbox.)
contact us at www.designcad.com
143
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
When you have adjusted the view to your liking,
select the Save Current View command. Enter a
name for your custom view in the and click OK.
The view is saved under the selected name in the
view box in the View Toolbox. You can remove
the view by selecting the view and pressing the
Del key.
Displays non-smoothed shading -- for example,
all the facets on a cylinder will look flat, instead
of smoothly rounded.
Object Display
Choose View / Display Types (Active View) to
change the settings for only one view. Choose
Display Types (All Views) to change settings for
all displayed views.
Wireframe
Menu: View / Display Types / Wireframe
Displays the model without shading, and without
hiding lines.
Smooth Shading Mode
Menu: View / Display Types / Smooth Shading
Mode
Round objects will look smoothly rounded
instead of having a lot of flat faces. How smooth
it looks will depend on how many facets were
used to generate the object.
Flat Shading Mode
Menu: View / Display Types / Flat Shading Mode
Quick Hidden Line Mode
Menu: View / Display Types / Quick Hidden Line
Mode
144
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Hides lines that would be hidden by other parts of
the object, but it will not show the "seams" where
one solid intersects with another
Hidden Line Removal
Menu: Tools / Hidden Line Removal
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+F8
Toolbox Icon:
Performs hidden line removal on the entire
drawing or on a section of the drawing. This
causes all lines behind surfaces to be removed,
giving the objects a more realistic image.
Using the Command
Hidden Line Mode
Menu: View / Display Types / Hidden Line Mode
Choose the Hidden Line Removal command and
the following window appears:
Hides hidden lines and also shows the boundary
where two solids intersect.
Specify whether you want to remove lines for the
entire active view, all views, or only a section. If
you choose the Section option, set two points to
enclose the section on which you want
DesignCAD to execute the command.
You can also specify whether you want the text
and dimensions to be displayed with the resulting
image.
If your graphics card supports graphics
acceleration, check the Enable Graphics
Acceleration option to improve performance.
contact us at www.designcad.com
145
DesignCAD Reference Manual
This will enable interactive hidden line removal.
Interactive hidden line removal will allow you to
move and edit existing drawing items and even
add new ones, all while the specified view(s)
maintain hidden line removal. The view(s) will
remain in hidden line removal mode until you
change the status of the view(s) to wireframe or
shading.
to subtract the circular planes from the square
plane. Notice the cut-plane lines which are a
necessity of this kind of operation. Choose the
Hidden Edge command and set a point on one of
the cut-plane lines. The cut-plane line will be
removed from the view and will not be printed in
subsequent printouts. Repeat the Hidden Edge
command as many times as desired.
If your graphics card supports graphics
acceleration, you can also check the Display
Intersection Lines with Graphics Acceleration
option to display lines at the intersections of
solids and planes.
Hidden Edge by Section
Menu: Edit / Hidden Edge by Section
Erases cut-plane lines which are sometimes a
result of the Cut Plane, Polygon Subtract, and
Solid Subtract commands.
Hidden Edge
Menu: Edit / Hidden Edge
Erases cut-plane lines which are sometimes a
result of the Cut Plane, Polygon Subtract, and
Solid Subtract commands.
Using the Command
After executing a Cut Plane, Polygon Subtract,
or Solid Subtract command, select the Hidden
Edge command. Set a point on one of the
cut-plane lines so that it will be hidden from the
view or from a printout of the drawing.
Example: Draw a large square plane and two
small circular planes. Draw the circular planes so
that they are contained by the square plane with
respect to the XY plane. Use Polygon Subtract
146
Using the Command
After executing a Cut Plane, Polygon Subtract,
or Solid Subtract command, select the Hidden
Edge by Section command. Set two points to
define a bounding box that encloses or touches
the cut-plane lines, so that they will be hidden
from the view or from a printout of the drawing.
Example: Draw a large square plane and two
small circular planes. Draw the circular planes so
that they are contained by the square plane with
respect to the XY plane. Use Polygon Subtract
to subtract the circular planes from the square
plane. Notice the cut-plane lines which are a
necessity of this kind of operation. Choose the
Hidden Edge by Section command and set a
point at one corner of the area that contains the
cut-plane lines to the left of the circular holes.
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
This point also defines one of the corners for a
bounding (or rubber-band) box that moves with
the cursor. Move the cursor so that the bounding
box touches both of the edges to the left of the
holes. Set another point. Both of the cut-plane
lines to the left of the holes will be removed from
the view and will not be printed in subsequent
printouts. Now do the cut-plane lines on the right
side of the holes.
Light and material settings can be used to make
the shaded rendering appear realistic. See Light
and Materials.
Using the Command
Choose the Shading command. The Shading
Options window appears:
Show All Edges
Menu: Edit / Show All Edges
Shows any edges that were hidden using Hidden
Edge or Hidden Edge by Section.
Shading
Menu: Tools / Shading
Shortcut Key: F8
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: First corner of shading region (optional)
Point 2: Opposite corner of shading region
(optional)
Shades all or part of a drawing. Only solids,
surfaces, and planes can be shaded.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Phong (Best Quality): Uses a fine shading
pattern, and displays the material texture and/or
texture mapping.
Gouraud (Medium Quality): Displays the
material texture and/or texture mapping, but the
resulting shading is not quite as fine as that of
Phong shading.
Quick (Flat): Quite a bit faster than Phong or
Gouraud shading, but the shading is coarser and
less realistic. No smoothing takes place, and
material textures and texture mapping are not
represented.
All three shading methods can be done either for
the active view, all views, or for a rectangular
region of the screen. The method you choose
becomes the default selection the next time you
use the Shading command.
147
DesignCAD Reference Manual
If your graphics card supports graphics
acceleration, check the Enable Graphics
Acceleration option to improve performance.
This will enable interactive shading. Interactive
shading will allow you to move and edit existing
drawing items and even add new ones, all while
the specified view(s) maintain shading. The
view(s) will remain in shading mode until you
change the status of the view(s) to wireframe or
hidden line removal.
Enable Anti-aliasing: Determines whether or
not to change the color of the object at its edges
slightly so that all straight edges will appear
smoother. If checked, the edges will be smoothed.
Otherwise some of the edges will appear slightly
jagged.
Fogging Function: The function used to create
the fog. Linear produces proportionally more fog
the "deeper" into the drawing you go. Exp
produces a less dense fog than Linear. Exp2 also
produces a less dense fog than Linear, following
a different function than Exp.
Fog Density (%): The maximum fog density.
Fog Start Position: The point in the drawing
where the fog is at its minimum. This value is a
scale factor based on the depth of the drawing
from the front to the back at the current view
settings. A value of 0 starts the fog at the very
front of the drawing. A value of -1 starts the fog
one drawing-depth in front of the drawing's front.
A value of 0.5 starts the fog in the middle of the
drawing.
NOTE: This position and scaling will vary depending on
the size of the drawing, the viewing angle, and distance
settings.
Enable Transparency: When Phong or Gouraud
shading is used and graphics acceleration is
disabled, this option can be enabled to show
transparencies when a drawing contains objects
that have been assigned materials that have
transparent qualities and the drawing is shaded.
Enable Fogging: When Phong or Gouraud
shading is used and graphics acceleration is
disabled, this option can be enabled to add a fog
effect to the rendered drawing.
148
Fog Stop Position: The point in the drawing
where the fog reaches its maximum thickness.
Like the Fog Start Position, this value is a scale
factor based on the depth of the current view of
the drawing.
Fog Color: The base color for the fog. To select
the color, click the color box and select a color
from the palette
Apply Fog to Background: If checked, the entire
drawing background becomes the same color as
the fog.
If Windows is configured for only 16 colors, the
shaded drawing is not very realistic. If Windows
is configured for 32,000 or more colors, however,
the shading will be fastest and look very realistic.
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
You can change the number of colors and the
screen resolution used by Windows in the
Windows Control Panel, under Display.
Light and Materials
Move with Eye: The light sources move when
the viewing angle changes. Otherwise the light
sources remain in their locations relative to the
drawing when the viewing angle changes.
These options affect how 3D entities look in
shaded rendering.
Light Source Options
Menu: Tools / Light Source
Create up to eight different light sources. Each
source is activated by clicking the checkbox
beside it.
Material Options
Menu: Options / Material
Specify the material properties of an object. You
can choose the current material from the materials
provided. In other words, you select the material
in which the next object or objects will be drawn.
You can also create your own materials.
Intensity: . Increasing the intensity of one light
source does not increase the total amount of light.
The total light is divided between each of the
active light sources. If all eight light sources are
turned on and set to intensity 100, each
contributes 1/8 of the total light.
Horizontal Angle, Vertical Angle: Sets the
horizontal and vertical angles of the light source
relative to the drawn object.
contact us at www.designcad.com
149
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Emission: Makes a shaded object look brighter,
as though it is being lit from within. A value of 0
has no visible effect. A value of 100 makes the
material look very bright. Emissive objects do not
act as light sources. They do not cast light on
other objects in the drawing.
Contrast: How shiny the surface appears. The
lower the setting, the shinier the surface appears.
Texture Type: The texture of the material.
Texture Scale: The amount and size of the
texturing.
After the material is selected, objects drawn will
have that material property. For example, if you
select the material Walnut and then draw a
hemisphere, the hemisphere will look like walnut
wood.
Color: The color of the selected material.
Clicking on this bar will bring up the color
palette.
Add: Creates a custom material. You can set
preferences for all of the material's properties.
NOTE: Library materials cannot be edited. To create
editable materials, click Add.
Ambient: The amount of background light
shining on the object. This dictates how much
shadow is visible on a shaded object.
Diffuse: The amount of flat (not shiny) reflection
you get from a shaded object.
Specular: How shiny (not flat) the material
appears.
Transparency: How "see-thru" the material
appears. Materials with a value of 0 are opaque.
Materials with a value of 100 can barely be seen
when shaded. Transparency is only displayed
when shading with Gouraud or Phong shading
with graphics acceleration disabled.
150
Del: Deletes a material from the materials
selection box.
Save: Saves created materials as separate files.
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Retrieve: Retrieves a specified material file and
inserts it into the selection box.
Materials Toolbox
Using the Material Toolbox allows creation of
new materials from a set of customizable textures
and properties. Any material can be applied to
any object in a drawing. For details on displaying
toolboxes, see View Options“View Options”
on page 33.
Copies a texture from an image file (bitmap, gif,
jpeg, etc.) and applies that texture to one or more
DesignCAD drawing objects. The next time the
drawing is shaded using either Gouraud (Medium
Quality) or Phong (Best Quality) method in the
Shading Command (see Shading), all items that
have been assigned a texture will be shaded
accordingly. Several jpegs are included with
DesignCAD as sample textures and are located in
the DesignCAD directory.
Using the Command
If you click on the down arrow, the Material box
shows a list of material types available for use.
The list includes any materials you have created
and added to the list.
Select the object to be assigned a texture and
choose the Texture Mapping command. The
following window appears:
NOTE: Don't confuse this list with the Material List
command in the File menu. The Material List command
provides a net listing of all the attributes you placed in
your drawing. Material, as it is referred to in the Material
Toolbox, affects the appearance of shaded drawings.
Attributes are generally used to denote physical
materials-lumber, bolts, screws, and other parts-used
to build the object depicted in your drawing.
New Material: Opens the New Material window,
described above.
Material: Opens the Material Options window.
Apply: Applies the material to selected entities.
Same As: Takes the material from the object you
select.
Texture Mapping
Load Texture: Click this button and the Select
Texture window appears. Make sure the
directory that contains the image file (bitmap,
Menu: Tools / Texture Mapping
contact us at www.designcad.com
151
DesignCAD Reference Manual
jpeg, etc.) is listed in the Look In: box. Select the
file from the area below the Look In: box or type
the name in the File Name box. Click OK.
Horizontal Times: Enter the number of copies of
the image to be displayed from left to right on the
selected item(s).
Clear Texture: Removes all texture settings from
the currently selected drawing objects.
Vertical Times: Enter the number of copies of
the image to be displayed from top to bottom on
the selected item(s).
Rotate 90º: Rotates the image file 90 degrees for
the image's use as a texture. This button can be
used two times to rotate the image 180 degrees
and three times to rotate the image 270 degrees.
Mirror Horizontally: Flips the image so that all
portions of the image that were on the left side
will now be on the right and vice versa.
Mirror Vertically: Flips the image so that all
portions of the image that were on the top of the
image will now be on the bottom and vice versa.
Rotation Angle: This value displays the current
rotation angle of the image being used as a
texture. This value can be increased or decreased
by clicking the Rotate 90 button repeatedly.
Seamlessly: Inverts one image everywhere two
images meet, so the edges of the image copies
will not be as noticeable.
Customize Stretching: Allows for the
customization of the image's scale and aspect
ratio.
Image Scale: Enter the value for the scale at
which the image is to be displayed. For example,
a value of .5 will display the image at half of its
original size and a value of 2 will display the
image at two times its original size.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of the vertical and
horizontal scale factors at which the image is to
be displayed. For example, a value of .5 will
display the image so that the vertical scale is
twice that of the horizontal scale, and a value of 2
will display the image so that the horizontal scale
is twice that of the vertical scale.
Tile: Places repeated copies (or an array) of the
image appear on a single surface. When this
option is selected:
152
Mapping Mode: The default direction for the
texture runs parallel to the Y axis; this direction
can be changed for some of the Mapping Modes.
Each Mapping Mode has a unique set of options
available in the list box directly below the
Mapping Mode list box. Each Mapping Mode and
option combination works best with a different
kind of entity. Some experimentation may be
required to determine which Mapping Mode and
option works the best for different items in a
given drawing.
• Spherical Mapping: As its name indicates,
this particular mode works best on rounded
3D surfaces. Unlike most of the other
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
Mapping Modes, Spherical Mapping mode
has a single method: Center. Spherical
Mapping mode takes the flat image and
wraps and stretches it around the selected
object. The direction for the texture
determines the "poles" of the object. If the Y
axis is said to run through the poles of the
object, the top and bottom edges of the
image are compressed to meet at these poles
and are stretched to fit around the "equator"
of the object.
• Grid Patch Mapping: Divides the image
into the number of surfaces the selected
object has. Each division of the image is then
assigned to a surface. This mode is
recommended for items that have a flat face
but have been extruded into a 3D object or
"grid." This mode has two methods: Grid
Only and Grid & Plane.
• Grid Only: Maps the selected texture to the
"depth" or "grid" portion of the object (the
portion of the object that is not the front
"face").
• Grid & Plane: Maps the selected texture to
both the "face" and "grid" of the object.
• Box Mapping: Uses a bounding box to map
the texture to the selected objects. The
bounding box is an invisible box that
completely surrounds the selected objects.
The front and back of this box run parallel to
the XY plane. The left and right sides of this
box run parallel to the YZ plane. The top and
bottom of this box run parallel to the XZ
contact us at www.designcad.com
plane.
This mode has six methods. Each of these six
methods corresponds to a different side of
the bounding box. The texture is placed
parallel to the specified side of the bounding
box and then projected onto the selected
object(s).
• Cylindrical Mapping: As its name
indicates, this particular mode works best on
cylindrically-shaped objects. Unlike most of
the other Mapping Modes, Cylindrical
Mapping mode has a single method: Center
Axis. Cylindrical Mapping mode takes the
flat image and wraps it around the selected
object. The direction for the texture
determines the "poles" of the object. If the Y
axis is said to run through the "poles" of the
object, the image is compressed to meet at
these "poles."
• Plane Warp Mapping: This Mapping
Mode should only be used on plane entities.
Plane Warp Mapping mode has two
methods. Default method maps the entity
using as much of the image as possible
without causing a substantial amount of
distortion, the Set Boundaries and Change
Boundaries options can be used so the entire
153
DesignCAD Reference Manual
image is used. The Cutoff method trims
away portions of the image so that it has the
same shape as the plane to which it is to be
applied.
• Default: When this method is chosen, two
options appear below it: Set Boundaries and
Change Boundaries. The Set Boundaries
option can be checked to make the entire
image be used when the drawing entity is
mapped. The perimeter of the plane is
calculated and the points on the plane that
make the most sense mathematically are set
as the four corners for the texture. The
Change Boundaries button can be used to
allow four points to be set in the drawing to
reset the four corners of the texture.
• Cutoff: The Cutoff method of Plane Warp
Mapping trims away portions of the image
so that it has the same shape as the plane to
which it is to be applied. The direction of the
texture may be set in the Rotate box.
Animation and Walk
Through
This command is also used to produce animated
AVI video files that can be played by Windows
Media Player and other video player applications.
Animation Command will also produce VRML
files, which can be used to animate a drawing for
display on the Internet.
DesignCAD animation works on the same
principle used by motion pictures and animated
cartoons. A series of drawing images are recorded
one frame at a time, with the position of the
animated object changed slightly from frame to
frame. When all the frames are displayed in rapid
succession, the animated drawing creates the
illusion of motion and continuity for the viewer.
DesignCAD animation is performed by
establishing keyframes of a drawing at the start,
middle and end of an animated sequence. These
keyframes serve as guide posts for the sequence.
You must select how much time (how may
frames) will pass between keyframes. You must
also manipulate and move the drawing object
between keyframes. This tells DesignCAD what
and how much "movement" to display in relation
to various times in the animation sequence.
These tools are used for displaying a moving
view of your 3D model. This is useful for
presentations.
Using the Command
Animation Mode
NOTE: Pay attention to where the selection handles on
the animated object are located. The selection handle
serves as a reference point for all the movement,
rotation, or scale changes that will occur in your
animation.
Menu: Animation / Animation Mode
Used to animate or add motion to objects in a
DesignCAD drawing.
You should have a drawing loaded when you
choose the Animation Mode Command.
NOTE: To exit Animation Mode, select it again from the
Animation menu.
154
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
With the drawing open, choose Animation
Mode. The Control Panel and Time Line
appear.
keyframe to the second keyframe. You can use
Move, Rotate, Scale or use any combination of
these commands.
Once you have moved the object in the desired
manner, verify that you have highlighted the box
above the number you want to set as the second
keyframe and click the Set Keyframe button to
lock in the keyframe.
To set the first keyframe, make sure the box in the
Time Line above the zero is highlighted in the
Time Line (there will be an arrowhead above it)
and click the Set Keyframe button.
Begin to set the next keyframe by clicking in the
box above the number for the next frame that will
be a keyframe. Notice that the arrowhead moves
above the box you clicked. The boxes that
correspond to the keyframes you set (except for
the 0 frame) are filled with red, indicating that
they are keyframes.
The number of frames left between keyframes
determines the size of the animation increments
in the final animation. In other words, if you are
rotating an object 90 degrees between two
keyframes that are ten frames apart (frames 0 and
9), there will be 9 movements. In the final
animation, the object will rotate 10 degrees per
frame (90 divided by 9 is 10).
TIP: Animation runs at about 15 frames per second, so
30 frames would equal approximately two seconds
worth of animation.
Now enter all pertinent motion information for
your animated object. This is the amount and type
of movement you want to occur from the first
contact us at www.designcad.com
Repeat this series of actions as many times as
necessary to complete your animation. If you
make a mistake and want to delete a keyframe,
highlight the box above the keyframe you want to
delete in the Time Line and click on the Delete
Keyframe button .
NOTE: Don't forget to record a keyframe any time you
change the direction of movement, the direction of a
rotation, etc. For example, if you are going to move an
object to the left and then up in your animation, make
sure you record a keyframe before you move the object
up. If you don't record a keyframe after you move the
object to the left but wait until after you have moved the
object to the left and then up, DesignCAD doesn't know
that you wanted to show movement to the left and then
upward movement. The object will move diagonally
when the animation is played.
Playing and Saving An
Animation Sequence
To show or hide the paths of animated objects,
click Show Path. Use the Rewind,
Back/Forward One Frame, Stop, Play, and
Fast Forward buttons to maneuver within the
animation.
To play the animation over and over again when
it is played, click on the Loop button.
155
DesignCAD Reference Manual
When finished, save your work as an animation
template. See Save Animation Template.
To play your animation, see Load Animation
Template.
Export
You can export an animation in two different
formats: VRML and AVI.
Menu: Animation / Export / VRML
Save Animation Template
Menu: Animation / Export / AVI
Menu: Animation / Save Animation Template
AVI files are very large, so DesignCAD gives you
the option to save the file uncompressed or with
one of six other compression ratios. Click the
menu arrow and scroll to select a compression
format. Select Full Frames (Uncompressed) for
the best results and then click OK.
Saves an animation that has been produced in
Animation Mode.
Using the Command
After producing an animation in Animation
Mode, select the Save Animation Template
command. Enter a name for the animation in the
window and then click OK.
NOTE: The animation template is saved as a part of the
Control Panel
Menu: Animation / Control Panel
drawing file it was created with and can only be opened
with the Load Animation Template command if the
drawing file is open in DesignCAD.
A toggle that hides or shows the Animation
Control Panel.
Load Animation Template
Time Line
Menu: Animation / Load Animation Template
Menu: Animation / Time Line
Opens an animation template that has been
produced in Animation Mode and then saved as
a part of the drawing file with the Save
Animation Template command. This command
is only available when DesignCAD is in
Animation Mode.
A toggle that hides or shows the Animation Time
Line.
Using the Command
After producing and saving an animation in
Animation Mode, open the drawing file in which
it was created. Choose the Animation Mode
command and choose the Load Animation
Template command. Select the Template Name
and click OK.
156
Walk Through
Menu: Animation / Walk Through Mode
Toggles Walk Through Mode on and off. Walk
Through Mode can be used to step a viewer
around a DesignCAD drawing.
For updates and additional information,
3D Objects
NOTE: To exit Walk Through Mode, select it again from
the Animation menu.
Like Animation Mode, Walk Through Mode can
be used to produce AVI video files that can be
played by Windows Media Player and other video
player applications. Walk Through Mode will
also produce VRML files, which can be used to
walk viewers through a drawing on the Internet.
The main difference between Walk Through
Mode and Animation Mode is that Walk Through
Mode is only used to change the view of a
drawing; items in the drawing cannot be moved
or rotated independent of one another. A series of
view angles are changed slightly from one frame
to another. When all the frames are displayed in
rapid succession, the view angle of the viewer
moves smoothly around the drawing.
Using the Command
With a drawing open, choose Walk Through
Mode. The Control Panel and Walk window
appear.
contact us at www.designcad.com
To set the first keyframe, click on the Frames
button and select Add Frame from the menu that
appears. Set the amount of time (in seconds) to
pass between this first frame and the next one in
the Times box. Set the amount of time to pass (in
seconds) before movement toward the next
keyframe begins in the Delay box. You may also
want to change the apparent size of the drawing
by entering a new value in the Zoom box. Then
use the Target and Camera areas of the window.
The Target Area is used to specify what area of
the drawing is being focused on (displayed in the
center of the view window). The Camera area is
used to specify the viewing location and thus
controls the view angle and distance. Finally set
the number of frames per second to be inserted
between this frame and the next one in the
Frames per Second box.
157
DesignCAD Reference Manual
To add the next keyframe, click on the Frames
button and select Add Frame from the menu that
appears. Change the amount of time to pass
between this frame and the next one or leave it
alone so it will be the same as the amount of time
between the first frame and this one. Change any
or all of the other options. When the view is the
way you want it for the second keyframe, add
another one.
AVI files are very large, so DesignCAD gives you
the option to save the file uncompressed or with
one of six other compression ratios. Click the
menu arrow and scroll to select a compression
format. Select Full Frames (Uncompressed) for
the best results and then click OK.
Run Walk
Repeat this series of actions as many times as
necessary to complete your walk through. If you
make a mistake select the keyframe you want to
change in the Frames list box and change the
values.
Menu: Walk / Run Walk
Playing and Saving A Walk
Through Sequence
Control Panel
Use the Rewind, Back/Forward One Frame,
Stop, Play, and Fast Forward buttons to
maneuver within the walk through.
A toggle that hides or shows the Control Panel.
Begins the playback of a walk template created
with Walk Through Mode.
Menu: Walk / Control Panel
To play the walk through over and over again
when it is played, click on the Loop button.
When finished, save your work as an walk
through template. See Save Walk Template. The
walk through template will be saved as a part of
the drawing file.
To play your animation, see Load Walk
Template.
Export
You can export a walk through in two different
formats: VRML and AVI.
Menu: Walk / Export / VRML
Menu: Walk / Export / AVI
158
For updates and additional information,
5
Annotation
Dimensions
Dimensions are used to
dimensions of your entities.
indicate
actual
Open the Dimension tab and click in the
Dimension Type box and select the type of
dimension command for which you want to set
the options.
NOTE: If you want to measure entities without including
the dimension in the drawing, see Measuring,
Dimension Options
Menu: Options / Options
Controls the many options in the dimension
commands, plus the Pullout and Balloon
commands, all from one menu.
These settings become global - they are the
defaults for each dimension type. You can change
settings within the dimension command itself.
Using Current Color: Dimension text and
extension lines are drawn with the current
drawing color. If you are drawing with several
different colors and want all dimension text to be
drawn with the same color, uncheck this option
and click the Color box to invoke the Color
Palette.
Using Current Layer: Sets the layer in which the
dimension text and extension lines are drawn.
When checked, all dimension text is drawn in the
active layer. To draw all of the dimension text in
contact us at www.designcad.com
159
DesignCAD Reference Manual
the same layer of a multi-layer drawing, uncheck
this option and click the Layer box to select the
layer for dimension text.
Paste: After setting the options for a particular
dimension command, click this button to apply
the same options to similar dimensioning
commands. If you have set the options for a
dimensioning command that measures an angular
dimension, the same options will be used for all
dimensioning commands that make angular
measurements. Likewise, if you have set the
options for a dimensioning command that
measures a linear dimension, the same options
will be used for all dimensioning commands that
make linear measurements.
Point 3: Dimension text location
Places dimensions in your drawing.
Using the Command
Choose the Dimension command. To add a
dimension to your drawing, set two points for the
distance to be measured. Then set a third point for
the dimension text location.
Several options are available in the Dimension
window:
Save: If you want to save the changes to the next
drawing session, click Save before you click OK.
Reset: Restores all of the options to their default
values.
NOTE: For more details on dimension settings, see the
command description for each dimension command.
Most are listed for the Dimension command.
Automatic:
DesignCAD
determines
automatically which axis you wish to measure,
based on where you place the dimension text.
Dimension
Free Form: Enables you to measure along any
arbitrary direction. The dimension text will
always be placed parallel to the distance
measured.
Menu: Dimension / Dimension
Shortcut Key: @
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Start of distance to be measured
Point 2: End of distance to be measured
160
X-Axis, Y-Axis, Z-Axis: Selecting any of these
causes DesignCAD to measure only the distance
parallel to that axis along the measured path.
Draw as Text: The default setting (Draw as
Dimension) causes DesignCAD to update the
dimension text anytime the dimension changes
size (e.g., when resetting units, or stretching an
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
object and its associated dimension). Checking
Draw as Text forces the program to keep the
same dimension, regardless of changes.
Same As: Uses properties from another
dimension in the drawing.. Click Save As, then
select the dimension.
Text
Click the Text button on the Dimension window
for these options:
Location: The dimension text can be placed
inside or outside the extension line, to the right or
left of the dimension arrows, or between the
terminators. The F12 key may be used to toggle
through the text locations without opening the
Dimension Text window.
Orientation: Choose how to orient the
dimension text. The Ctrl+F12 keys may be used
to toggle through the text orientations without
opening the Dimension Text window. The
Shift+Spacebar keys may be used to "flip" the
text.
Truncate End Zeros: Zeros at the end of a
decimal will be removed. For example, 2.50
inches becomes 2.5 inches.
Fixed Text: Fixed text will not change even if
you re-scale the object or resize the drawing.
Fixed text is useful when you want the
dimension's text to always read the same value
whether you rescale it or not. It can also be useful
if you have a drawing that is not to scale, but you
want the dimension to show what the actual
measurement should be.
Any Windows font can be used for dimensions.
The dimension text size can be specified in
Drawing Units.
Format: Offers several different numeric formats
for the dimensions. The Shift+F12 keys may be
used to toggle through the dimension formats
without opening the Dimension Text window.
Precision: The number of digits to the right of the
decimal point.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Enable Units Multiplier: Allows you to
dimension in multiple base units. For example, if
your current drawing is based on inches, and you
want to dimension in centimeters, check the
"Enable Units Multiplier" box and set the Units
Multiplier value to 2.54 (because there are 2.54
centimeters per inch). Optionally you might wish
to open the Prefix/Suffix options and specify a
suffix of "cm". Now if you dimension a 10-inch
line, the dimension text will report 25.4 cm.
161
DesignCAD Reference Manual
NOTE: This works best if you choose the simple
decimal or fractional text format. If you choose a
feet-and-inches format in combination with the Units
multiplier, you may get unexpected values.
Arrowhead
Click the Arrowhead button on the Dimension
window for these options:
Same As (hand icon): Click to copy the
properties of an existing dimension.
Prefix/Suffix
Click the Prefix/Suffix button on the Dimension
window for these options:
Position: The dimension line can be positioned
inside or outside the extension line.
Offset: Enter the amount of offset.
Prefix: Adds a notation before the dimension
measurement. You can keep a list of up to five
custom notations that are available for
dimensioning.
Arrowhead: Use the Type and Size boxes to
specify the arrowhead options you want to use.
Suffix: Adds a notation after the dimension
measurement. You can keep a list of up to five
custom notations that are available for
dimensioning.
Extension
Same As (hand icon): Click to copy the
properties of an existing dimension.
Click the Extension button on the Dimension
window for these options:
Same As (hand icon): Click to copy the
properties of an existing dimension.
162
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
The extension line is perpendicular to the
dimension line and is drawn at the end of the
dimension line.
Same As (hand icon): Click to copy the
properties of an existing dimension.
Overshoot: The distance the extension line
extends past the dimension line.
NOTE: You can set dimension parameters globally in
the program Options. See Dimension Options.
Gap: The distance between the points set for
dimensioning and the beginning of the extension
line.
Dimension Angle
Same As (hand icon): Click to copy the
properties of an existing dimension.
Toolbox Icon:
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Angle
Tolerancing
Click the Tolerancing button on the Dimensions
window for these options:
Point 1: Center of the angle to be measured
Point 2: Beginning of the angle
Point 3: Endpoint of the angle
Point 4: Distance at which the dimension text is to
be inserted
Adds the dimensions of angles to your drawing.
Using the Command
The dimension tolerance is the positive and
negative values showing the amount of variation
allowed from the standard measurement.
None: Allows no tolerance for the dimension,
meaning that it must be exact.
Choose the Dimension Angle command. Set a
point for the center of the angle to be measured.
Then set points for the beginning and end of the
angle. Selection order is important, because
angles are measured counter-clockwise.
The second option allows you to set one value
that will be used as the positive and negative
dimension tolerance.
The third option allows you to set separate values
for the positive dimension tolerance and the
negative dimension tolerance.
contact us at www.designcad.com
163
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Finally, set a point to fix how far away the
dimension is to be from the angle. The angle is
measured and the dimension is added to your
drawing.
NOTE: The options available in this command are the
same ones available in the Dimension command. See
Dimension. You can also set dimension parameters
globally in the program Options. See Dimension
Options.
Dimension Arc
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Arc
dimension text. The length of the arc will be
calculated and inserted into the drawing at the last
point.
NOTE: The options available in this command are the
same ones available in the Dimension command. See
Dimension. You can also set dimension parameters
globally in the program Options. See Dimension
Options.
Dimension Chamfer
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Chamfer
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Arc to be dimensioned
Point 2: Text location
Dimensions the arc length of an arc from
endpoint to endpoint.
Using the Command
Choose the Dimension Arc command. Set a point
on the arc to be measured. After the point is set, a
rubber-band line shows how the dimension will
be drawn. Set a point for the location of the
Point 1: Line to be dimensioned
Point 2-n: Extension line
Point n+1: Text location
Draws the dimension for a chamfered line. This
calculated distance is the vertical or horizontal
distance between the two corners of the chamfer.
Using the Command
164
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
Choose the Dimension Chamfer command and
set a point on the chamfer line. A rubber-band line
shows how the dimension will be drawn. Set one
or more points for the extension line. Set a point
for the text location. Click the middle mouse
button or press Enter to end the command. The
dimension information for the chamfer is drawn
at the last point.
NOTE: The options available in this command are the
same ones available in the Dimension command. See
Dimension. You can also set dimension parameters
globally in the program Options. See Dimension
Options.
Draws a diameter dimension for a circle or arc.
The text and arrowhead can be drawn outside the
circle, inside the circle, or with an extension line.
Using the Command
Choose the Dimension Diameter command and
set a point on the circle or arc to be dimensioned.
After the first point is set, a rubber-band line
shows how the dimension will be drawn. Set a
point for the location of the text information. The
diameter of the circle is displayed at the last point.
The Dimension Diameter window has four
options for the extension lines and arrowheads.
Dimension Diameter
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Diameter
Toolbox Icon:
Text Inside Circle: Draws the dimension text and
arrowheads inside the circle or arc.
Point 1: Circle or arc to be dimensioned
Point 2: Location for dimension text
Pre-Defined Extension Line: Draws the
dimension text and arrowheads outside the arc or
circle.
contact us at www.designcad.com
165
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Custom Extension Line: Draws the dimension
text and arrowheads outside the arc or circle with
a custom extension line.
shows how the dimension will be drawn. Set a
point for the location of the text information. The
radius of the circle is displayed at the last point.
Text Inside Circle: Draws the arrowheads inside
the arc or circle.
NOTE: The other options available in this command
are the same ones available in the Dimension
command. See Dimension. You can also set dimension
parameters globally in the program Options. See
Dimension Options.
The Dimension Radius window has four options
for the extension lines and arrowheads.
Dimension Radius
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Radius
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Circle or arc to be dimensioned
Point 2: Location for dimension text
Dimensions the radius of a circle or arc.
Using the Command
Choose the Dimension Radius command and set
a point on the circle or arc to be dimensioned.
After the first point is set, a rubber-band line
Text Inside Circle: Draws the dimension text and
arrowheads inside the circle or arc.
Pre-Defined Extension Line: Draws the
dimension text and arrowheads outside the arc or
circle.
Custom Extension Line: Draws the dimension
text and arrowheads outside the arc or circle with
a custom extension line.
Text Inside Circle: Draws the arrowheads inside
the arc or circle.
166
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
NOTE: The other options available in this command
Using the Command
are the same ones available in the Dimension
command. See Dimension. You can also set dimension
parameters globally in the program Options. See
Dimension Options.
Choose the Dimension Coordinate and set a
point for the origin, or reference point. Set a point
at the coordinate to be measured. Set a point for
the text location. Press Enter to end the command.
Dimension Coordinate
The dimension is measured horizontally,
vertically, or along the Z axis from the first point
to the second point depending on the relative
location of the third point to the second. The
dimension text is drawn at the last point.
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Coordinate
Shortcut Key: F11
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Reference point
NOTE: The options available in this command are the
same ones available in the Dimension command. See
“Dimension” on page 160. You can also set dimension
parameters globally in the program Options. See
“Dimension Options” on page 159.
Point 2: Point to be dimensioned
Dimension Baseline
Point 3: Location for dimension text
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Baseline
Draws coordinate dimensions relative to a base
point. The first point is the origin, or reference
point, from which subsequent points are
dimensioned. After the base point is set, pairs of
points are set. The first point of each pair is the
measurement point; the second is the text
location.
Toolbox Icon:
If the second point in the pair of points is set
above or below the first point, the X-value, or
horizontal distance, from the reference point will
be placed in the drawing. If the second point is set
to the right or left of the first point, the Y-value, or
vertical distance, from the reference point will be
placed into the drawing. Finally, if the second
point in a pair of points is set closer or further
away along the Z-axis, the relative Z coordinate is
placed into the drawing.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Point 1-n: Points to be measured
Point n+1: Location for dimension information
Draws dimensions using several points along a
baseline. Points are set for each measurement
position. The distance measured is the vertical or
horizontal distance to the measurement points.
Each distance is measured from the first point.
167
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Dimension Extended
Choose the Dimension Baseline command and
select HOR or VER to determine whether the
horizontal or vertical distance will be measured.
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Extended
Point 1-n: Points to be measured
Point n+1: Location for dimension information
Draws successive dimensions extended along
several points. Points are set for each
measurement position. The distance measured is
the vertical or horizontal distance between the
measurement points. Each distance is measured
separately between each successive pair of points.
Using the Command
Next set a point for the base measurement point.
Set points for the other measurement points. A
rubber-band line shows how the dimension will
be drawn. Set a point for the location of the
dimension text. Click the middle mouse button or
press Enter. The dimension is drawn using the
points.
NOTE: The other options available in this command
are the same ones available in the Dimension
command. See Dimension. You can also set dimension
parameters globally in the program Options. See
Dimension Options.
Choose the Dimension Extended command and
select HOR or VER to determine whether the
horizontal or vertical distance will be measured.
Next, set a point for each measurement position.
Then set a point for the location of the dimension
text. Press Enter to end the command.
Dimensions will be drawn for the measurement
points.
Example: Dimension a wall.
Select the Dimension Extended command and
choose the HOR option. Set a point on the
bottom-left corner of the wall. Set a second point
near the middle of the wall, along the bottom. Set
a third point on the bottom-right corner of the
168
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
wall. Set a fourth point for the text below the wall.
Press Enter. The dimension is added to the
drawing in two sections.
NOTE: The other options available in this command
are the same ones available in the Dimension
command. See Dimension. You can also set dimension
parameters globally in the program Options. See
Dimension Options.
Dimension Progressive
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Progressive
Using the Command
Choose the Dimension Progressive command.
Select HOR or VER to determine whether the
horizontal or vertical distance will be
dimensioned.
Set a point for the base measurement point. Set
points for the other measurement points. A
rubber-band line shows how the dimension will
be drawn. Finally, set a point for the location of
the dimension text. Then press Enter to end the
command. The dimension is drawn from the base
point to each measurement point.
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Base point
Points 2-n: Points to be measured
Point n+1: Location for text
NOTE: The other options available in this command
are the same ones available in the Dimension
command. See Dimension. You can also set dimension
parameters globally in the program Options. See
Dimension Options.
Draws the dimensions of a line progressively
from a base point. The distance measured is the
vertical or horizontal distance between each
measurement point and the base point.
contact us at www.designcad.com
169
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Dimension Radius
Progressive
Menu: Dimension
Progressive
/
Dimension
Radius
NOTE: The options available in this command are the
same ones available in the Dimension command. See
Dimension. You can also set dimension parameters
globally in the program Options. See Dimension
Options.
Toolbox Icon:
Dimension Distance Only
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Distance Only
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Base point
Points 2-n: Points to be measured
Point n+1: Location for text
Draws radius dimensions progressively. Points
are set for each measurement position. The
dimension of the radius is calculated and inserted
into
the
drawing
using
progressive
measurements. Each distance is measured from
the base point.
Using the Command
Choose the Dimension Radius Progressive
command and set a point for the base point. Set
points for the other measurement points. Set a
point for the text location. Click the middle
mouse button or press Enter.
170
Point 1: Beginning of distance to be measured
Point 2: End of distance to be measured
Point 3: Location of dimension text
Measures a distance horizontally, vertically, or at
any angle, but does not add extension lines or
arrowheads.
Using the Command
Choose the Dimension Distance Only command
and choose which direction you wish to measure.
Set a point for the beginning of the dimension.
After the first point is set, a rubber-band box
shows where the dimension text will be drawn.
Set a point for the end of the dimension. Set a
point for the location of the dimension text. The
dimension is drawn without arrows or extension
lines.
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
NOTE: The options available in this command are the
same ones available in the Dimension command. See
Dimension. You can also set dimension parameters
globally in the program Options. See Dimension
Options.
Dimension Center Mark
Menu: Dimension / Dimension Center Mark
Point 1: Point on circle or arc to be marked
Auto Dimensions
Menu: Dimension / Auto Dimension
Automatically dimensions lines, circles, arcs,
ellipses, and elliptical arcs.
Using the Command
Choose the Auto Dimension command. In the
window, select the entity types you want
dimensioned.
Draws a center mark for a circle or arc.
Using the Command
Choose the Dimension Center Mark command.
To dimension only selected entities, check Apply
to Selection Only.
Enter the size for the center mark in the Cross
box. If the By Percentage option is enabled, the
size of the center mark will be a percent value of
the size of the circle/arc. If By Percentage is
disabled, the size of the center mark will be in
Drawing Units.
Dimension Settings: To view or change
dimension settings, click this button to open the
Dimension Options (see Dimension Options).
Click OK to return to the drawing, and the
selected entity types will be dimensioned.
Units
The Overshoot and Gap options are only
available if By Percentage is disabled.
Menu: Dimensions / Units
To draw only the center mark (no extension
lines), enable the Draw Cross Only option.
Point 1: First point on distance to measure.
Shortcut Key: U
Point 2: Second point on distance to measure.
NOTE: You can set dimension parameters globally in
the program Options. See Dimension Options.
contact us at www.designcad.com
171
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Measures the distance between two points and, if
you choose, can change the distance. This
command can also be used to change the units of
measurement in the drawing or to set up the initial
drawing space.
Using the Command
Choose the Units command. Set two points on the
screen for a known distance. In the Units box,
you can accept the measured distance or change
it.
When you change the value, it changes the entire
coordinate system of the drawing, including any
dynamic dimensions in the drawing.
Text and Attributes
Text commands are used to place text strings in
the drawing. Attributes are used to assign
properties (material, cost, etc.) to objects.
Text (and Attribute) Options
Menu: Options / Options
Shortcut Key: Q
In the Text tab of the Options, you can change the
color and style of regular text and Attribute text
for the different layers in your drawing.
172
Text Options:
• Using Current Color: Text is drawn with
the current drawing color. If you are drawing
with several different colors and want all text
to be drawn with the same color, uncheck
this option and click the Color box to select
the color you want to use for text.
• Using Current Layer: All text (excluding
Dimension and Attribute) is drawn in the
active layer. To draw all of the text in the
same layer of a multi-layer drawing,
uncheck this option and click the Layer box
to select the layer you want for text.
• Font: Select the font you want to use for
text. The available fonts depend on whether
True Type Font or Vector Font is selected.
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
• Align: Placed text to by the left edge, right
edge, or center.
• Style: Choose Regular, Bold, Italic or Bold
Italic.
• Size: The size of the text.
• Vertical Scale: The height of the letters
relative to their width. Enter a large value for
tall, thin letters or a small value for short,
wide letters.
• Angle: The angle at which the text will be
placed if only one point is set.
Attribute Options
• Visible: Visibility of attributes definitions
will be determined by the status of their
respective Invisible options.
• All: All attributes definitions will be
displayed, regardless of the status of their
respective Invisible options.
Save as Default: Saves the changes to the next
session
Text
Menu: Draw / Text
Shortcut Key: T
Toolbox Icon:
• Using Current Color, Using Current
Layer: Same as for Text Options described
above.
Attribute Display Settings:
• None: No attributes will be displayed,
regardless of the status of their respective
Invisible options.
Point 1: Lower-left corner
• Visible: Visibility of attributes will be
determined by the status of their respective
Invisible options.
Point 3: Plane on which the text lies (optional)
• All: All attributes will be displayed,
regardless of the status of their respective
Invisible options.
NOTE: For details on the Invisible option, see
Attribute.
Point 2: Lower-right corner (optional)
Point 4: Slant and/or twisting of text (optional)
Inserts a string of text into the drawing. This text
can be set to appear flat regardless of the viewing
angle, or it can be placed at any 3D orientation so
that its appearance varies depending on the
current viewing parameters.
Attribute Definition Display Settings
• None: No attributes definitions will be
displayed, regardless of the status of their
respective Invisible options.
contact us at www.designcad.com
173
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Choose the Text command and enter the text
string in the window. DesignCAD stores a history
of the last 20 entries.
drawn according to the points and the options
selected. The text will appear flat regardless of
the viewing angle being used.
If Draw as 2D Text is not enabled, you can set
one to four points. If only one point is used, the
size and angle of the text is determined by the text
size and angle in the window.
NOTE: To convert 2D to 3D text and vice-versa, see
Text Convert.
Set the Font and Character Set. Available fonts
depend on whether True Type Font or Vector
Font is selected.
These icons provide additional options on the
Text window:
Size: Enter the font size here.
Increases or decreases the text size.
Angle: The angle of text, measured from
horizontal.
Make the text bold and/or italicized.
Save in Vector Form: The text will be drawn as
separate vector entities in the shape of each letter.
Text drawn in this manner cannot be edited as
normal text.
Draw as 2D Text: If used, set a point for the
bottom of the text. Next, set a point to determine
the angle of the text, or click the middle mouse
button or press Enter to have the text drawn using
the angle set in the window. The text will be
174
Placed the text by its left edge, center,
or right edge.
Inserts standard text:
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
Text Block
Menu: Draw / Text Block
Toolbox Icon:
If you want to insert standard text other than date,
time, or drawing name, click Others, then click
Add.
Point 1: Top of the Text Block
Point 2: Point determining angle of the Text
Block (optional)
Point 3: Plane on which the text lies (optional)
Uses properties from another selected text
string.
Draws multi-line text. Points determine the
position and angle of the text in the drawing.
Using the Command
Point Selection:
The second point is used to specify the length and
angle of the text. The lower-right corner of the
text will be positioned at the second point.
Choose the Text Block command and enter the
text block in the window. Press Enter to add a new
line.
The third point, if used, defines the plane on
which the text is to be drawn and partially
determines the slant for the text. For example, if
the third point is above the first, the text will be
upright. If the third point is "behind" the first,
then the text will be positioned to be read from
above. It will be "flat" on the X-Z plane. If the
third point is above and to the left of the first
point, the top of the text will slant to the left.
The fourth point, if used, further defines the plane
on which the text is to be drawn and partially
determines the slant for the text. If four points are
used, they essentially specify the positions of the
corners of the text.
contact us at www.designcad.com
175
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Set the Font and Character Set. Available fonts
depend on whether True Type Font or Vector
Font is selected.
upright. If the third point is in front of the first,
then the text will be positioned to be read from
above. It will be "flat" on the X-Z plane.
Line Spacing: Vertical spacing between text
lines.
Size: Enter the font size here.
Angle: The angle of text, measured from
horizontal.
Save in Vector Form: The text will be drawn as
separate vector entities in the shape of each letter.
Text drawn in this manner cannot be edited as
normal text.
Draw as 2D Text: If checked, set a point for the
top of the text. Next, Set a point to determine the
angle of the text, or click the middle mouse button
or press Enter to have the text drawn using the
angle set in the Angle field. The text will be
drawn according to the points and the options
selected. The text will appear flat regardless of
the viewing angle being used.
If Draw as 2D Text is not enabled, you can set
one to three points. If only one point is used, the
angle of the text is determined by the Angle field.
NOTE: For other options on this window, see Text.
The first point is used to place the location of the
text.
The second point is used to specify the angle of
the text.
Text Arc
Menu: Draw / Text Arc
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Start of the text arc
Point 2: Center of the text arc
Point 3: End of the text arc
Draws text along an arc. The arc is defined by a
beginning point, a center point, and an endpoint.
Using the Command
Choose the Text Arc command and enter the text
in the window.
The third point, if used, defines the plane on
which the text is to be drawn. For example, if the
third point is below the first, the text will be
176
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Location of the attribute
Set the Font and Character Set. Available fonts
depend on whether True Type Font or Vector
Font is selected.
Vertical Scale: The vertical scale factor of the
text. A large value will make tall, thin letters. A
small value will make short, wide letters.
Assigns information to objects in the drawing.
Later you can use the Material List command to
list the types and numbers of attributes you have
placed in your drawing.
Using the Command
Select the Attribute command and enter the text
string in the window. DesignCAD stores a history
of the last 20 entries.
NOTE: For other options on this window, see Text.
Set a point for the beginning of the text arc. Set a
point for the center of the text arc. Set a point for
the end of the text arc. The text will be drawn in
an arc, beginning with the first point and ending
with the last point.
Attribute
Menu: Draw / Attribute
Shortcut Key: $
contact us at www.designcad.com
Invisible: Controls whether attributes are
displayed. Visibility will be as indicated here, if
the Attribute Display Setting in the Text
Options (see Text (and Attribute) Options) is set
to Visible. If disabled, the attribute can only be
hidden if the Attribute Display Setting is set to
None. If checked, the attribute can only be made
visible if the Attribute Display Setting is set to
All.
177
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Size and Angle: Font size and angle of text.
For details on the other options on this window,
see Text.
Set a point for the text. The Attribute is inserted
in the drawing.
Attribute Definition
Menu: Draw / Attribute Definition
Point 1: Location of the attribute definition
Assigns constant or variable information to a
block. Later you can use the Material List
command to list the types and numbers of
attributes you have placed in your drawing.
Using the Command
Select the Attribute Definition command. In the
Tag field, enter an identifier for the block with
which the attribute will be associated.
In the Prompt field, enter a question to be asked
when the block is inserted in the future. In the
Value field, enter a default value or answer to the
prompt.
Constant Value: If checked, you will not be
prompted and the default value will be used.
Invisible: Controls whether attribute definitions
are displayed. Visibility will be as indicated here,
if the Attribute Definition Display Setting in the
Text Options (see Text (and Attribute) Options)
is set to Visible. If disabled, the attribute can only
be hidden if the Attribute Definition Display
Setting is set to None. If checked, the attribute
can only be made visible if the Attribute
Definition Display Setting is set to All.
NOTE: The Invisible option has no effect on
stand-alone attribute definitions. Attribute definitions
that have not been defined as part of a block using the
Block Define command will be visible at all times
unless they are on a hidden layer. See Block Define.
For details on the other options on this window,
see Text.
Set a point to place the attribute definition. The
attribute definition is inserted in the drawing.
To automatically assign an attribute definition to
a block when it is inserted in the drawing, the
Block Define command must be used to define
the attribute definition as part of the block. This is
easier than it sounds. Just select the drawing
entities to be defined as a block and the attribute
definition to be associated with it. Select the
Block Define command, name the block and
click OK. Now when the block is inserted into the
178
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
drawing using Block Insert, the attribute
definition will automatically be associated with it
and you will be prompted for a value.
Material List
Menu: File / Material List
Displays a list of all the attributes and their
quantities in the current drawing. This list can be
printed or saved to a file.
Attributes generally refer to physical
materials-lumber, bolts, screws, and other
parts-used to build the object depicted in a
drawing. The Material List can be used for cost
estimating, parts lists, and other functions that
require a list of items used in a drawing.
Draws a text balloon pointing to a specific object.
It is useful for identifying part numbers or item
numbers in diagrams. You may specify the size of
the balloon and the text to include; the text is
sized to fit inside the balloon.
Using the Command
Choose the Balloon command and enter the
desired text and balloon size in the window.
Click the Arrowhead button for further options.
NOTE: This command (in the File menu) should not be
confused with the Material List in the Material Toolbox.
"Material," as it is referred to in the Material Toolbox,
affects the appearance of a shaded drawing.
Labels
Label commands are used to assign text to
specific objects.
Balloon
Menu: Dimension / Info / Balloon
Toolbox Icon:
Type and Size affect the arrowhead. Width
affects the balloon pull-out line. Click Same As
(hand icon) to copy properties from an existing
balloon.
Point 1: Point of arrowhead
Points 2-n: Points along arrow. Last point is
center of balloon.
contact us at www.designcad.com
179
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Set a point for the tip of the arrowhead and one or
more points for the body of the arrow. The last
point set is used as the center of the balloon.
Set a point for the point of the arrow, and one or
more other points for the body of the arrow. Set
the last point for the location of the text. Press
Enter to end the command and draw the pullout.
Pullout
Menu: Dimension / Info / Pullout
Toolbox Icon:
Hatching
Hatching command are used to fill a closed area
with a pattern of lines or curves. DesignCAD
provides you with a library of hatch patterns, and
you can define your own.
Hatch
Point 1: Arrowhead
Point 2-n: Path of arrow. The last point marks the
text location.
Inserts arrows and descriptive text into a drawing.
Using the Command
Choose the Pullout command and enter the text
in the window.
Menu: Draw / Hatch / Hatch
Shortcut Key: #
Points 1-n: Outline of area to be hatched
Fills an area with a hatch pattern. Points are set
around the outside of the area to be hatched.
Using the Command
Choose the Hatch command and the following
window appears:
Click the Arrowhead button for further options.
These options are the same for the Balloon
command.
180
For updates and additional information,
Annotation
To change the scale of the preview on the Hatch
Pattern button, press and hold either the Shift or
Ctrl key while you click on the thumbnail. The
Shift key increases the scale of the preview. The
Ctrl key decreases the scale of the preview.
Enter the desired scale and angle, and click the
pattern thumbnail to choose a hatch pattern.
Next, set a point each curve or line of the hatching
boundary and press Enter. The area is filled
automatically with the hatch pattern.
Hatch Fill
Menu: Draw / Hatch / Hatch Fill
Point 1: In the area to be hatched
Fills a closed area with the specified hatch
pattern.
Using the Command
Choose the Hatch Fill command and enter the
size of the hatch pattern.
Next, set a point inside the area to be hatched. The
area is filled automatically with the hatch pattern.
Hatch Pattern Position
Menu: Edit / Hatch Pattern Position
Set points around the area to be hatched. Click the
mouse or press Enter. The area is filled with the
hatch pattern. The lines making up hatch patterns
are defined as a single entity. These lines can be
edited or erased only as an entity.
Hatch Line
Menu: Draw / Hatch / Hatch Line
Point 1-n: On the enclosed line(s) to be hatched
Fills an enclosed area with a hatch pattern. First,
the hatch pattern is selected, and then points are
set on the lines or curves to be hatched.
Using the Command
Lets you shift the position of a hatch pattern
within its boundary. If Selected Entities Only is
checked, the hatch pattern is shifted identically
for all selected hatch entities. Otherwise, only the
hatch pattern selected by the first point is shifted.
Using the Command
First set a point on a location inside a hatch
pattern, then a second point indicating where that
point should be shifted to. For example, you
might set the first point on the lower left corner of
a brick, and the second point at the lower left
corner of the hatch boundary, to ensure that a
brick always begins in the lower left corner of the
hatched area.
Choose the Hatch Fill command and enter the
size of the hatch pattern.
contact us at www.designcad.com
181
DesignCAD Reference Manual
NOTE: The ability to snap to a point inside a hatch
pattern is enabled or disabled in the Preferences
command, under Snap Settings: Enable snap
commands to snap to the lines in a hatch pattern. See
Preferences.
Once a hatch pattern position has been shifted
with this command, the Info Box for that hatch
pattern will have a check beside the Enable Seed
Point setting. Remove the checkmark beside this
option to restore the original unshifted hatch
pattern position.
Custom Hatch Pattern
If you need to use a hatch pattern different from
the ones provided by DesignCAD, you can create
your own patterns. See Custom Hatch Patterns.
Loads previously saved custom hatch patterns
and makes them available for use in DesignCAD.
Using the Command
Choose the Load command. The Load Hatch
Pattern box appears. Browse to the pattern file
(*.dch) to load, and click Open.
Any custom hatch patterns contained in the
pattern file are loaded and become available in
DesignCAD's hatch commands. The custom
hatch patterns appear in the hatch commands with
"AD_" appended to the beginning of the original
hatch pattern name.
VRML WWW Anchor
Menu: Tools / VRML WWW Anchor
Save
Lets you add a link for the World Wide Web to
any non-animated VRML file.
Menu: File / Custom Hatch Pattern / Save
Using the Command
Saves hatch patterns contained in imported
drawings.
Open a file that you are going to export as a
non-animated VRML file. Select the portion you
want to use as a link. Select the VRML WWW
Anchor command.
Using the Command
Import the drawing that contains the hatch
pattern(s) you want to save. Choose the Save
command. The Save Hatch Pattern box appears.
In the File Name box enter the name for the new
file that will contain the custom hatch pattern(s).
In the Store In box select the location where you
want to store the file. Then click Save. The file is
saved. The custom hatch patterns contained in the
new file are saved with "AD_" appended to the
beginning of the original hatch pattern name.
Load
Enter the destination URL in the URL box. In the
Description box, enter the description you want
displayed when the user places the cursor over the
graphic. Export the VRML with the Export
command (see Export.)
Menu: File / Custom Hatch Pattern / Load
182
For updates and additional information,
6
Editing and Measuring
Selecting Entities
Many of DesignCAD's commands work only on
selected objects. Other commands work on the
entire drawing or selected items only, depending
on the options you choose. Below are instructions
for selection tasks you'll often use in your
drawings.
Once entities are selected, you can use any of the
Selection Edit commands on them. See Selection
Edit.
2D Selection Mode: In 2D Selection Mode the
cursor assumes an arrow shape. To change to this
mode, press Ctrl+2 or select Options / 2-D
Selection Mode When you are in 2D Selection
Mode, you can always select an object, either by
clicking it or snapping to it with point commands.
In 3D Selection Mode that is not always the case.
3D Selection Mode: The 3D cursor is formed by
three intersecting lines-a black one along the
X-axis, a red one on the Y-axis, and a green one
on the Z-axis. Press Ctrl+3 to switch to 3D
Selection Mode, or select Options / 2-D Selection
Mode (toggle off). 3D Selection Mode only
works in 3D Mode.
One point to remember about 3D Selection Mode
is that the cursor moves in 3D space. Sometimes,
therefore, the cursor looks as if it is on or near an
object you're trying to select, but it is actually far
from the object. For this reason, point snap
commands and visual point placement may
appear not to work very well in 3D Selection
Mode. However, if you check the other views,
you'll see why you missed your intended
target-you just thought you were close enough!
contact us at www.designcad.com
For most cases, you'll want to use 2D Selection
Mode. After you start a new drawing or open an
existing one, press Ctrl+2 or use the Command
Menu to change to 2D Selection Mode. In 2D
Selection Mode, the cursor is a wide arrow when
there is not a drawing or editing command active.
3D Selection Mode should be reserved for
complex drawings that have drawing entities in
close proximity.
Selecting a single object: Move the
arrow-shaped cursor near the object and click. If
you are close enough, the object is selected,
turning magenta and showing a blue bull's-eye
where you clicked. The bull's-eye is a selection
handle. If you click too far away, either nothing
gets selected or something closer to the cursor
than the object you want gets selected. Pressing
Esc will clear the current selection, as will
clicking in a blank region of the screen.
NOTE: Pressing Delete erases the current selection.
With the Gravity command, it's easy to select an
object and simultaneously set the handle at an
exact location in the object. To set a Gravity
point, right-click the mouse (if the Enable Right
Click Popup Menu option in the General
Options folder is disabled - see General Options)
or press the . (period) key with the cursor near the
desired point in the object you want to select. The
cursor snaps to the point placing the selection
handle there and selecting the composite object
that contains that point.
183
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Selecting a group of objects in a region: Move
the mouse to one corner of the region. Hold down
the left button and drag a selection rectangle
around the region. Release the mouse button at
the opposite corner. Every item that was
completely enclosed in the region is now
selected. The handle is placed at the center of the
area that the selection rectangle encompassed.
Selecting objects enclosed in or touching a
selection rectangle: Click and drag the selection
rectangle, but press Ctrl before releasing the
mouse button. All objects that were enclosed by
or touching the selection rectangle when you
released the mouse button are selected.
Adding or deselecting a single item: To add a
single item to the selection set, or to deselect a
single item in a selection set, move the mouse
near the item, press Shift, and click the left mouse
button.
Adding a group of objects to the selection set:
After selecting one group of objects, drag a
selection rectangle around another group as in
normal selection, but press Shift before releasing
the mouse button. The items must be completely
enclosed by the rectangle to be affected. Any
items in the region which were already selected
will be deselected.
Selecting specific items: Sometimes you need to
be even more specific about which items you
want to select. If DesignCAD is in 3D Mode, you
can select objects by dragging a 3D rectangle
around them. If you press Ctrl+3 while your
arrow cursor is showing, it turns into a 3D cursor
like the one you see when you draw a line. This
signifies that you are now in 3D Selection Mode.
You select items as before, but for regional
184
selections, you must enclose the items in a 3D
selection box rather than a simple 2D rectangle.
To return to the 2D Selection Mode, press Ctrl+2.
Selecting all objects: Finally, let's not overlook
the convenience of the Select All command. This
command, located in the Edit menu, selects
everything in the drawing.
Using Selection Handles: When you work with
selected objects, you often need some way to
specify how DesignCAD will manipulate the
items. This is the purpose of selection handles.
The selection handles are the specific points in
the object with or around which DesignCAD
moves, copies, and rotates the selected object or
objects. A moved object or copy of an object is
built around the handles according to the same
relative relationships as the original object.
In many cases, you just want to move your object,
or a copy of it, somewhere else in the drawing.
For these tasks, one handle is enough.
At other times, however, you might need to
control the size and orientation of the moved or
copied object. Now you need two, or possibly
even three handles by which to locate the object.
The primary handle (Handle 0 if you just selected
the object, the blue bull's-eye if you have used the
Set Handles command) establishes the starting
location for the object. Handle 1 provides a
reference point for both the direction and scale of
the object's primary axis. Handle 2 provides a
second directional reference for orientation.
Placing specific handles: You can set specific
selection handles on a selected object or group of
objects by pressing Ctrl+H or using Edit /
Selection Edit / Set Handles. The Status Bar
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
prompts you to set one, two, or three points for the
handles. If you set less than three, press Enter to
end the command.
You can use any of the point commands to set
these handles, including Point XYZ, Point
Relative, and Gravity. You can set or change
your handles even if you have already started
another command.
Selection Modes
Entity selection is slightly different when
working in 2D or 3D Mode.
2D Selection Mode
Menu: Options / 2D Selection Mode
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+2
Point 1: Object to be selected or first corner of
selection rectangle
Point 2: Second corner of selection rectangle
(optional)
Most DesignCAD commands require drawing
objects to be selected. For example, to erase an
object you can select it and then press the Del key.
2D Selection Mode causes the selections to take
place with respect to the drawing screen. When
you click on an object, the object closest to the
cursor on the screen will be selected, not the
closest object in 3D space. The two are not always
the same.
Using the Command
There are four ways to select objects in
DesignCAD:
1.
2.
Click directly on the object.
Drag a selection rectangle around a region.
contact us at www.designcad.com
3.
4.
Choose the Select All command.
Choose the Select Entity command. This
method only works while the program is in
Preset Point Mode.
If you drag a selection rectangle around a region,
objects inside that rectangle will be included in
the selection. To include objects that touch the
selection rectangle, hold the Ctrl key down during
the selection.
The Shift key can be used to add items to the
current selection set. For example, to select two
objects in the drawing, you can select one and
then hold the Shift key down while you select the
other.
When you select something by dragging a
selection rectangle in 2D Selection Mode, the
objects inside the rectangle are selected,
regardless of their "depth." With 3D Selection
Mode you drag a 3D box, and objects must lie
inside the box in all three directions to be
selected.
NOTE: A DesignCAD drawing is always in either 2D
Selection Mode or 3D Selection Mode. To change the
selection mode, select this command, which is a toggle
function.
You may also select the 2D or 3D Selection Mode
tool in the Main Toolbox. If 3D Selection Mode is
active, the 3D Selection Mode tool will be visible
in the Main Toolbox. Click and hold on the tool;
the tool drawer will slide out. While still holding
the mouse button, move the cursor over the 2D
Selection Mode tool. Release the mouse button to
put the currently active drawing in 2D Selection
Mode.
185
DesignCAD Reference Manual
In 2D Selection Mode, the cursor is the familiar
mouse arrow. In 3D Selection Mode, the cursor is
a 3D cursor made up of three lines parallel to the
X, Y, and Z axes.
When using commands like Gravity in 3D
Selection Mode, the cursor snaps to the point that
is closest in 3D space, not necessarily the one that
appears to be nearest the cursor on the screen.
3D Selection Mode
It's easy to use 3D Selection Mode using the
DesignCAD Tile views. This allows you to see
objects from all sides. - the main Perspective view
and smaller Front, Top, and Side views. Move the
cursor so that it appears outside the bottom left
corner of the object to be selected in all three of
the smaller views. (You may have to press
Ctrl+Shift while moving the mouse to get there).
Now press the left mouse button, hold it down,
and move so that the cursor drags the selection
box past the top right corner of the object in all
three of the smaller views. Release the mouse
button. If the selection box completely enclosed
the object, it will be selected. (It takes some
practice, so keep trying.)
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+3
Point 1: Object to be selected or first corner of
selection rectangle
Point 2: Second corner of selection rectangle
(optional)
Changes the selection mode of DesignCAD so
that selections are made in 3D space rather than
with respect to the drawing screen.
In 3D Selection Mode, the selection takes place in
three dimensions. When you select an object by
clicking on it, the cursor must be on the object on
the X, Y, and the Z axis. When you select an
object by dragging a box around it, the object
must be enclosed along X, Y, and Z axes, not just
the left, right, top, and bottom.
If you drag a selection rectangle around a region,
objects inside that rectangle will be included in
the selection. Don't forget to use Ctrl+Shift to
drag the cursor in the third direction so the objects
will be encompassed in this dimension as well. To
include objects that touch the selection rectangle,
hold the Ctrl key down just before you release the
mouse button as you complete the selection
rectangle.
The Shift key can be used to add items to the
current selection set. For example, to select two
objects in the drawing, you can select one and
then hold the Shift key down while you select the
other.
186
Point Select Mode
Menu: Options / Point Select Mode
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+1
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Set a point on the entity you want to
select.
With Point Select Mode active, you can select one
or more objects; move individual points; select a
group of points and move all of them at once
(even in more than one object); add or delete
points to and from a single selected object; or cut
a line or curve into two pieces.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Selecting Objects
Moving a Group of Points
To select an individual object in Point Select
Mode, simply click on the object. If another item
is selected already, the first will be deselected and
the second will be selected instead. You can press
the Shift key and click on other items to add or
remove them to or from the selection set.
Select the object(s) to be manipulated. Press and
hold the left mouse button and drag a selection
rectangle around the points you wish to select.
Release the mouse button. The small boxes turn
solid for each point selected in this manner. If the
points do not all lie in a rectangular region, select
some with a rectangle, then press Shift and drag a
selection rectangle around the other points.
NOTE: Point Select Mode will not allow you to select
objects with a selection rectangle. The reason for this
is that if multiple points are to be manipulated once the
objects are selected, the points are specified with a
selection rectangle.
Moving Individual Points in Selected Objects
Select the object. If you are not in Point Select
Mode, choose the command from the Options
menu, or press Ctrl+1. The points in the selected
object are highlighted with small boxes, and the
cursor turns into an arrowhead with no tail.
NOTE: You must select even single points using the
Shift key and a selection rectangle if you wish to add
them to a set of selected points.
Now that your points are all selected, move the
cursor over any of the selected points. The cursor
turns into a circle with cross hairs. Click once and
move the cursor; DesignCAD shows a
rubber-band representation of the moving points.
Set a second point for your desired destination.
All of the selected points are moved, and the
shapes of the objects containing those points are
updated.
Adding a Point to a Single Selected Entity
Move the cursor over the point you wish to move.
The cursor changes shape into a circle with cross
hairs through its center. Click on the point, then
move the cursor to the desired position and set a
point there. The advantage of this method is that
once you have clicked on the point, you can use
Point Polar, Point Relative, or Point XY (Point
XYZ in 3D Mode) to move the point to an exact
location. Alternatively, you can click on the point
and hold down the mouse button and drag the
point, only releasing the left mouse button when
the point is where you want it.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Select the entity and enter Point Select Mode.
Move the cursor near the object you want to
modify. When you are in range the cursor will
turn into an arrow with a "+" sign in the
arrowhead. Click at the location where you want
to add a point. As you move the cursor, a
rubber-band line will follow, indicating the shape
the object will have. Click again to place the new
point where desired. To add the point without
changing the shape of the object, set the first
point, then use the Line Snap command to snap
to the same location (Gravity will not work,
because the point is not defined yet!).
187
DesignCAD Reference Manual
NOTE: This function only works for lines or curves and
when there is only one item selected. Entities that
cannot be modified this way will never show the arrow
cursor with the "+."
Extending the End of a Selected Line
Select the line and switch to Point Select Mode.
Move the cursor near one endpoint, and press the
Shift key. If this is the first or last segment of the
line, the cursor will turn into an arrow with three
dots at its tip. Click the line, and release the Shift
key. As you move the cursor, a rubber-band line
shows the line extended to the cursor's location.
You can shorten or lengthen the segment, or make
it go backwards. When the rubber-band line is the
desired length, click again. The extended line will
be redrawn.
NOTE: This function only works on lines, and only on
the first or last segment.
Deleting a Point from a Selected Object:
Select the object. If necessary, enter Point Select
Mode. Press Ctrl+Shift. Move the cursor over the
point you wish to delete. The cursor turns into a
cursor with a - on it. Click on the point. The point
is erased, and the object is redrawn.
Cutting a Selected Object into Two Pieces:
Select the object (this works with a line or curve,
also with an arc, or circle if they are saved as a
line). If necessary, enter Point Select Mode. Press
Ctrl. Move the cursor to where you want to cut the
object (this does not have to be a pre-defined
point). The cursor becomes a tiny pair of scissors.
While pressing Ctrl, click the left mouse button.
The object is cut at the selected point.
188
Example: Add a point to a line.
Enter Point Select Mode. Move the cursor near
the line. Click the left mouse button to select the
entity. Once the points are showing, move the
cursor onto the line. The cursor will have a + in it
when it is on the line. Click the left mouse button.
Move the cursor to the desired position for the
new point on the line. Click the left mouse button
to set a point. A point is added to the line.
Preset Point Mode
Menu: Options / Preset Point Mode
Toolbox Icon:
When Preset Point Mode is active, the points
needed for a drawing can be set before the
commands are chosen. This allows you to set
points in precise locations with out seeing a
rubber-band preview of the entity you are
drawing.
Using the Command
Turn on Preset Point Mode, and a check will
appear next to the command in the Options in the
menu. Set the points in your drawing. Select a
drawing command. The entity you selected will
be drawn using the points you set previously.
Drawing commands executed in this manner will
use their current options. To set the options for the
command, select it before setting the number of
points required for the command.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
If more points have been set than are necessary
for the chosen entity, DesignCAD will use only as
many points as needed, in the order in which they
were set. The remaining points will be removed.
For instance, if you set four points and choose the
Box command, the first two points set will be
used to draw the box. The third and fourth points
will disappear.
smaller, and then clicking the left mouse button a
second time to release the selection. The resizing
handles will remain visible until the command is
turned off.
Example: Draw a curve.
Choose Preset Point Mode and set six points in
the drawing. Select the Curve command. A curve
will be drawn through the six points you set.
Use Resizing Handles
Menu: Options / Use Resizing Handles
Toolbar Icon:
When enabled, items that are selected have
scaling nodes or resizing handles around them.
These nodes may be used to scale the selection
along a single axis, both axes in 2D Mode, or all
three axes in 3D Mode.
Using the Command
Select the items to be scaled or zoomed. Select the
Use Resizing Handles command and resizing
handles appear on and around the selection.
These nodes may be used by placing the cursor
over one of them, clicking the left mouse button,
dragging the cursor to make the selection larger or
contact us at www.designcad.com
If you just use the left mouse button, the edge or
corner opposite the resizing handle you chose
maintains its original location. To scale the
selection by its center, press and hold down the
Ctrl key when you click on the resizing handle,
and release the Ctrl key after you click the mouse.
To zoom the selection (scale the selection equally
with respect to all axes at once), press and hold
down the Shift key when you click on the resizing
handle, and release the Shift key after you click
the mouse.
To zoom the selection by its center, press and hold
down the Ctrl+Shift keys when you click on the
resizing handle, and release the Ctrl+Shift keys
after you click the mouse.
Select All
Menu: Edit / Select All
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+A
Selects every editable object in the drawing. This
makes it easy to manipulate all objects as a group
rather than having to perform the same command
on every object individually. Objects that reside
in layers that have been defined as uneditable in
the Layer options (see Layer Options), are not
selected.
189
DesignCAD Reference Manual
TIP: If you have a number of objects on the screen and
need to select all but a few of them, choose the Select
All command to select them all. Then depress the Shift
key and click on the objects you don't want to be
selected. This is much faster than selecting each object
individually.
Select Previous
Select Entity
Menu: Edit / Select Entity
In Preset Point Mode, the points are set before
the commands are chosen. Any time you click the
mouse, a point is set. The Select Entity command
tells DesignCAD that you want to select the entity
on which you set a point.
Menu: Edit / Select Previous
Using the Command
Shortcut Key: Shift+P
Selects the entities that were previously selected
in the drawing.
In Preset Point Mode (found on the Options
menu), set a point on each entity you wish to
select. Choose the Select Entity. Each entity on
which a point was set will be selected.
Select Next
Example: Select several entities.
Menu: Edit / Select Next
Draw a box, a pyramid and a circle. Enable
Preset Point Mode from the Options menu. Set
a point on the box. Next set a point on the
pyramid. Set another point on the circle. Choose
Select Entity, and the box, the pyramid and the
circle will be selected.
Shortcut Key: Enter
Used to select relatively small entities that are
completely overlapped by other entities. If the
wrong entity is consistently selected when the
mouse is used to click in an area containing a
small entity, this command can be used to select
the desired entity.
Using the Command
Attempt to select an entity at a point that is
overlapped by another entity. One of the entities
is selected and a selection handle appears at the
location on which you clicked. Choose Select
Next. The other entity that occupies the exact
location of the selection handle or a location near
the selection handle will be selected.
190
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Selection Filter
Menu: Edit / Selection Filter
Shortcut Key: Shift+F
Allows you to restrict the type of entities that are
selected when a selection box is dragged around
several objects in a drawing. This allows you to
quickly drag a selection box around a group of
entities and select only certain entities instead of
everything inside the box.
Using the Command
Open the Selection Filter:
perform the action throughout the entire drawing,
or by using standard DesignCAD selection
methods (Ctrl and/or Shift, plus mouse-clicking
and selection rectangle combinations) in the
drawing area.
From the top of the window, open the tab (Color,
Entity Type, etc.) whose selection properties you
want to set. To add a property to the filter so items
of that property, highlight the object in the list and
click Add. The Select By Color, etc. option is
automatically enabled to indicate that the
particular filter is currently being used. To
remove a property from the filter, highlight it on
the right-hand list and then click Remove.
Select Groups Only: Only groups that have been
defined in the drawing using the Group Define
command can have their selection status altered.
Select Solids Only: Only solids will be affected
by the Selection Filter.
Disable Filter: Filter restrictions are retained but
ignored until this option is disabled or the
Selection Filter is closed.
Add to Selection: All drawing entities whose
characteristics are currently defined as part of a
filter are added to the current selection.
Three basic tasks can be performed using this
window.
Drawing
items
with
given
characteristics can be:
• added to an existing selection
• excluded from the current selection
Excluded Selection: All drawing entities whose
characteristics are currently defined as part of a
filter are removed from the current selection. If
nothing is selected when this button is clicked, all
entities are selected except those whose
characteristics are currently being filtered.
• defined as a new selection.
These actions are achieved either by clicking the
appropriate action button (Add to Selection,
Excluded Selection, and New Selection) to
contact us at www.designcad.com
191
DesignCAD Reference Manual
New Selection: When this button is clicked, all
selected drawing entities are deselected and the
entities whose characteristics are currently
defined as part of a filter are added to a new
selection set.
entities encompassed by the resulting area will
not be selected. Press Enter. The entities which
were inside the polygon are selected.
Close: Closes the Selection Filter window. No
filters remain active when the Selection Filter is
closed, but the filter settings are retained until the
drawing is closed.
Polygon Selection
Menu: Edit / Polygon Selection
In 2D Selection Mode and 3D Selection Mode,
this command works like a 2D selection
rectangle. The selection polygon can consist of as
many points and sides as you need. This allows
you to define a more specific area for selection.
Using the Command
Select the Polygon Selection command and set
points in your drawing forming a polygon around
the entities you wish to select. At least three
points must be set to form a valid polygon. If
boundaries of the polygon overlap one another,
Entity Properties
All DesignCAD entities have certain properties:
color, line type, and layer. This section covers
ways you can identify these properties and
change them.
Colors
To set the drawing color, make sure the correct
color appears in the Color box in the main
toolbox. See Colors‘Colors” on page 6. Whatever
color is set is the color that new entities will use.
To change an entity’s color, select the entity and
open its Info Box.
Color by Layer
Menu: Options / Color by Layer
A toggle that determines whether or not entity
colors change automatically when entities are
moved to a layer for which the color has been set
using the Assign Color option in the Layer
Options (see Layer Options). When this
192
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
command is enabled, the color of entities on a
layer will also change if the layer's assigned color
is changed.
Layers
For details on creating and setting layers, see
Layer Options. The active layer is the layer new
entities will be placed on.
To change an entity’s layer, select the entity and
open its Info Box.
See also: Duplicate to Layer.
Line Styles
Line styles can be set using the Line Style toolbox
(for details on displaying toolboxes, see View
Options).
Apply to Selection: Applies the line style to all
selected objects.
Apply to Entire Drawing: Applies the line style
to all entities in the drawing.
Fill Wide Line: Applies a solid fill to wide lines.
Change Scale Width: Adjust the width of the
line style repeating pattern.
Same As: Switches the line style to that of a
selected entity.
Save as Default: Sets the selected line style as the
default for this and future drawings.
To change an entity’s line style, select the entity
and open its Info Box.
Line Style by Layer
Menu: Options / Line Style by Layer
You can also open this toolbox by clicking the
Line Style icon on the Main toolbox.
A toggle that determines whether or not entity
line styles change automatically when entities are
moved to a layer for which the line style has been
set using the Assign Line Style option in the
Layer Options (see Layer Options). When this
command is enabled, the line style of entities on a
layer will also change if the layer's assigned line
style is changed.
The first field contains the line style itself;
DesignCAD provides several from which to
choose.
To define your own, see Hacking Custom Line
Styles and Custom Line Style Shapes.
contact us at www.designcad.com
193
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Info Box
Menu: View / Info Box
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+I
Toolbar Icon:
Used to view and edit properties of a selected
object. To activate the command, you must select
an object before executing the command.
Using the Command
Select an object and choose the Info Box
command. The available items in the Info Box
vary depending on the type of object you have
selected.
All Info Boxes contain Layer (see Layer Options)
and Color information.
designations are reordered; the first point
becomes the last point and the last point becomes
the first point.
Compliment Arc: If enabled (only when arcs or
elliptical arcs are selected), click it to change the
arc to its complimenting arc.
Texture Mapping: If enabled, click it to display
the Texture Mapping window. See Texture
Mapping.
Show Detail: If enabled, click it to display
additional details on the selected object like point
locations, scale, etc.
Name: Allows you specify a name for the
selected object/s.
There are different kinds of Info Box
configurations based on object categories. Each
contains information relevant to the specific
category of object.
Plane
To change any property, click its box and select
the new property.
Same As: Lets you match the parameters of an
existing entity. Just click on the Same As button,
then click on the entity already in the drawing that
has the properties you want for the selected entity.
Keep Visible: Controls whether or not the Info
Box remains visible when no entity is selected.
Reverse Points: If enabled (only when vector
entities and/or spline curves are selected), click it
to change the numbering of the points. The point
194
• Point Coordinates: The coordinate of the
current point on each axis.
• Current Point: The number of the point to
which the information applies.
• Number of Points: The total number of
points in the plane.
• Area: The area measurement of the plane in
Drawing Units.
• Length: The measurement of the perimeter
in Drawing Units.
• Material: The material properties of the
entity.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
• Smooth: True = Smooth enabled; False =
Smooth Disabled.
• Color by Layer: Changes entity color
automatically if moved to a layer with a
preset color.
Circle/Arc
• Center Coordinate: The coordinate of the
center on each axis.
• Radius: The radius in Drawing Units.
• Start Angle: The starting angle of the
Circle/Arc.
• Span Angle: The span angle of the
Circle/Arc.
• Area: The area of the Circle/Arc.
• Length: The circumference of the circle or
length of the arc in Drawing Units.
• Line Type: The type of line (i.e., dashed,
dotted, etc.) used to draw the Circle/Arc.
• Line Scale: The amount of space between
dashes or dots in certain line types.
• Text Size: The point size of the text.
• Accuracy: The number of digits after the
decimal point in the dimension.
• Arrow Type: The type of arrow used in the
dimension.
• Format: The format of the dimension text.
• Flip Text: Reverses the direction of
dimension text.
• Color by Layer: Changes entity color
automatically if moved to a layer with a
preset color.
• Line Style by Layer: Changes line style
automatically if moved to a layer with preset
line style.
Vector
• Point Coordinates: The coordinate of the
current point on each axis.
• Current Point: The number of the point to
which the information applies.
• Area: The area of the vector.
• Line Width: The width of the line used to
draw the Circle/Arc.
• Length: The measurement of the vector in
Drawing Units.
• Fill Wide Lines: Fills wide line types in 2D
Mode instead of drawing them as outlines.
• Bounding Box: The dimensions of a box
that would encompass the vector.
• Color by Layer: Changes entity color
automatically if moved to a layer with a
preset color.
• Line Type: The type of line used to draw the
vector.
• Line Style by Layer: Changes line style
automatically if moved to a layer with preset
line style.
Dimension
• Line Scale: The amount of space between
dashes or dots in certain line types.
• Line Width: The width of the line used to
draw the curve.
• Text Font: The typeface of the text.
contact us at www.designcad.com
195
DesignCAD Reference Manual
• Fill Wide Lines: Fills wide line types in 2D
Mode instead of drawing them as outlines.
• Color by Layer: Changes entity color
automatically if moved to a layer with a
preset color.
• Line Style by Layer: Changes line style
automatically if moved to a layer with preset
line style.
Curve
Text
• Font: The typeface of the text.
• Content: The letters, numbers, and symbols
that make up the text entry.
• Angle: The angle at which the text entity is
placed in the drawing.
• Length: The length of the text entity in
Drawing Units.
• Point Coordinates: The coordinate of the
current point on each axis.
• Height: The height of the text entity in
Drawing Units.
• Current Point: The number of the point to
which the information applies.
• Keep Length/Width ratio: When checked
the length/width ratio stays the same when
the length or width is changed.
• Area: The area of the curve.
• Length: The measurement of the curve in
Drawing Units.
• Bounding Box: The dimensions of a box
that would encompass the curve.
• Line Type: The type of line used to draw the
curve.
• Line Scale: The amount of space between
dashes or dots in certain line types.
• Line Width: The width of the line used to
draw the curve.
• Fill Wide Lines: Fills wide line types in 2D
Mode instead of drawing them as outlines.
• Color by Layer: Changes entity color
automatically if moved to a layer with a
preset color.
• Color by Layer: Changes entity color
automatically if moved to a layer with a
preset color.
Solid
• X,Y,Z Scale: The scale of the solid along
each axis.
• Bounding Box: The dimensions of a box
that would encompass the solid.
• Material: The material properties of the
solid.
• Smooth: Enables or disables the smooth
shade option. The Smooth shade option is
selected by default for all solids. This causes
curved surfaces to appear smooth, with their
• Line Style by Layer: Changes line style
automatically if moved to a layer with preset
line style.
196
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
faceted edges rounded off. Smooth shading
can be disabled in order to force the facets of
the shaded solid to be visible.
Redo
Menu: Edit / Redo
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Y
Toolbar Icon:
• Area and Volume: Clicking this button
calculates the area and volume of the solid.
• Color by Layer: Changes entity color
automatically if moved to a layer with a
preset color.
Editing
This section covers all the ways you can edit 2D
(and some 3D) objects.
Undo, Redo
Commands are stored in DesignCAD’s memory
and you can step backward and forward, in order,
through these commands.
Undo
Reverses any action performed by the Undo
command. It is only available after you have used
the Undo command in the current drawing
session.
Cut, Copy, Paste
These commands interact with the Windows
clipboard - a place you can store one object at a
time to insert somewhere else later.
Cut
Menu: Edit / Cut
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+X
Toolbox Icon:
Menu: Edit / Undo
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Z
Toolbar Icon:
Cancels the most recent drawing action. It can be
used repetitively to "back out" of a series of
commands, as it is always negating the previous
drawing action. You can "back up" to the point
where the drawing was last saved.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Removes a selected object or group of objects
from the drawing screen and places them on the
Windows Clipboard. Once the selected object or
objects are on the Windows Clipboard, you can
Paste the contents back into DesignCAD or other
Windows applications.
Using the Command
197
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Select the object or objects you want to remove
from the drawing and place in the Clipboard.
Then choose the Cut command. The selection is
cut to the Clipboard.
Copies a section of the drawing that intersects a
3D box to the Windows Clipboard, so it can be
pasted into the same drawing, a different drawing,
or a different application.
Copy
Using the Command
Menu: Edit / Copy
After choosing the Section Copy command,
define the section by setting two points in
opposite corners of a 3D box. (If DesignCAD is
in 2D Mode, a 2D box is used.) Any part of the
drawing that is contained within the cutoff box
boundary is pasted to the Windows Clipboard.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+C
Toolbox Icon:
Copies selected objects from the DesignCAD
drawing screen to the Windows Clipboard,
leaving the original objects still in the drawing.
From the Clipboard, you can Paste copies into
DesignCAD or into other Windows applications.
Using the Command
Select the object or objects to be copied. Choose
the Copy command. The program copies the
selected items to the Clipboard.
If you want to paste the object into another
drawing or Windows application, you can do so
without recopying. The object remains in the
Clipboard until another object is cut or copied to
the Clipboard, replacing it.
Section Copy
Example: Copy part of a circle elsewhere in the
drawing.
Select the Section Copy command. Set the points
for the cutoff box so that a section of the circle is
inside the box. After the cutoff box disappears,
press Ctrl+V or select the Paste command. A
rubber-band box representing the scale of the
object will follow the cursor as you move it
around the screen. When you have selected a
location for the copied section of the circle, set a
point.
Paste
Menu: Edit / Paste
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+V
Toolbox Icon:
Menu: Edit / Section Copy
Point 1: One corner of the cutoff box
Point 2: opposite corner of the cutoff box
Point 1: First handle
Point 2: Second handle (optional)
Point 3: Third handle (optional)
198
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Copies drawing objects from the Windows
Clipboard into DesignCAD.
Using the Command
Use Cut or Copy to place one or more objects on
the Windows Clipboard. Choose the Paste
command. Set a point for the location of the
object or group to be pasted into the drawing. If
necessary, a second point can be used to specify
the angle and size of the object, and a third point
can be used to set the 3D orientation.
NOTE: In order to use the second selection handle to
change the size of the selection, you must uncheck the
Use Original Scale option.
Copy Image
Menu: Edit / Copy Image
the clipboard. Use the mouse to enclose the image
with the rubber-band box. When the rubber-band
box surrounds the image you want copied, set
another point for the opposite corner of the
rubber-band box. A copy of the image is placed
onto the Clipboard.
You can also use the Copy Image command to
copy part of several entities onto the Clipboard.
The image is treated like a drawing instead of a
CAD object.
Erase
Menu: Edit / Erase
Shortcut Key: Del
Deletes selected entities from the drawing.
Using the Command
Point 1: First corner of rubber-band box
Select the entities in the drawing you want to
erase. Then choose the Erase command. The
items are erased from the drawing.
Point 2: Opposite corner of the box
Erase Last
Copies text or graphics onto the Clipboard.
Copying text or graphics to the Clipboard
replaces the contents previously stored there.
Menu: Edit / Erase Last
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+Shift+C
This command is similar to the Copy command
except the entities are not selected prior to
selecting the command. The Copy Image
command copies only what is enclosed in the
rubber-band box. The image is treated like a
Metafile because the OLE object information is
bypassed.
Using the Command
Choose the Copy Image command and set a
point for the first corner of a rubber-band box that
will be used to define the image to be copied to
contact us at www.designcad.com
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+E
Deletes the most recently drawn entity from the
drawing.
Using the Command
Choose the Erase Last command, and the most
recently drawn entity is removed from the
drawing. Each subsequent time you use this
command, it erases the next most recently drawn
entity, working its way from last to first entity
drawn in that session.
199
DesignCAD Reference Manual
This command pays attention only to the order in
which entities were drawn originally. It does not
acknowledge modifications to existing entities or
undo them, but erases entire entities.
Selected Only: Runs the command only on
selected lines.
Editing Lines
These commands can be used to edit lines, arcs,
circles, and curves.
Line Split by Distance
Menu: Edit / Line Edit / Line Split by Distance
Point 1: Location of line split
Line Split by Points
Menu: Edit / Line Edit / Line Split by Points
Point 2: Direction of line split, if necessary
Point 1: First point of segment to be removed
Removes a section of a specified length from a
line or double line, splitting the line or double line
into two segments.
Point 2: Second point of segment to be removed
Using the Command
Select the Line Split by Distance command.
Removes a section from a line or double line,
splitting the line or double line into two segments.
Using the Command
Select the Line Split by Points command
Cap the Opening: For a double line, the opening
will be capped at the split.
Size: The length of the segment to be removed.
Center Align: The removed segment will be
centered at the point where the line is clicked. If
this options is not checked, set the first point for
the location of the split and then a second point to
sets the direction.
Selected Only: Runs the command only on
selected lines.
Set the first point for the segment to be removed.
Set the second point for the desired length and
direction of the segment to be removed. The
Cap the Opening: For a double line, the opening
will be capped at the split.
200
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
portion of the line between the two points is
deleted, splitting the original line into two
segments.
endpoints of the combined segments are
removed, so there are no points in the line to
indicate the previous gap.
Line Connect
If the line segments are offset, DesignCAD adds
an additional segment to connect the lines,
resulting in a single line. In this case, the
endpoints of the line segments are not removed.
Menu: Edit / Line Edit / Line Connect
Point 1: Endpoint of the first line to be connected
Point 2: Endpoint of the second line to be
connected
Connects two lines or double lines.
Using the Command
Select the Line Connect command and set a
point on the endpoint of the first line or double
line to be connected. Set a point on the endpoint
of the second line or double line to be connected.
If the line segments to be connected are aligned,
the gap between the two lines is seamlessly
connected into a single line. The original
contact us at www.designcad.com
201
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Line Cut
Using the Command
Menu: Edit / Line Edit / Line Cut
Choose the Convert to Double Line command.
Point 1: Line to be cut
Point 2: Cut location
Cuts a line at a specified point.
Using the Command
Select the Line Cut command. Set a point on the
line to be cut. Set a point at the location for the
cut. The line is cut at that location. The two
resulting lines can be selected and manipulated
independently.
Convert to Double Line
Menu: Edit / Convert to Double Line
Point 1: Entity to be converted to a double entity
Converts existing 2D entities into double-line
entities. Entities that are converted are
automatically offset a specified distance and
direction from the original. The ends of the entity
may be capped or left open independently, and the
double entity may be filled and/or automatically
trimmed. Double lines simplify several common
types of drawings, including house plans and land
plots.
Line Width: The space between the two parallel
entities.
Align: Determines how the double line is created.
If Left is selected, the width of the entity will
extend to what would be your left if you were
standing on the first point set for the entity facing
the second point set for the entity.
NOTE: To create double line entities, see Double
Line Mode.
202
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
NOTE: If the double entity is converted with the Left or
Right option selected, you will be able to snap to both
sides of the finished double entity. If the double entity is
converted with the Center option selected, you will be
able to snap to both sides and the center of the double
entity.
Cap: Determines which ends of the double line
are capped.
Filled: If checked, the double line will have solid
fill.
Auto Trim: The double entity will automatically
be trimmed where it overlaps itself or another
double entity.
NOTE: The Explode command (see Explode) can be
used to explode a double entity into vectors. If you are
going to cross one double entity over another, explode
the existing double entity and uncheck the Auto Trim
box before drawing the second double entity to ensure
that all four entities will be visible in the intersection.
Convert Selected Lines: Converts only selected
entities.
Selection Edit
This sections refers to editing commands you can
perform on entities that are already selected.
Duplicate
Point 3: Handle 3 sets orientation for the copy
(optional)
Makes a copy of the current selection. The
command does not use the Windows Clipboard,
so any contents in the Clipboard are not erased or
changed.
Using the Command
Select an object or objects, and then choose the
Duplicate command. You can also activate this
command by moving the cursor onto the primary
handle of an object, then holding down Ctrl and
clicking the left mouse button.
The Select Copy/Move window appears.
Use Original Scale: If this option is enabled and
two or more points are used to place the duplicate,
the second point can be used to change the
orientation and size of the duplicate. If this option
is disabled, the second point only affects the
orientation of the duplicate.
One, two, or three points may be used to specify
the location where the copy is to be placed. The
first handle of the selection is positioned at the
first point set with this command.
Edit / Selection Edit / Duplicate
Shortcut Key: N
Point 1: Handle 1 sets location for the copy
Point 2: Handle 2 sets angle and scale for the copy
(optional)
contact us at www.designcad.com
203
DesignCAD Reference Manual
If you have set two or three selection handles
using the Set Handles command, or if the Enable
Sticky Handles option in the General Options
(see General Options) is checked, then you can
place and scale the duplicate by those points.
Otherwise, the first point you place will make a
duplicate with the same orientation and size as the
selection.
If a second point is used, the selection's size and
angle are adjusted so that the secondary handle is
located at the second point. If only one point is
used, the selection will be placed at its original
size and angle.
If a third point is used, the selection will be
positioned at an angle so that the three selection
handles lie on the same plane as the three points
set.
Mirror
Edit / Selection Edit / Mirror
Shortcut Key: /
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Location of mirrored object
Makes a mirror image of a selection.
Using the Command
Choose the Mirror command. The window
contains the following options:
From Reference Point: When enabled, this
option lets you place the duplicate using a
reference point. Just set a reference point relative
to the original. Then set another reference point
relative to the desired location for the duplicate.
The duplicate is inserted into the drawing at the
same scale as the original.
Duplicate to Layer
Edit / Selection Edit / Duplicate to Layer
Copies selected entities to a different layer. See
Layer Options.
Using the Command
Mirror Normal to: Selecting an axis places a
mirror which faces in the direction of the axis.
That is, the mirror lies on the axis and is
perpendicular to it.
• X-Axis:
Select the entities you want to copy, and choose
the Duplicate to Layer command. Enter the layer
to which the entities copied, and click OK.
204
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
• Y-Axis:
Custom Axis is selected, the mirror will be
normal (perpendicular) to the line between the
selection handle and the point that was set.
• Z-Axis:
Move
• Custom Axis: Specifies a 3D line
perpendicular to the face of the mirror. You
can use the option to create custom mirror
effects, such as producing a mirror image
facing at an angle 90 degrees away from the
original.
Edit / Selection Edit / Move
Shortcut Key: M
Point 1: New location of the handle
Point 2: New location of second handle (optional)
Point 3: New location of third handle (optional)
Moves a selected entity or group to another
location. One, two, or three points may be used to
specify the new location.
Using the Command
Select an object or objects, and then choose the
Move command. The options are the same as for
the Duplicate command (see Duplicate).
• Custom Mirror: Uses a mirror defined by
two points.
Set a point for the location of the mirror image.
The mirror image will be located at that point, and
mirrored according to the option selected. If
You can also activate this command by moving
the cursor over the primary handle. When the
cursor changes into a four-sided arrow, you can
move the object in one of two ways:
1.
Press the left mouse button and hold. Drag
the selection to the new location.
or:
contact us at www.designcad.com
205
DesignCAD Reference Manual
2.
Click the left mouse button once to lock the
Move command. Drag, or use any of the
point commands, to select a new location. If
more than one handle has been set for the
selection, you can set more than one point
when you move the object.
Point 4: new location for upper right corner of
selection
Moves a selected 2D entity or group of entities to
another location. Four points are used to specify
the new location and any scaling or skewing that
is to occur.
Four-Point Copy
Using the Command
Edit / Selection Edit / Copy
Point 3: location for upper left corner of copy
Select the 2D entity or group of entities to be
moved. Choose the Four-Point Move command.
Set four points for the new locations of the four
corners of the selection. When the fourth point is
set, the selection is moved.
Point 4: location for upper right corner of copy
Smooth Line by Point Reduction
Copies a selected 2D entity or group of entities to
another location. Four points are used to specify
the new location and any scaling or skewing that
is to occur.
Edit / Selection Edit / Smooth Line by Point
Reduction
Point 1: location for lower left corner of copy
Point 2: location for lower right corner of copy
Using the Command
Select the 2D entity or group of entities to be
copied. Choose the Four-Point Copy command.
Set four points for the four corners of the new
copy of the selection. When the fourth point is set,
the new copy of the selection is inserted in the
drawing.
Smooths complex lines and curves by reducing
the number of points in them. DesignCAD
divides the points of the line(s) and/or curve(s)
into groups of a specified number of points. The
locations of the points in each group are averaged,
and the group is replaced with a single point.
Using the Command
Four-Point Move
Edit / Selection Edit / Move
Point 1: new location for lower left corner of
selection
Point 2: new location for lower right corner of
selection
Point 3: new location for upper left corner of
selection
206
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Select the lines and/or curves to be smoothed.
Choose the Smooth Line by Point Reduction
command.
result. The original line is shown along with the
results of a Smooth Line by Point Reduction
and a Smooth Line by Slope Detection.
Enter a value for the Number of Points for each
group. To convert the line to a curve, enable the
Convert to Curve for Line Smoothing option.
Always show this dialog box: If disabled, you
can reset it using the Smooth Options command.
A single point is set for the average location of
each group. A smoothed object results.
Example: Smooth a complex line.
Select the line. Choose the Smooth Line by
Point Reduction command. Click OK. The line
is converted to a smooth curve. The figure below
is shown with Point Select Mode turned on to
illustrate the reduced number of points in the
contact us at www.designcad.com
Smooth Line by Slope Detection
Edit / Selection Edit / Smooth Line by Slope
Detection
Smooths complex lines and curves. A point is
removed if the two segments that it joins do not
deviate from a straight line by a specified angle.
207
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Smooth Options
Select the lines and/or curves to be smoothed.
Choose the Smooth Line by Slope Detection
command.
Edit / Selection Edit / Smooth Options
Sets the default values for the Smooth Line by
Point Reduction and Smooth Line by Slope
Detection commands.
Using the Command
Choose the Smooth Options command.
Enter a value for the Angle option. To convert the
line to a curve, enable the Convert to Curve for
Line Smoothing option.
Always show this dialog box: If disabled, you
can reset it using the Smooth Options command.
Enter the values you want to use as defaults for
both Smooth commands and click OK.
For an example, see Smooth Line by Point
Reduction.
208
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Combine Lines
Using the Command
Edit / Selection Edit / Combine Lines
Select the entity (or entities) to be broken. Choose
the Break Line command. You can use the
command on a line created with the Line or
Polygon commands, or created with Arcs,
Circles, or Curves drawn as lines. The line
selected will be broken into several separate lines,
depending on how many vertices the line has.
Shortcut Key: B
Merges connecting lines, arcs, and curves into a
single line entity.
Using the Command
Select the entities you wish to combine into a
single line. All selected entities must share
endpoints to form a continuous line. That is, each
line entity has to be connected to the next line.
This command affects currently selected entities.
Ortho
Edit / Selection Edit / Ortho
Toolbox Icon:
Forces all line segments within 10 degrees of
parallel with the X, Y, or Z axis to lie exactly
parallel to that axis.
This command is similar to Make Plane (see
Make Plane), but Make Plane converts the
selected lines into a plane (surface) instead of a
line entity.
Using the Command
Select the lines to be straightened, and choose the
Ortho command. The line will be converted to a
vertical or horizontal entity.
NOTE: Since this command converts arcs into lines,
any arcs will lose their center points. Curves are also
converted to vectors for this operation.
Break Line
Edit / Selection Edit / Break Line
Shortcut Key: |
Breaks a line entity consisting of two or more line
segments into separate line entities.
contact us at www.designcad.com
209
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Rotate
Edit / Selection Edit / Rotate
Shortcut Key: R
Toolbox Icon:
Through Selection Handle: The rotation axis
always shifts so that it passes through the selected
object's primary selection handle. Otherwise the
rotation axis passes directly through the first
point(s) that you set.
Rotation Angle: After entering the angle, press
Enter to return to the drawing area. Press Enter
again to rotate the selection.
Point 1: Location of rotation axis
Point 2: Second point on rotation axis (2-point
rotation only)
Rotates a selected object or group of objects.
Using the Command
Select the object or objects you want to rotate, and
then choose the Rotate command. The selection
can be rotated on any axis at any angle. The
window displays several options for the axis of
rotation:
Increment: Sets the increments of rotation used
in Drag Mode.
Drag Mode: Rotation can be controlled using the
mouse. To rotate the selection using the mouse,
move the cursor into the drawing area. Click and
hold the left mouse button. Drag the cursor to
rotate the selected object(s). When the selection
reaches the desired rotation angle, release the
mouse button.
NOTE: If Through Selection Handle is disabled when
using Drag Mode, one or two points (depending on the
rotation axis) are required to establish the axis of
rotation before you drag the mouse for the rotation.
Make a Copy: A copy of the selection is rotated
and the original remains in its current location.
Example: Rotate a box 45 degrees on the Y axis.
Rotation Axis: Set the rotation about one of the
three main axes, an axes defined by two points, or
a line. You can also rotate about an axis normal to
a plane.
210
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Select a box. Choose the Rotate command. Enter
45 in the Rotation Angle field in the window.
Select the Y Axis for Rotation Axis. Make sure
Drag Mode is disabled. and press Enter. The box
rotates 45 degrees around the Y axis.
Scale
Edit / Selection Edit / Scale
Shortcut Key: S
Toolbox Icon:
Using the Command
Select the object and choose the Scale command.
In the window enter the scale factors for the X, Y,
and Z directions.
Center At: Determines whether the selection
handle or selection center will will remain in its
current location when the object is scaled.
Example: Scale an object so that it is twice as
large along the Y axis.
Select the object and choose the Scale command.
Enter 1 for the X and Z scales, and 2 for the Y
scale. Press Enter. The object is redrawn with the
new scale factors.
Point 1: Scale center
Scales a selection along the X, Y, or Z axis. In
other words, you can "stretch" the selected
objects to make them taller, shorter, longer, wider,
etc.
NOTE: To use resizing handles to scale objects, see
Use Resizing Handles.
contact us at www.designcad.com
211
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Skew
Example: Skew a box.
Edit / Selection Edit / Skew
Select the box. Set the Primary Selection Handle
on the center of the bottom side of the box so it
will not be moved. Choose the Skew command.
Select the X axis in the window. Set a reference
point at the top left corner of the box. A
rubber-band box is drawn to show how the box
will be drawn. Set a second point 5 Drawing Units
to the left of the reference point. The box is
skewed so the top left corner of the box is 5
Drawing Units to the left of its original position.
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Reference point
Point 2: New position for reference point
Slants one or more selected entities along the X,
Y, Z or "free" axis.
Using the Command
Select the entities to be skewed and choose the
Skew command. Choose the axis on which the
selected objects are to be skewed.
Selection Edit Zoom
Menu: Edit / Selection Edit / Zoom
Toolbox Icon:
Set a reference point in the drawing. A
rubber-band representation of the entity being
skewed shows how the entity will be drawn. Set a
second point to relocate the reference point.
NOTE: The Primary Selection Handle of the selected
object serves as an anchor during the Skew command.
If this handle is located in the center of the object, both
sides of the object move from their original positions.
212
Zooms, or scales, selected entities to be larger or
smaller. It is similar to the Scale command, but it
changes the scales for all axes the same amount.
This keeps the proportions of the object intact.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Using the Command
Using the Command
Select the object to be zoomed. Choose the Select
Edit / Zoom command and enter the Zoom
Factor in the window:
Select the object on which you want to set the
handles. Choose the Set Handles command. Set
from one to three handles on the object. The first
handle set is the primary handle and is designated
by a bull's eye. The secondary handle is
represented by a small 1 enclosed in a circle. The
tertiary handle is a small 2 enclosed in a circle.
Press Enter to end the command if you set one or
two handles. Now you can manipulate the object
using the handles.
The Center At option determines whether the
selection handle or selection center will remain in
its current location when the object is zoomed.
For example, when you copy an object with the
Duplicate command, the first selection handle is
located at the destination point you set. If you
place the selection handle at a convenient
location, it can be much easier to position the
copy.
Press the Enter key. The object will be redrawn to
the new Zoom Factor.
NOTE: To use resizing handles to increase or decrease
an object’s, scale see Use Resizing Handles.
Set Handles
Edit / Selection Edit / Set Handles
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+H
Point 1: First handle
Point 2: Second handle (optional)
The second selection handle is used with some
commands to set the size and angle of a selection.
The Duplicate and Move commands use the
second handle.
The third handle is sometimes used to position the
selection in 3D space. For example, the Move
command locates the first two handles on the first
two points set, and then rotates the selection so
that the three handles lie on the same plane as the
three points set.
Point 3: Third handle (optional)
Selection Handles are reference points for one or
more entities that have been selected. The
selection handles are used to help you move,
copy, or manipulate the selection.
contact us at www.designcad.com
213
DesignCAD Reference Manual
If you are only going to set one selection handle
at a commonly used location for the purpose of
moving or copying the selection, just select the
location from the window. A single handle is
placed at the location you selected.
Move to Back: brings the entity to the very back.
Move After: moves the selected entity behind
another entity (select the entity to move behind).
Move in Front of: moves the selected entity in
front of another entity ( select the entity to move
in front of).
Example: Send a filled circle in front of a filled
box.
Example: Set handles on a box and move it.
Select the box. Choose the Set Handles
command. Set the first handle on the upper night
corner, the second on the lower left corner, and
the third on the lower left rear corner. Next,
choose the Move command and deselect the Use
Original Scale option. Move the cursor to the
desired new location for the box and set a point
for the first handle. Move the cursor away from
the first point. A rubber-band scaling box is
drawn using the cursor location as Point 2. When
you have scaled the object to your liking, set the
second handle. Set a point for the third handle to
orient the object in 3D space.
Select a filled circle from a stack of entities and
choose the Move in Front of command. Set a
point on the filled box. The filled circle is sent
directly in front of the filled box.
Object Alignment
Edit / Selection Edit / Object Alignment
Adjusts the alignment of selected items.
Using the Command
Select the items to be rearranged. Select the
Object Alignment command. In 2D, these are
the alignment options:
Display Order
Edit / Selection Edit / Display Order
Changes the display order of entities so that the
correct portions of overlapping entities are
displayed and printed. This command affects
entities in 2D Mode and entities that lie on the
same XY plane in 3D Mode.
Select to align along top edges, bottom edges, left
edges, right edge, or to center vertically or
horizontally. Click the X to cancel.
Using the Command
Select the entity to be moved and choose:
Move to Front: brings the entity to the very front
214
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
In 3D, these are the alignment options:
Copies a selected object a specified number of
times in as many as three directions. The object
you want to copy must be selected before you use
this command.
Using the Command
First select the object you want to copy. Then
choose the Array command.
You can align along any of the six edge options,
or to center in X, Y, or Z.
Multiple Copies
These are commands that you can use to make
multiple copies of objects, either as a grid or in a
circular pattern.
Array
Menu: Draw / Array
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Location and direction of first copy
(relative to handle)
Point 2: Axis of Rows (relative to handle on the
original)
Point 3: Axis of Tiers (relative to handle on the
original)
To copy in a single direction or dimension, enter
the number of copies in Columns, and enter 1 for
Rows and Tiers. Set a point for the location of the
second copy of the object. (The first copy is the
original unless the Use Original as the First
Copy option is disabled.) The copy is positioned
so that the point that corresponds to the selection
handle on the original is located on that point.
Subsequent copies are placed at the same
direction and distance as the first point from the
selection handle of the original. In other words,
all copies are evenly spaced based on the spacing
of the first two copies.
To copy in two dimensions, enter the number of
columns and rows, leaving Tiers set to 1. Set a
point for the offset (the distance and direction) of
contact us at www.designcad.com
215
DesignCAD Reference Manual
copies in the first column. Then set a second point
for the offset of the columns themselves. For
example, you might want to set the first point to
the right of the selection handle, and the second
point directly below the selection handle.
To make a 3D array, add a number for tiers and
add a third point for the offset of each tier.
Use Original as the First Copy: Determines
whether or not the selection is used as the first
copy for the directions of the array. If disabled,
the first point set for the command determines the
position of the first copy of the array. This copy
and the subsequent array can be set far from the
original. The second point set for the command
determines the columns, the third determines the
rows, and the fourth determines the tiers.
Distance Type: Changes the way that distances
are determined for the array. When the 1,2,…
distance type is used, the distance between the
points set determine the distance between the first
and second copies of a given direction. When the
1,…,2 distance type is used, the distance between
the points set determine the distance between the
first and last copies of a given direction.
Specify Offsets/Distances: Lets you set the
distance from one copy to another in Drawing
Units. The points set then only dictate the
direction of the copies from the original. Enter the
offset distances for the copies in the appropriate
fields in the window.
Orientation: The alignment of the object to be
arrayed. For most of these choices to be used
properly, you must correctly place your handles.
Imagine the object you are copying is a man. The
first handle is the man's feet. The second handle
is the direction he is facing. The third handle is his
216
head. His feet always touch the curve. His head is
always in the "up" direction relative to the plane
of the curve. He can walk forward or backward
along the curve, or he can step along the curve
sideways while facing to the left or the right of the
curve. He can also slide along the curve while
always maintaining his original orientation.
NOTE: The curve's sense of "up" is calculated once for
the entire curve; it is not evaluated separately at each
point on the curve, so curves that do not lie in a plane
may give unexpected results. Also, it may sometimes
go in an unexpected direction. What you expected to
be "up" might in fact be "down." Be prepared to change
your selection handles accordingly if you get
unexpected results.
• Original: Maintains the orientation of the
original object, regardless of which direction
the curve twists and turns. For this
orientation, only the first selection handle is
used; the copied object is never rotated.
• Forward, Backward: The object along the
curve so that it is always "facing" in a
forward or backward direction along the
curve. Objects rotate as they move along the
curve to maintain their forward/backward
orientation relative to the curve.
• Left, Right: Moves each copy along the
curve so that it is "facing" to the left or right
of the curve's direction of travel.
• Perpendicular:
Treats
the
handles
differently than other options. For this
option, the plane created by the selection
handles is always rotated to be perpendicular
to the curve's direction of travel. This option
gives the user very little control over the
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
final orientation of the copy, and is retained
for backward compatibility with older
versions of DesignCAD.
Array Along a Curve: Curve arrays always start
with a fresh copy of the selected object, so the
Use Original as the First Copy option is
disabled. Set the number of copies to be drawn
along the curve in the Columns field and set a
point on the curve the array is to be drawn along.
The easiest way to set the point on the curve for
the array is to use the Gravity command to snap
to one of the endpoints of the curve.
Scale: Specify the starting and ending scales for
the arrayed object(s). Intermediate objects are
scaled smoothly between the starting and ending
scales.
along the curve. The end of the curve that
designated as the beginning is determined by the
direction travel.
Example: Make two columns, two rows, and
two tiers of a box.
Select the box and choose the Array command.
Enter 2 for each direction (Columns, Rows, and
Tiers). Set a point directly to the right of the
selection handle, and a second point above it.
Finally, set a point on the third axis, away from
the handle on the original box. The box will be
duplicated in a 2 x 2 x 2 formation.
Angle: If arraying along a curve, and an
orientation of Forward, Backward, Left, or
Right has been chosen, the selected object can
also be rotated about the direction of travel. This
lets the array spin around the curve. The start
angle is how much the imaginary man is leaning
relative to "up" when he first starts his walk along
the curve. The end angle is how much he is
leaning at the end of his walk. Intermediate copies
are tilted proportionately.
Offset Along a Curve: If the Specify
Offsets/Distances and Array Along a Curve
options are both enabled, this option can be
enabled and used to determine the distance from
the beginning of the curve to the first copy in the
array. Two points need to be set on the curve when
this option is used. The first point specifies the
curve to be used for the array. The second point
determines the direction of travel of the array
contact us at www.designcad.com
217
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Circular Array
Menu: Draw / Circular Array
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Center of rotation
Point 2: Axis of revolution (Used only with
Two-Point Axis mode)
Copies a selected object a specified number of
times in a circular pattern.
Using the Command
Select the object to copy, then choose the
Circular Array command. The following
window appears:
uses that line as the axis of rotation. The other
options will use your first point as the location of
the axis.
Number of Copies: The total number of copies,
including the original.
Span Angle: The angle in which the copies are to
be placed. For example, you can use 360° to copy
an object in a complete circle, such as the bolts on
a wheel. You can use 180° to copy in a semicircle.
Vertical Offset: This is the distance along the
axis of revolution between the first copy and the
last copy. The offset can be used to copy objects
in a spiral. To make a spiral with more than one
revolution, use a span angle of more than 360°.
For example, to make a spiral with two complete
revolutions, you can enter 720° for the span
angle. Remember, the number of copies and the
offset are the total for the entire operation, not just
one revolution.
Vertical Offset Velocity: The ratio between the
initial pitch of the offset and the final pitch of the
offset. If a value of 5 is used, the final pitch will
be 5 times greater than the initial pitch. If a value
of 0 or 1 is used, the pitch will remain constant.
Axis: The axis of revolution. You can set the
rotation along the X, Y, or Z axis, an axis defined
by two points, or one defined by an existing line.
Only the About 2Point option requires you to set
a second point. With the About a Line option you
set a point on an existing line and the command
218
Radius Ratio: The distance from the selection
handle to the axis, used for the array radius at the
beginning of the array. The final radius for the
array equals the beginning array radius multiplied
by the Radius Ratio. If a value of 1 is used, the
radius stays the same throughout the array. If a
value greater than 1 is used, the distance from the
axis to the duplicated items increases throughout
the array. If a value less than 1 is used, the
distance from the axis to the duplicated items
decreases throughout the array.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Keep Perpendicular: The copies will rotate with
the array. If disabled, the copies will still be
copied in a circular pattern, but they will maintain
the same orientation as the original.
Example: Copy an object 10 times in a circular
pattern.
Select the object you want to copy. Next, choose
the Circular Array command. Enter the
following settings: Number of Copies = 10,
Span Angle = 360, Vertical Offset = 0.
Use the About 2 Points option. Set a point a few
inches below the object for the center of rotation
and another, offset from the first, for the axis of
revolution. It may help to think of this as
swinging a ball on a string: The selection handle
is where the string is connected to the ball, the
center of rotation (Point 1) is where your hand
holds the string, and the axis of revolution (Point
2) is the direction of your arm.
Trimming and Extending
This section covers all the commands used for
trimming objects with respect to other objects.
The edited object is either trimmed at the
trimming object, or extended to meet the
trimming object.
NOTE: In 2D Mode, the Trim commands ignore the 3D
aspects of any existing lines, and treat them as flat
projections onto the XY plane. This means you can trim
lines that would never meet in 3D space against each
other's Front-View projections in 2D space. This is a
powerful feature, but you must pay careful attention to
what you are doing.
Trim One Line
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Trim One Line
Shortcut Key: E
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Line to be trimmed
Point 2: Line to trim against
Trim (or extends) a line to its intersection with
another line. This command also works with
curves and arcs.
contact us at www.designcad.com
219
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Choose the Trim One Line command. Click
Trim Shorter End if you want to trim the
shortest end of the line. Otherwise, the part of the
line that you click is kept, and the other part is
removed.
Set a point on the line to be trimmed and a point
on the line to be trimmed against. The first line is
cut off at its intersection with the second. If the
first line does not intersect the second, it is
extended until they meet.
Trims (or extends) two lines at their intersection,
forming a clean corner with no overlap. This
command trims lines, curves, and arc entities.
Using the Command
Select the Trim Two Lines command. Click
Trim Shorter End if you want to trim the
shortest ends of each line. Otherwise, the part of
the line that you click is kept, and the other part is
removed.
Set a point on each line to be trimmed. The lines
will be trimmed at their intersection. If the lines
do not intersect, they will be extended to the point
of intersection.
NOTE: If you are in 2D Mode, you can trim two lines
that don’t intersect by trimming their projections on the
XY plane.
Trim Two Lines
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Trim Two Lines
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+E
NOTE: If you are in 2D Mode, you can trim two lines
that don’t intersect by trimming their projections on the
XY plane.
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: First line to be trimmed
Point 2: Second line to be trimmed
220
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Trim Between Two Lines
Trim Double Lines
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Trim Between Two
Lines
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Trim Double Lines
Toolbox Icon:
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Line to be trimmed
Point 2: First intersecting line
Point 3: Second intersecting line
Removes a segment of a line between its
intersections with two other lines.
Using the Command
Choose the Trim Between Two Lines and set a
point on the line to be trimmed. Set a point on the
first intersecting line. Set a point on the second
intersecting line. The line is trimmed between the
other two lines.
Point 1: Corner of area containing lines to be
trimmed
Point 2: Opposite corner of area containing lines
to be trimmed
Trims two sets of double lines at their
intersection. See Double Line Mode.
Using the Command
Choose the Trim Double Lines command. Set a
point in the corner of the area containing the lines
to be trimmed. Set a point in the opposite corner.
The two sets of lines will be trimmed to their
intersection. Depending on the configuration of
the lines, they will be trimmed to a "+," a "T," or
an "L" shape.
NOTE: In 3D mode, all the lines must lie in the same
plane for this command to trim them. In 2D Mode, the
command will trim the lines along their XY projections.
contact us at www.designcad.com
221
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Trim Multiple Lines
Extend
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Trim Multiple Lines
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Extend
Point 1-n: Lines to be trimmed
Point 1: Endpoint
Point n+1: Line to trim against
Point 2: New Location
Trims multiple lines at their intersection with
another line. This command trims arc, curve, and
lines.
Toolbox Icon:
Using the Command
Select the Trim Multiple Lines command. Click
Trim Shorter End if you want to trim the
shortest end of each line. Otherwise, the part of
the line that you click is kept, and the other part is
removed.
Extends or shortens a line by moving one of the
points defining the end of the line.
Using the Command
Choose the Extend command and set a point on
the endpoint to be extended. Move the cursor to
the new location for the endpoint.
Set a point on each line to be trimmed. Then set a
point on the line to trim against. Press Enter. The
lines will be cut off at their intersection with the
line on which the last point was set.
NOTE: If you are in 2D Mode, you can trim two lines
that don’t intersect by trimming their projections on the
XY plane.
222
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Extend by Distance
Using the Command
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Extend by Distance
Choose the Point Move command. Set a point
directly on a point in the drawing. Then set
another point at the location to which the first
point is to be moved. Every entity in the drawing
containing the first point will be redrawn using
the second point.
Point 1: Endpoint
Extends or shortens a line by moving one of the
points defining the end of the line a specified
linear distance, to a relative X coordinate, to a
relative Y coordinate, or to a relative Z
coordinate. The line maintains the same angle
after it has been extended.
Using the Command
Choose the Extend by Distance command and
enter the distance to be added to the line.
Join Endpoints
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Join Endpoints
Point 1: First corner of area to be joined
Point 2: Second corner of area to be joined
Specify whether the extension for the line is to be
measured along the line or with respect to the
X-Axis, the Y-Axis, or the Z-Axis Now, set a
point on the endpoint to be extended.
Point Move
Takes all of the points enclosed within a bounding
box and moves them to a single point at the
geometric center of the original endpoints. This
command works with lines, and curves, as well as
arcs drawn as lines.
Using the Command
Choose the Join Endpoints command.
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Point Move
Shortcut Key: * (asterisk)
Point 1: Set a point on the point to be moved
Point 2: Set a point for the new location of that
point
Moves a point in the drawing.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Join Endpoints Only: Joins only the endpoints
of the lines. Otherwise all the points included in
the bounding box will be joined.
223
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Drag a box around the endpoints of the lines to be
joined. Do not completely enclose the lines or
they will be reduced to a single, tiny point. The
bounding box should enclose only the points of
the lines you want to join, not the lines
themselves.
Chamfering / Filleting
These commands affect object corners. You can
round corners using Fillet tools or make angular
corners using Chamfer.
Chamfer
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Chamfer
NOTE: To chamfer the corner of a solid object, see Cut
Corner or Slice.
Using the Command
Choose the Chamfer command. Enter the
chamfer depths for both sides of the corner, or
enter one distance and Angle..
Leave Original Line/Plane: Draws the chamfer
but leaves the lines that formed the corner.
Set a point on one of the lines to be chamfered,
then a point on the other. If the lines are not
connected, DesignCAD extends them as needed.
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+F
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: One of the lines on the corner to be
chamfered
Point 2: The other side of the corner
Cuts a segment off a corner and replaces the
corner with a flat face of specified depth. This
command works on 2D line or plane entities.
224
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Fillet
Fillet Corner
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Fillet
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Fillet Corner
Shortcut Key: F
Toolbox Icon:
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Corner to be filleted
Point 1: A point on one of the lines to be filleted
Rounds rectangular corners of solids.
Point 2: A point on the second line to be filleted
Using the Command
Rounds a corner of a plane or two lines.
Choose the Fillet Corner command and specify
the radius and number of facets.
Using the Command
Choose the Fillet command and enter the fillet
radius.
Then set a point on the corner to be filleted.
Leave Original Line/Plane: Draws the fillet but
leaves the lines that formed the corner.
Set a point on one of the lines to be filleted, then
a point on the other. If the lines are not connected,
DesignCAD extends them as needed.
NOTE: You cannot use this command to round a corner
where more than three faces meet, such as the point of
a cone.
contact us at www.designcad.com
225
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Fillet Edge
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Fillet Edge
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: Edge to be filleted
Rounds off rectangular edges of solid objects.
You may specify the number of facets for the
rounded edge and the radius for each end of the
edge to be filleted.
Using the Command
Choose the Fillet Edge command. Enter the
radius for the start and end of the edge, and
number of facets, in the window.
Set a point on the edge (not at a corner) you want
to fillet.
226
NOTE: This command requires sharp edges. Once you
have filleted an edge of a cube, for example, the
adjacent edges no longer meet at a flat face but at a
curved surface. So the edges adjacent to a filleted
edge cannot also be filleted.
Cut Corner
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Cut Corner
Point 1: Corner to be cut
Cuts a portion off of the corner of a solid and
replaces the corner with a flat face at a specified
depth.
Using the Command
Choose the Cut Corner command. In the Radius
field, enter the depth - the distance from the
corner along all of the edges that form the corner
- to the flat surface.
Set a point on the corner. The corner is cut off to
the specified depth, or radius.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Cut Edge
Dividing Entities
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Cut Edge
These commands are used for breaking entities
into sets of smaller entities.
Point 1: Edge to be cut
Cuts a portion off of the edge of a solid
(chamfering the edge) and replaces the edge with
a flat face at a specified depth.
Using the Command
Choose the Cut Edge command. In the Radius
field, enter the depth - the distance from the edge
along the two surfaces that form the edge - to the
flat surface.
Segment
Menu: Edit / Trim/Extend / Segment
Point 1: Line or curve to be segmented
Divides a line or curve into specified segment
lengths or a specified number of segments of
equal length. Curves will automatically be
subjected to Vector Convert (see Vector
Convert) before being segmented.
Using the Command
Set a point on the edge. The edge is chamfered to
the specified depth, or radius.
Choose the Segment command and enter the
values in the window:
Number of Section: The number of segments.
Specify Distance: The Segment command can
also divide the line or curve into segments of a
specified length. If this is checked, the window
will have the following options:
contact us at www.designcad.com
227
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Remove Leftovers: Any bits of the line or curve
that are shorter than the desired length are
removed from the ends.
Set Cutting Point and Direction: Specify an
exact point on the line or curve which should be
the start of a segment, and an optional second
point for the direction to cut. If only one point is
set, the entire line or curve is broken into
segments of the desired length, with cuts running
in both directions from the point set. If the second
point is set, only part of the line is cut into
segments, beginning at point 1 and running in the
direction of point 2. The remainder of the line on
the other side of point 1 is left intact.
so make a copy if necessary. If you forget, you
can Undo the command, copy the line, and re-cut
the plane.
NOTE: To erase the cut lines that remain after this
command, see Hidden Edge and Hidden Edge by
Section.
Set a point on the line or curve to be segmented.
The object is broken into the requested number of
sections or section lengths.
Converting Entities
Cut Plane
Make Plane
Menu: Edit / Cut Plane
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Make Plane
Point 1: Cutting line
Converts lines, curves, circles, and arcs into a
plane. Planes can be shaded, whereas lines,
circles, and arcs cannot.
Point 2: Plane to be cut
Slices a plane into two or more pieces along a
line.
These commands are used to convert entities of
one type to another type.
Using the Command
Using the Command
The Cut Plane command requires a plane to cut
and a line to cut it with. Choose the Cut Plane
command and set a point on the cutting line, and
then a point on the plane to be cut. The cutting
line, or part of it, is erased during this command,
228
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Select the line or lines to be converted to a plane.
The selected lines should all form a flat surface,
and have common endpoints.
Line to Curve
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Line to Curve
Converts all selected lines to curves, using the
vertices of the lines as defining points for the
curves.
Using the Command
Select the line to convert. Choose the Line To
Curve command. The line is converted to a curve.
Weld
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Weld
Curve to Line
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Curve to Line
Changes a curve entity into a line using the same
points as those that defined the curve.
Using the Command
Select the curve that you wish to convert to a line.
Choose the Curve to Line command. The
selected curve is changed to a line.
Combines the area of two or more closed objects
that are not solids. These objects must touch or
overlap. The combined area may then be
manipulated as if it had been drawn that way.
Using the Command
Select the entities to be welded together. Choose
the Weld command. The area of the objects is
combined, and any lines that separated the objects
are deleted.
Explode
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Explode
Converts any selected composite objects into
separate entities. This command affects grids,
dimensions, and symbols. Afterwards, the parts
of the former composite objects can be
manipulated individually.
contact us at www.designcad.com
229
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Symbols are broken apart into separate drawing
entities, just as if they had been drawn originally
right in the current drawing. Grids are converted
into planes, and planes are converted to vectors.
Dimensions are converted into text, vectors, and
arrows.
If a group is selected when the Explode
command is chosen, objects in the group will be
exploded as if they were not a part of a group, but
the group will remain intact. To select individual
entities, it will be necessary to use the Group
Explode (see Group Explode) command to
explode the group. To explode a group so
individual objects may be selected, but still
remain composite objects, use Group Explode
instead of Explode.
Using the Command
Select the object(s) to be exploded and choose the
Explode command.
Select the circle you want to convert to vectors
and choose Vector Convert. DesignCAD
automatically converts the entity to vectors.
Although the entity does not change appearance,
you can see the effect of conversion to vectors by
choosing Point Select Mode and selecting the
entity.
Text Convert
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Text Convert
Converts selected 2D text to 3D text and vice
versa.
Vector Convert
Using the Command
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Vector Convert
Draw some 2D text using the Text command (see
Text) with the Draw as 2D Text option selected.
Select the 2D text. Now select the Text Convert
command. The selected 2D text is changed to 3D
text. Leave the text (now three-dimensional)
selected. Select the Text Convert command
again; the 3D text is converted back to 2D text.
Point 1-n: Entities to be changed to line entities
Converts selected entities such as arcs, circles,
curves, and planes to vector entities.
Using the Command
Select the entity to be converted and choose
Vector Convert. The entity is converted to a
series of vectors, or short line segments. The new
entity has more points than the original but looks
the same.
Example: Convert a circle to vectors.
230
Double Line to Plane
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Double Line to
Plane
Converts double-line entities into planes
(surfaces). Planes can be shaded, whereas double
lines, circles, and arcs cannot. See Double Line
Mode.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Using the Command
Using the Command
Select the double line entity to be converted to a
plane. Select the Double Line to Plane
command. The double line entity is converted to
a plane.
Choose the Polygon Add command. Set a point
on the two polygons to be added together. The
polygons are combined into a single polygon, and
the boundaries "internal" to the resulting polygon
are removed.
Double Line to Wide Line
Edit / Selection Edit / Convert / Double Line to
Wide Line
Converts double-line entities into wide lines. See
Double Line Mode.
Using the Command
Select the double line entity to be converted to a
wide line. Select the Double Line to Wide Line
command. The double line entity is converted to
a wide line.
NOTE: Regardless of which alignment was used when
creating the double line, DesignCAD has to use these
points to create a center-aligned wide line. This can
cause the appearance of the resulting wide line to vary
slightly from the original double line.
2D Boolean Operations
These are combination commands that are used
on closed 2D objects, or 2D planes.
Polygon Add
NOTE: For best results, the polygons should overlap,
rather than meet exactly at an edge or point.
To combine more than two polygons, select the
polygons first and then select the Polygon Add
command. Click Use Selected Objects.
Polygon Subtract
Menu: Edit / Polygon Edit / Polygon Subtract
Point 1: Polygon to be removed (template)
Point 2: Polygon to be subtracted from
Removes one or more polygons from another
polygon.
Menu: Edit / Polygon Edit / Polygon Add
Point 1: First Polygon
Point 2: Polygon to be added to first
Adds two or more polygons together and
eliminates the overlapping edges.
contact us at www.designcad.com
231
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Using the Command
Using the Command
Choose the Polygon Subtract command and set
a point on the polygon to be subtracted. Set a
second point on the polygon to be subtracted
from. The first polygon is removed from the
second polygon.
Choose the Polygon Intersect command. Set a
point on each of the intersecting polygons. The
overlapping area remains.
Polygon Exclusive Or
To subtract more than one polygon, select the
polygons that you want to subtract first. Then
choose the Polygon Subtract command and click
on the target polygon.
Menu: Edit / Polygon Edit / Polygon Exclusive
Or
NOTE: To erase the cut lines that remain after this
command, see Hidden Edge and Hidden Edge by
Section.
Subtracts the area in common between two
polygons. If a portion or portions of both of the
polygons remain, the portions are still recognized
as a part of their original polygon.
Point 1: First polygon
Point 2: Second polygon
Using the Command
Polygon Intersect
Menu: Edit / Polygon Edit / Polygon Intersect
Point 1: First polygon
Point 2: Second polygon
Removes all parts of two overlapping polygons
except the part that both polygons share. This part
forms a new polygon.
232
Choose the Polygon Exclusive Or command. Set
a point on each of the polygons. The common
area between the two polygons is removed. The
only portions that remain are portions that were
exclusive to one or the other of the two original
polygons.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Section Edit
These are editing commands that are performed
on a selected section of the drawing.
Stretch
For instance, if you move the fourth point 10
Drawing Units along the X axis from the third
point, then all points in the stretch region will be
moved 10 Drawing Units along the X axis.
Menu: Edit / Section Edit / Stretch
Point 1: 1st corner of area to be stretched
Point 2: 2nd corner of area to be stretched
Point 3: Reference point
Point 4: Stretched position of reference point
Section Delete
Stretches a section of a drawing from one location
to another.
Menu: Edit / Section Edit / Section Delete
Using the Command
Point 1: First corner of the section to be deleted
Choose the Stretch command. You can choose to
use a 2D selection box or a 3D selection box.
Point 2: Opposite corner of the section to be
deleted
Shortcut Key: D
Deletes a section of the drawing. A section is a 3D
box defined by two points in opposite corners.
This command is useful for cutting doorways and
windows out of walls.
The 3D selection box allows you to be more
specific when you stretch 3D objects. For
instance, you can use a 3D selection box to
specify just the front left corner of a box.
Four points are used with the command. The first
two points define a 2D or 3D bounding box that
contains the part of the drawing to be stretched.
The third and fourth points determine the
direction and distance that part of the drawing
will be stretched.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Using the Command
Choose the Section Delete command. Define the
section by setting two points in opposite corners
of a 3D box. (If DesignCAD is in 2D Mode, a 2D
box is used.) Drawing entities within the section
are deleted from the drawing. An entity partly
inside the box is cut off, and only the part inside
the box is erased.
Example:
cylinder.
Erase a rectangular section of a
233
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Select the Section Delete command. Set the
points of the bounding box so that part of the
cylinder is enclosed in it. The cylinder will be
redrawn without the section that was inside the
bounding box.
Select the Section Cutoff command. Set the
points for the cutoff box so that a section of the
circle is inside the box. After the cutoff box
disappears, place the cursor on the section of the
circle that was inside the box and click the left
mouse button to select it. Notice that only the
section is highlighted. This is because it has been
redefined as a separate entity. You can manipulate
it using any command without affecting the rest
of the circle.
Section Cut by Line
Section Cutoff
Point 1: One corner of the cutoff box
Point 2: Opposite corner of the cutoff box
Cuts off a section of the drawing that intersects a
3D box. It essentially separates everything inside
the box from everything outside the box by
cutting planes and breaking lines. Even though
the drawing looks the same after the Cutoff
command, any entity crossing the cutoff box will
be cut off.
Menu: Edit / Section Edit / Section Cut by Line
Point 1: Cutting line
Cuts all 2D entities at all of their intersections
with a cutting line. This command is only
available in 2D Mode.
Using the Command
Choose the Section Cut by Line command and
the following window appears:
It is convenient to use this command to cut out a
section of an object so it can be moved or deleted.
Using the Command
After choosing the Section Cutoff command,
define the section by setting two points in
opposite corners of a 3D box. (If DesignCAD is
in 2D Mode, a 2D box is used.) Any part of the
drawing that crosses the cutoff box boundary will
be cut off at the intersection.
Example: Convert a circle into two separate
entities.
234
To cut only selected entities, click Selected
Entities Only.
To cut using the cutting line and any lines that are
connected to to it by their endpoints, click Enable
Smart Cutting Line.
Set a point on a line. This line is recognized as the
cutting line. All entities that intersect the cutting
line are cut at all intersections with it.
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
If the cutting line forms a closed entity (e.g., a
closed box constructed of one or more lines), an
additional window will appear. This window
contains options for deleting and selecting
portions of the cut entities.
Line Distance
Menu: Dimension / Info / Line Distance
Point 1: First line
Point 2: Second line
Measures the shortest distance between two lines.
Using the Command
Select the Line Distance command and set points
on the two lines to be measured. The shortest
distance between the lines will be displayed on
the screen.
Select the desired settings and click OK.
Measuring
These commands can be used to take
measurements of entities on your drawing.
NOTE: If you want to include measurements on the
drawing itself, see Dimensions.
If you want to include a measurement in the
drawing, without creating a dimension, you can
use the Text command. When the measurement
calculation appears in the window, select it and
Copy it (Ctrl+C). Then choose the Text
command (see Text) and Paste (Ctrl+V) the text
into the Text window.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Area
Menu: Dimension / Info / Area
Points 1-n: Determine the area to be calculated
Calculates the area of selected object or the area
within a closed area defined by points.
Using the Command
If you want to calculate the area of a selected
object, select it first. Select the Area command. If
an object is selected, you will see this window:
235
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Area of Selected Objects: Calculates the area of
any selected objects. Overlapping regions are not
subtracted from the total area. If not selected, you
can select the object after choosing the Area
command.
Enable Connected Lines Detection: Calculated
area between selected lines that are connected.
Check this option and then check Area of
Selected Objects.
If no objects are selected, just set points around
the area you want to measure. The points will be
connected with a temporary line. Press Enter
when you have set all of the points. The area of
the shape will be calculated and displayed in
drawing units.
Measures the bearings between two points. The
bearing text is automatically inserted into the
drawing.
Using the Command
Choose the Bearing command and set a point at
one end of the distance to be measured. Set a
second point at the opposite end of the distance.
The bearing text is placed in the text box of the
window and a rubber-band box appears at the text
insertion point.
Reverse Text: If you are measuring from right to
left, the text will be inserted upside-down.
Checking this option will insert it rightside-up.
Click the Options button to change properties of
the bearing text.
Precision: Controls how many digits appear after
the decimal point.
Show Results in Acres: Calculates the area in
acres instead of the drawing units.
Bearing
Menu: Dimension / Info / Bearing
Point 1: First point of the distance to be measured
Point 2: Second point of the distance to be
measured
Point 3: Insertion point for the text
236
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
Angle & Distance between
Points
Menu: Dimension / Info / Angle & Distance
between Points
Toolbox Icon:
Point 1: First point of the measurement
Point 2: Second point of the measurement
Calculates the angle and distance between two
points.
Using the Command
Position the rubber-band box where you want the
text and set a location point.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Choose the Angle & Distance between Points
command. Set two points for the angle and
distance to be measured. The results appear in a
window:
237
DesignCAD Reference Manual
XYZ Coordinate System
When the XYZ Coordinate System is used, this
command uses the location of the first point as the
origin for the angular measurements.
Y Angle: The angle from the Y-Axis to the
second point.
Distance: The linear distance between the two
points.
Z Angle: The angle from the Z-Axis to the
second point.
X Angle: The angle from the X-Axis to the
second point.
Sphere Coordinate System
Distance: The linear distance between the two
points.
XY Angle: The angle from Point 1 to Point 2
relative to the XY Plane. In other words, if the XY
plane were a projector screen, and the front view
238
For updates and additional information,
Editing and Measuring
of the drawing was projected on to that screen, the
angle would be measured from Point 1 to Point 2
on the screen.
Using the Command
Choose the Angle between Two Lines
command. Set a point on the first line of the angle
to be measured. Set a point on the second line.
The result is displayed in the window.
Format: Determine how you want the angle
displayed.
Z Angle: :The angle from the Z-Axis to the
second point.
Precision: Controls how many digits appear after
the decimal point.
Surface Area
Menu: Dimension / Info / Surface Area
Point 1: Object for which surface area is to be
calculated
Calculates the surface area of an object.
Angle between Two Lines
Using the Command
Menu: Dimension / Info / Angle between Two
Lines
Choose the Surface Area command and set a
point on the object for which you want
DesignCAD to calculate the surface area. The
calculation is displayed in the window.
Point 1: The first line of the angle to be measured
Point 2: The second line of the angle to be
measured
Measures the angle between two non-parallel
lines and displays the result.
contact us at www.designcad.com
239
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Precision: Controls how many digits appear after
the decimal point.
NOTE: For a 3D solid, the Volume command
calculates both surface area and volume.
Volume
Menu: Dimension / Info / Volume
Point 1: Object for which to calculate volume
Calculates the volume and surface area of a Solid
object.
Using the Command
Choose the Volume command, and then set a
point on the Solid. The calculation is displayed in
the window.
Precision: Controls how many digits appear after
the decimal point.
240
For updates and additional information,
7
Groups, Blocks, and Symbols
Groups
Blocks
A group is a set of entities that act as one entity.
A block is a set of entities that act as one entity.
They are different than groups in that each
instance of a group refers to the same embedded
entity; adding multiple blocks does not greatly
increase file size. Blocks are internal to the
drawing, whereas symbols are linked externally.
Group Define
Menu: Tools / Group Define
Puts all of the currently selected drawing entities
into one group. The next time you select any part
of the group, the entire group is selected. You can
have many different groups defined in a drawing.
Group Define makes it easy to keep related items
together for copying, moving, scaling, and other
operations.
Using the Command
Select all the objects you want to include in a
group, and choose the Group Define command.
DesignCAD treats the objects as a group and
continues that way until the objects are
ungrouped with the Group Explode command.
symbols are linked to the file externally. Groups
are embedded in the drawing, and if you use
multiple copies of a group, each instance
increases the file size.
Block Define
Menu: Tools / Block Define
Group Explode
Puts all of the currently selected drawing entities
into one group. The next time you select any part
of the block, the entire block is selected. Blocks
behave in much the same way that symbols do.
The main advantage of blocks is that you don't
have to save an external file.
Menu: Tools / Group Explode
Using the Command
Breaks up the currently selected group so that its
members become single entities and can again be
selected individually. Drawing entities are not
affected except that they lose their association
with the group.
Select all of the objects you want to include in a
block and choose the Block Define command.
The following window appears.
Using the Command
With the group selected, choose the Group
Explode command.
Undo does not cancel the effect of Group
Explode. To restore group status, select all of the
members again and use the Group Define
command.
contact us at www.designcad.com
Enter a name for the block in the Name box.
241
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Select Covert to Block to define a block and
convert the selected entities to a block. Select
Retain to define a block but leave the selected
entities as the original entities. Select Delete to
define a block and delete the selected entities
from the drawing.
Choose the Block Insert command and the
following window appears:
Additional copies of the block can be added to the
drawing using the Block Insert command.
NOTE: Blocks can also be copied and pasted; the
difference is that pasted blocks will not prompt you for
new values for attribute definitions. Instead they will
use the values from the block that was copied to the
Clipboard.
An important difference between blocks and
symbols is that the visibility of a block's entities
depends on the visibility of each part's host layer;
therefore, a block can be drawn on different
layers so only part of it is visible. The visibility of
an entire symbol depends on the visibility status
of the layer where the symbol is inserted.
Block Insert
Menu: Tools / Block Insert
Point 1: Block placement
Point 2: Orientation and scaling (optional)
Point 3: Additional orientation (optional, only
used for a 3D block)
Inserts a block into the drawing. Blocks are
created using the Block Define command.
Blocks that are copied and pasted or inserted into
the drawing with Block Insert are defined as
single entities. That is, the entire block is selected,
moved, and erased as a single entity.
Select the name of the block you want to insert in
the drawing.
Explode: The components that make up the block
are inserted into the drawing as individual
entities. They may be selected and edited
separately, but they are no longer recognized as a
block.
Select After Insertion: The block is
automatically selected when it is added to the
drawing.
Use Original Color: The color of the inserted
block will be the same as the original. If this
option is unchecked, the current drawing color is
used.
Scale
• Specify On-screen: Set a second point that
controls the scale of the block when the
block is inserted in the drawing. If this
Using the Command
242
For updates and additional information,
Groups, Blocks, and Symbols
option is disabled, the scale of the block is
controlled by the values entered in the X, Y,
and Z boxes.
• Uniform Scale: Only the value in the X box
is enabled, and the values in the Y and Z
boxes will automatically be updated to
match the value entered in the X box. This
maintains the aspect ratio of the block.
Rotation: If Specify On-screen is enabled, you
can set a second point that controls the rotation
angle of the block when the block is inserted in
the drawing. If this option is disabled, the value
entered in the Angle box is used.
OK: Click this button to accept the current
options and start setting points to insert the block.
A rubber-band box appears in the drawing. This
shows the area of the block. Depending on the
options that have been selected, set one to three
points to establish the location, size, and
orientation of the block (the third point is only
available in 3D Mode). To accept the block's size
and orientation, set a point to establish the
location, and then press Enter.
layers so only part of it is visible. The visibility of
an entire symbol depends on the visibility status
of the layer where the symbol is inserted.
Purge Unused Blocks
Menu: Tools / Purge Unused Blocks
Removes unused block information from the
drawing file.
Symbols
A symbol is an externally linked file that is
inserted in the drawing. DesignCAD provides
you with a library of 2D and 3D symbols, and you
can create your own symbols by saving entities or
entire drawings as a symbol.
Drawing Handles
When you save a drawing with handles, you can
then load that drawing as as symbol. The handles
are used to place and orient (and optionally scale)
the symbol in its host drawing.
Set Drawing Handles
Menu: Point / Set Drawing Handles
Manipulating a Block
Point 1: First handle
A block must be exploded in order to change its
characteristics such as color, line style, etc. There
are two ways to explode a block: the Explode
option in the Block Insert window (before the
block is loaded); or use Edit / Selection Edit /
Explode.
Point 2: Second handle (optional)
An important difference between blocks and
symbols is that the visibility of a block's entities
depends on the visibility of each part's host layer;
therefore, a block can be drawn on different
contact us at www.designcad.com
Point 3: Third handle (optional)
Sets handles for the drawing. Use these handles to
help you manipulate a drawing when you merge
it with a new or existing drawing using the Load
Symbol command.
Using the Command
Select the Set Drawing Handles command. Set
one to three points in the drawing for the handles.
If you set fewer than three points, press Enter to
end the command.
243
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Next, choose File / Save As and rename the file
or File / Save and save it with the same name. The
drawing is saved with the handles in place. The
next time you merge the drawing into another one
using the Load Symbol command, you can
position the drawing using the handles you have
set.
Makes it easy to see the handle location for any
symbols or blocks that are present in the drawing.
The primary handle of each symbol will be shown
as a small red dot, the secondary handle (if any)
as a green dot, and the third handle as a blue dot.
Note that blocks only have one handle, shown as
a red dot.
Example: Attach a drawing of a wing to a
fuselage in another drawing.
Save As Symbol
Open the drawing of the wing. Choose the Set
Drawing Handles command. Set two points at
the base of the wing, where it will connect to the
fuselage. Press Enter.
Allows you to quickly and easily save a file, or
the selected part of a file, as a symbol with a
separate filename.
Next, use Save As to rename the file as
SETWING.DCD and click OK. When you merge
the wing into the drawing of the fuselage using
the Load Symbol command, you can attach the
wing precisely using the handles you have set and
the Gravity command.
Menu: File / Save as Symbol
Using the Command
If you want to save only selected entities, select
them and choose the Save as Symbol command.
The following window appears:
Remove Drawing Handles
Menu: Point / Remove Drawing Handles
Makes it easy to remove the existing drawing
handles from the drawing. Once the drawing
handles have been removed, the default handles
at lower left and lower right (and top right in 3D
Mode) will be used.
Show Drawing Handles
Menu: Point / Show Drawing Handles
Makes it easy to find the drawing handles for the
current drawing.
Show Symbol / Block Handles
Use Default Symbol Handles: If saving only the
selected entities to the symbol, the selection
handles will be used as the symbol handles. If the
entire file is being saved as a symbol, the drawing
Menu: Point / Show Symbol/Block Handles
244
For updates and additional information,
Groups, Blocks, and Symbols
handles will be used if there are any, or the lower
left and right corners of the drawing if no handles
have been set.
they are saved as part of the drawing or linked to
the drawing. That is, the entire symbol is selected,
moved, and erased as a single entity.
Set Points for the Symbol Handles: You will be
prompted to set up to two points as symbol
handles (up to three points in 3D mode)
An important difference between blocks and
symbols is that the visibility of a block's entities
depends on the visibility of each part's host layer;
therefore, a block can be drawn on different
layers so only part of it is visible. The visibility of
an entire symbol depends on the visibility status
of the layer where the symbol is inserted.
Save all the entities to layer zero: All entities
will be moved to Layer 0 in the symbol. This
affects the way the symbol is imported into
another drawing if it is exploded.
Save selected entities only: Only the selected
entities will be saved to the symbol file, and the
selection handles will be used as Default Symbol
Handles. Otherwise, the entire file is saved, and
the drawing's handles will be used as Default
Symbol Handles.
Using the Command
Choose the Load Symbol command and the
Open window appears. From the file list, select
the name of the symbol you want to load. Select
the desired options. Then click the Open button.
If you want to save the entire drawing as a
symbol, simply choose the Save as Symbol
command. DesignCAD will ask you to specify
the name and DesignCAD version of the symbol
file.
Load Symbol
Menu: File / Load Symbol
Shortcut Key: Ctrl+F9
Point 1: First handle for symbol placement
Point 2: Second symbol handle (optional)
Point 3: Third handle (optional, only used for a
3D drawing or symbol)
Loads a drawing symbol or merges an existing
drawing with the current drawing. Symbols
inserted into the drawing with the Load Symbol
command are defined as single entities, whether
contact us at www.designcad.com
A rubber-band box appears in the drawing. This
shows the area of the symbol. Set one to two
points to establish the location, size, and
orientation of the symbol. To accept the symbol's
size and orientation, set a point to establish the
location, and then press Enter.
Load file as block: Loads a block from an
external file, and adds the block definition to the
list of defined blocks.
245
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Load file reference only: The contents of the
symbol is not added to the drawing's data, but
must always be loaded from the external file.
A copy of the drawing information for the symbol
is placed into the drawing instead of an insertion
entity.
Load as original entities: Think of this as "Paste
From File" or "Merge". The entities from the
selected drawing are added to the current drawing
(possibly scaled and repositioned). Entities in
Layer 0 of the selected drawing may be moved to
the current layer, depending on the "Merge Layer
0 items onto the current layer" setting in Options
-> Preferences. Entities from any other layers are
placed in their original layers in the current
drawing.
When a non-referenced symbol is exploded with
the Explode option or command, there is no
change to the drawing unless it contains multiple
copies of the same symbol. If several,
non-referenced copies of a symbol exist in the
same drawing, they share drawing information
even though that drawing information is
contained in the drawing file that contains the
symbols (not an external drawing file). In order to
manipulate one of the copies of the symbol, it
must be exploded so that it will have its own set
of drawing information.
Load and explode: Loads the drawing as a
symbol, then explodes it. The results of this
option are affected by the Symbol Explode
Settings in the Preferences (see Preferences).
Select object when created: If checked, the
loaded symbol/block/entities are selected after
being loaded into the current drawing.
If the Group Object when Created option in the
General options (see General Options) is
enabled, the symbol will still be recognized as a
group once it has been exploded. This way it is
not necessary to select many small items just to
change the color, line style, etc. of the former
symbol. The Group Explode command may then
be used if individual items need to be
manipulated.
Manipulating a Symbol
Symbol Library
A symbol must be exploded in order to change its
characteristics such as color, line style, etc. There
are two ways to explode a symbol: the Load and
Explode option in the Load Symbol window
(before the symbol is loaded); or use Edit /
Selection Edit / Convert (after the symbol is
loaded).
Menu: File / Symbol Library
Use original scale: Controls whether the loaded
entities can be dynamically rescaled as they are
being loaded.
Works like the Load Symbol command, but it
brings up a window that shows small preview
images, or "thumbnails," of the symbols that are
available in the different symbols libraries that
come with DesignCAD.
When a referenced symbol is exploded with the
Explode command, the symbol file is not read
from an external file when the drawing is loaded.
246
For updates and additional information,
Groups, Blocks, and Symbols
Symbol command, load the block and attribute
definition drawing you just saved, making sure
that the Load as Block option is enabled.
The block will still be recognized as a block.
When additional copies are placed using the
Block Insert command, the attribute definition
will function just like it did in the original
drawing.
Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window
to scroll through the various symbols. Click the
tabs or use the scroll bar at the top of the window
(just under the title bar) to switch libraries.
DesignCAD allows you to view the DesignCAD
files contained in a directory and all of the
DesignCAD files in one layer of subdirectories of
that directory. To view a different set of symbols
click on the tab with a folder symbol on it. The
Path window opens. Select a new folder and click
OK.
Load as Block: Loads the symbol so it will be
recognized as a block. Once the symbol has been
loaded as a block, additional copies can be added
to the drawing using the Block Insert command.
This option makes it easy to use a block/attribute
definition combination that you use frequently in
other drawings. Just create a drawing that
contains only the block and its attribute
definition. Save the drawing. Open the file in
which you want to use the block. Using the Load
contact us at www.designcad.com
Load as Embedded Symbol, Load as Linked
Symbol: Determines whether the drawing being
added or merged with the current drawing will be
saved as a part of the drawing, or just linked by a
reference. If the symbol is saved as part of the
current drawing, the file size will be larger, and
the drawing will not be updated when the symbol
file is modified. The advantage is that the drawing
will not be affected if the symbol file is deleted,
or the drawing is opened on a computer that
doesn't have a copy of the symbol file.
If the box is checked, the program adds an
"insertion entity" to the drawing file. The symbol
file is read every time the drawing is loaded. The
symbol file must be present and in its original
location. If the symbol file is modified, the
change will be reflected in all the drawings using
that symbol.
Load as Original Entities: Entities are added
and embedded as individual entities, not grouped
as one symbol.
Load and Explode: When a referenced symbol is
exploded, the symbol file is not read from disk
when the drawing is loaded. A copy of the symbol
is placed into the drawing instead of an insertion
entity, just like a symbol that was loaded without
using the Load File Reference Only option.
247
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Select When Created: The symbol is
automatically selected when it is added to the
drawing.
Choose the Door command, and the following
window appears.
Placing a Symbol in Your
Drawing
When you find the symbol that you want to use,
there are two different methods for bringing it
into the drawing:
1.
Move the cursor over the desired symbol,
press and hold the left mouse button, drag
the cursor to the desired location in your
drawing, position the cursor and click the
mouse button to drop the symbol into the
drawing;
or,
2.
Move the cursor over the desired symbol,
double-click the left mouse button, move the
cursor to the desired location in your
drawing, and click the left mouse button
again to drop the symbol into the drawing.
Door and Window Symbols
DesignCAD provides some standard architectural
symbols for doors and windows.
Door
Menu: Draw / Door
Point 1: Location of the center of the door or one
end of the door
Select the desired door size and type from the list
box. If you choose Custom Door or Custom
Sliding Door, specify the size in the Size box. By
default, the door size appears in the Remark box
unless Custom is selected. However, any
information can be entered in the Remark box to
be inserted into the drawing with the door. Check
the Center Align box to align the door by the
center or uncheck it to align the door by one end.
Check the Middle Align box to align the door in
the middle of a double line.
Set the first point for the door. A rubber-band
door appears, showing how the door would look
with the second point set at the current cursor
location. When the door is positioned to your
liking, set the second point. The Line or Double
Line into which the door is placed will
automatically be cut and capped.
Window
Point 2: Orientation of the door
Menu: Draw / Window
Inserts a standard architectural symbol for a door.
Point 1: Location of the center of the window or
one end of the window
Using the Command
248
Point 2: Placement of dimension text and
orientation of the window, if necessary
For updates and additional information,
Groups, Blocks, and Symbols
Inserts a standard architectural symbol for a
window.
Using the Command
Choose the Window command, and the
following window appears:
Select the desired window size, or Custom, from
the list box. If you choose the Custom option,
enter the size in the Size box. By default, the
window size appears in the Remark box unless
Custom is selected. However, any information
can be entered in the Remark box to be inserted
into the drawing with the window. The Thickness
is 0.50 by default. Change the Thickness if
desired. Check the Center Align box to align the
window by the center or uncheck it to align the
window by one end.
Set the first point for the window. A rubber-band
window appears. A rubber-band window appears,
showing how the window would look with the
second point set at the current cursor location.
When the window is positioned to your liking, set
the second point. The Line or Double Line into
which the window is placed will automatically be
cut and capped.
contact us at www.designcad.com
249
DesignCAD Reference Manual
250
For updates and additional information,
Appendix A
Custom Hatch Patterns and Line Styles
Custom Line Styles
Menu: Option / Custom LineStyle
Hacking Custom Line
Styles
Some of the line styles used by DesignCAD are
found in the DCLSTYLE.SYS file located in the
DesignCAD directory. You can create your own
custom line styles for use in DesignCAD by
adding them to this file. The file
DCLSTYLE.SYS is an ASCII file that can be
edited with a text editor or a word processor in
ASCII mode. Be sure you have a second copy of
the file DCLSTYLE.SYS before you modify it.
The file DCLSTYLE.SYS consists of a series of
line styles. Each line style is in the following
format:
Enables you to edit an existing line style or define
a new one.
For each type of line style component you can set
various parameters. For Shape you can choose the
actual shape and its size and spacing. For Text,
you can choose the font and angle. The Preview
window helps you see how the line style will
look; use it as a guide when adjusting the
parameters.
Line Style Name (no more than 30
characters long); Text Comment
(optional)
Number of Lines and Shapes
Line or shape definition (there
will be a separate line of values
for each line or shape)
The Number of Lines and Shapes indicates the
number of separate line segments and shapes that
make up the line style.
Line Definition values:
A. PD, PU
1) PD = length of pen down (line segment)
contact us at www.designcad.com
251
DesignCAD Reference Manual
2) PU = length of pen up (space after line
segment)
50, 10
This simple line style will look like this:
Shape Definition values:
A. [S(width, height) R(z angle) P(x,y) ;
%^%?%|Shape Name]
1) S = size of shape; original size is used if
size is not specified; if only one value is specified,
width and height are the same. (optional)
2) R = rotation; original angle is used if
rotation is not specified. (optional)
3) P = position of shape relative to the end of
the previous Line or Shape definition; if only one
value is specified, it is assigned to x. (optional)
The next example is a little more complicated.
Notice that the only thing that changed in the first
three lines between this example and the last one
are the Line Style Name and the Number of Lines
and Shapes has changed from "1" to "2." The
same long dash (50) and small space (10) are still
in the line style.
Long Dash and Star
2
NOTE: When these commands are present, Scale
should be used first, then Rotation, and finally
Position.
4) %^ = shape orientation won't be affected
by the order of points of the line. (optional)
5) %- = ignores the bold flag of the line.
(optional)
6) %| = shape does not rotate with the line
segment.
NOTE: If more than one of %^, %-, and %| are used,
there should not be a space between them.
50, 10
[P(-35,0) ; Star], 0
The additional line of the "Long Dash and Star"
line style inserts a "Star" shape (defined in the
DCSHAPE.SYS file). All of the information for
the "Star" shape is entered as the fourth line of the
"Long Dash and Star" line style [P(-35,0) ; Star],
0. The center of the star is placed so that its center
is centered on the line segment defined in the
third line of the "Long Dash and Star" line style
(-35 = 50/2+10, the value 50 = length of the
original dash; the value 10 = amount of space that
follows the dash in the line segment definition).
This line style will look like this:
7) Shape Name = shape to be used in line
style; must be defined in DCSHAPE.SYS.
The following is an example of a simple line style
that has only one line segment definition.
Long Dash
1
252
Now a more complicated line style from scratch.
DCAD
For updates and additional information,
Appendix A Custom Hatch Patterns and
2
2, 1
[; DCAD], 20
Doesn't look that complicated does it? It's really
not. It just requires that you add a shape to the
DCSHAPE.SYS file.
NOTE: Be sure that the last line of both the
DCLSTYLE.SYS and DCSHAPE.SYS is an empty
carriage return.
Custom Line Style
Shapes
The shapes that can be used by DesignCAD line
styles are found in the DCSHAPE.SYS file
located in the DesignCAD directory. You can
create your own custom shapes for use in
DesignCAD line styles by adding them to this
file. The file DCSHAPE.SYS is an ASCII file
that can be edited with a text editor or a word
processor in ASCII mode. Be sure you have a
second copy of the file DCSHAPE.SYS before
you modify it.
Each shape definition is in the following format:
Shape Name (no more than 30
characters long); Text Comment
(optional)
Commands allowed in the DCSHAPE.SYS file
are:
1) A = Three-point arc with center, starting, and
ending points
NOTE: Identical starting and ending points make a
circle.
2) C = Spline curve
3) V = Polyline
The best way to make a new shape is to record a
macro and use the Arc (Center, Begin, end),
Curve, and Line commands to draw the shape.
Once the drawing of the shape has been recorded
as a macro, you can open the macro file, delete the
information that is not needed for the
DCSHAPE.SYS file, and change the command
names to the DCSHAPE.SYS format.
Here is a portion of the recorded macro and the
equivalent portion of what was added to the
DCSHAPE.SYS file to create the DCAD shape
(in this comparison, blank lines in the DCAD
shape definition are used only to keep the code
comparison parallel; there should not be blank
lines in the actual DCSHAPE.SYS file):
>SetStartPoint DCAD
{
Command and its number of points
}
Points for command (points appear
on separate lines and consist of x
and y coordinates; x and y
coordinates may be separated by a
space or a comma)
>Line
Additional commands and points
<PointXYZ 0.0000,4.0000,0.0000
0.0000,4.0000
* (indicates the end of the shape)
v 2
{
<PointXYZ 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000
0.0000,0.0000
}
contact us at www.designcad.com
253
DesignCAD Reference Manual
>Curve
Custom Hatch Patterns
c 3
{
<PointXYZ 0.0000,4.0000,0.0000
0.0000,4.0000
<PointXYZ 1.7500,3.8000,0.0000
1.7500,3.8000
<PointXYZ 2.7500,3.0000,0.0000
2.7500,3.0000
<Type 0
}
>Line
v 2
{
<PointXYZ 2.7500,3.0000,0.0000
2.7500,3.0000
<PointXYZ 2.7500,1.0000,0.0000
2.7500,1.0000
}
>Curve
c 3
{
<PointXYZ 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000
0.0000,0.0000
<PointXYZ 1.7500,0.2000,0.0000
1.7500,0.2000
<PointXYZ 2.7500,1.0000,0.0000
2.7500,1.0000
<Type 0
}
…
…
Don't forget to end the shape definition with an
asterisk (*).
254
Some of the hatch patterns used by the Hatch,
Hatch Line, and Hatch Fill commands are found
in the file DCHATCHC.SYS. You can use your
own hatch patterns with DesignCAD by adding
them to this file. The file DCHATCHC.SYS is an
ASCII file that can be edited with a text editor or
a word processor in ASCII mode. Be sure you
have a second copy of the file DCHATCHC.SYS
before you modify it.
This file does not contain definitions for the
"non-scaleable" hatch patterns such as
WIN_SOLID. These are defined by MS
Windows.
The file DCHATCHC.SYS consists of a series of
hatch patterns. Each hatch pattern is in the
following format:
Hatch Pattern Name
Number of Line Definitions Pattern
Scale for Preview
A
B
C
D
E
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
(there will be a line of these values for each line
definition)
The Number of Line Definitions indicates the
number of separate line segments that make up
the pattern. The Pattern Scale for Preview is the
pattern scale that particular hatch pattern uses in
the Preview box.
Line Definitions values:
A. Angle (0=horizontal, 90=vertical)
B. X offset of first occurrence (relative to an
arbitrary starting point)
C. Y offset of first occurrence (relative to an
arbitrary starting point)
For updates and additional information,
Appendix A Custom Hatch Patterns and
D. X change from first to second occurrence.
(relative to B,C)
A more complicated example is the BRICK2
pattern:
E. Y change from first to second occurrence.
(relative to B,C)
BRICK2
4
20
F. six numbers defining the line pattern:
0
0
0
7
6
13 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
7
6
13 1
0
0
0
0
90 0
0
6
7
5
7
0
0
0
0
90 0
1
6
7
5
7
0
0
0
0
1) length on
2) length off
3) length on
This pattern consists of 4 lines, 2 horizontal, and
2 vertical.
4) length off
5) length on
6) length off
"X" and "Y" are relative to the angle of the line.
This means that if the angle is 90, then X is
actually the relative vertical displacement, and Y
is the relative horizontal displacement.
For example, the hatch pattern definition for the
BRASS pattern is:
BRASS
2
45
0
0
0
0
20 40 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10 0
20 10 5
0
0
0
0
The first line is a horizontal, dashed line,
repeating 13 on, and 1 off. It starts at 0,0, and will
repeat at 7 units over and 6 units up. The second
line is the same as the first, except that it starts 5
units above the first line.
The third line is a vertical line, starting at 0,0,
repeating with 5 on and 7 off. Note that since it is
vertical, the line actually repeats at 7 over and 6
up, not 6 over and 7 up. Because the fourth line is
at a 90 degree angle, it starts at 1 unit to the left of
the starting point.
If viewed by themselves, the four line segments
will look something like this:
There are two lines in the pattern. The first line
definition is oriented at an angle of zero, so it is a
horizontal line. It is a solid line, since there is only
one non-zero value in the last six numbers. This
first line starts at 0, 0 (an arbitrary position), and
it will repeat 20 "units" above this line. This line
ends 40 "units" from this starting point.
The next line is also a horizontal line, but it starts
10 units above the first line. It is a dashed line,
repeating a pattern of 10 "on" and 5 "off."
contact us at www.designcad.com
255
DesignCAD Reference Manual
256
For updates and additional information,
Index
Numerics
2D selection mode . . . 183, . . . 185
3 point arc . . . 104
3 point circle . . . 111
3D cursor . . . 27
3D Editing . . . 134
3D selection mode . . . 183, . . . 186
4 point copy . . . 206
4 point move . . . 206
A
About DesignCAD . . . 19
Accelerator keys . . . 16
Aerial View . . . 48
Align Drawing . . . 52
Alignment of objects . . . 214
Allow saving empty drawings . . . 42
Ambient . . . 150
Angle & distance between points . . .
237
Angle between two lines . . . 239
Angle constraint mode . . . 10
Angle dimensions . . . 163
Angles . . . 36
Animation . . . 154
Anti-aliasing . . . 148
Arc command . . . 102
Arc dimensions . . . 164
Architectural units . . . 5
Arcs . . . 102
3 point . . . 104
Arc . . . 102
Center begin end . . . 105
Elliptical . . . 108
Elliptical (center axes angle) . . .
109
Endpoints center . . . 105
Quarter circle . . . 107
Radius, begin end . . . 103
Semi circle . . . 107
Tangent . . . 106
contact us at www.designcad.com
Area measurement . . . 235
Arrange Icons . . . 51
Array . . . 215
Circular array . . . 218
Arrow . . . 95
Arrowhead (dimensions) . . . 162
ASCII files . . . 26
Attribute . . . 177
Attribute definition . . . 178
Auto dimensions . . . 171
Auto Trace Bitmap . . . 59
Auto trim . . . 88
Automatic Rendering . . . 65
Automatic save . . . 35
B
Background color . . . 28
Backup files . . . 35
BAK files . . . 35
Balloon . . . 179
Baseline dimensions . . . 167
Batch convert . . . 26
Batch Print . . . 70
Bearing measurement . . . 236
Bezier curve . . . 96
Bitmaps . . . 34
Bitmaps (drawing preview) . . . 34
Block define . . . 241
Block insert . . . 242
Blocks . . . 241
Boolean operations
3D . . . 134
Box . . . 120
Break line . . . 209
Breaking . . . 227
C
Calculator . . . 12
Cap . . . 88
Caps . . . 91
Cascade . . . 51
Center begin end arc . . . 105
Center mark . . . 171
Center of gravity snap . . . 81
Center outside circle . . . 110
Center radius circle . . . 112
Chamfer . . . 224
Chamfer dimensions . . . 164
Circles . . . 109
3 point . . . 111
Center outside . . . 110
Center radius . . . 112
Diameter . . . 110
Ellipse . . . 114
Tangent to 2 lines . . . 112
Tangent to 3 lines . . . 113
Circular array . . . 218
Clipboard . . . 197
Close all files . . . 23
Close file . . . 23
Color by layer . . . 192
Color options . . . 28
Colors . . . 6, . . . 192
Custom colors . . . 29
Combine lines . . . 209
Command line . . . 17
Commands . . . 15
Cone . . . 122
Configuring the screen . . . 15
Connect surface . . . 133
Construction line . . . 102
Construction planes . . . 140
Contour line . . . 101
Contrast . . . 150
Convert to double line . . . 202
Converting entities . . . 228
Converting to a multiline . . . 93
Coordinate bar . . . 41
Coordinate dimensions . . . 167
Coordinate system . . . 35
Coordinates
Locking . . . 76
Copy . . . 198, . . . 203
257
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Copy image . . . 199
Create Digitizer Menu . . . 53
Create View Frame
View frame . . . 61
Cross section . . . 138
Crosshair . . . 7, . . . 27
Cursor . . . 7
Cursor options . . . 27
Curve command . . . 96
Bezier . . . 96
Curve to line . . . 229
Custom angle . . . 85
Customizing
Colors . . . 29
Coordinate bar . . . 41
Hatch patterns . . . 182, . . . 254
Keyboard . . . 32
Line style shapes . . . 253
Line styles . . . 251
Menu . . . 30
Prompts . . . 31
Toolboxes . . . 33, . . . 40
Cut . . . 197
Cut corner . . . 226
Cut edge . . . 227
Cut plane . . . 228
Cylinder . . . 122
D
Degrees plus / minus . . . 85
Delete . . . 199
DesignCAD workspace . . . 12
Diameter circle . . . 110
Diameter dimensions . . . 165
Diffuse . . . 150
Digitizer . . . 52
Dimension command . . . 160
Dimensions . . . 159
Angles . . . 163
Arc . . . 164
Arrowhead . . . 162
Auto dimensions . . . 171
Baseline . . . 167
Center mark . . . 171
Chamfer . . . 164
258
Coordinate . . . 167
Diameter . . . 165
Dimension . . . 160
Distance only . . . 170
Extended . . . 168
Extension . . . 162
Prefix/Suffix . . . 162
Progressive . . . 169
Radius . . . 166
Radius Progressive . . . 170
Text . . . 161
Tolerancing . . . 163
Units . . . 171
Direct print . . . 35
Display grid . . . 9
Display order . . . 214
Distance only dimensions . . . 170
Dividing . . . 227
Door . . . 248
Double line
Convert to double line . . . 202
Double line objects . . . 87
Double line to plane . . . 230
Double line to wide line . . . 231
Doughnut shape . . . 123
Draw Outline Box . . . 62
Drawing handles . . . 243
Drawing Info . . . 43
Duplicate . . . 203
Duplicate to layer . . . 204
DWG files . . . 24, . . . 25
DXF files . . . 24, . . . 25
E
Editing Multilines . . . 90
Ellipse . . . 114
Ellipsoid . . . 128
Elliptical arc . . . 108
Elliptical arc (center axes angles) . . .
109
Emission . . . 150
Enable anti-aliasing . . . 148
Enable direct print . . . 35
Enable fogging . . . 148
Enable graphics acceleration . . . 34, .
. . 148
Enable multilayer editing . . . 38
Enable off-screen bitmap . . . 34
Enable right-click popup menu . . . 35
Enable saving BAK files . . . 35
Enable sticky handles . . . 35
Enable units multiplier . . . 161
End caps . . . 88
Endpoints center arc . . . 105
Engineering units . . . 5
Erase . . . 199
Erase last . . . 199
Executable . . . 57
Executing macros . . . 57
Explode . . . 229
Group explode . . . 241
Solid . . . 139
Export file . . . 24
Extend . . . 222
Extend by distance . . . 223
Extended dimensions . . . 168
Extending . . . 219
Extension (dimensions) . . . 162
Extrude along a curve surface . . . 132
Extrude surface . . . 130
F
Fast print . . . 35
File commands
Close . . . 23
Close All . . . 23
Export . . . 24
Import . . . 25
New . . . 20
Open . . . 21
Save . . . 22
Save a copy . . . 23
Save As . . . 22
Send . . . 23
File export lock . . . 38
File location options . . . 33
Fillet . . . 225
Fillet corner . . . 225
Fillet edge . . . 226
Fit to All Windows . . . 44
For updates and additional information,
Index
Fit to Window . . . 43
Fixed cursor . . . 28
Fixed text . . . 161
Flat Shading . . . 144
Flatten . . . 42
Fogging . . . 148
Four point copy . . . 206
Four point move . . . 206
Freehand . . . 95
Functions . . . 15
G
General options . . . 34
Geographical angles . . . 36
Gouraud . . . 147
Graphics
See Images
Graphics acceleration . . . 34, . . . 148
Gravity move . . . 84
Gravity points . . . 78
Grid
Color . . . 28
Isometric . . . 36
Options . . . 36
Polar . . . 36
Grid center . . . 9
Group define . . . 241
Group explode . . . 241
Group object when created . . . 35
Groups . . . 241
H
Hammer . . . 140
Handles . . . 213
Hatch . . . 180
Customizing . . . 254
Hatch fill . . . 181
Hatch line . . . 181
Hatch pattern position . . . 181
Help . . . 19
Hemisphere . . . 121
Hidden edge . . . 146
Hidden edge by section . . . 146
Hidden line mode . . . 145
contact us at www.designcad.com
Hidden line removal . . . 145
Hiding layers . . . 37
Hotkeys . . . 16
HPGL files . . . 25, . . . 26, . . . 41
Hyperlink . . . 182
I
Icons . . . 34
IGES files . . . 25, . . . 26
Ignore drawing view date . . . 21
Images . . . 58
Tracing . . . 59
Import files . . . 25
Batch convert . . . 26
Importing images
Info box . . . 194
Inserting blocks . . . 242
Interference check . . . 139
Interruptible snap . . . 8
Intersect-1 snap . . . 79
Intersect-2 snap . . . 80
J
Join endpoints . . . 223
K
Keyboard options . . . 32
Keyboard shortcuts . . . 16
L
Large step size . . . 28
Layer options . . . 37
Layout (paper space) . . . 65
Left-hand coordinate system . . . 35
Library of symbols . . . 246
Line command . . . 93
Line connect . . . 201
Line cut . . . 202
Line distance . . . 235
Line plane snap . . . 80
Line snap . . . 79
Line split by distance . . . 200
Line split by points . . . 200
Line style . . . 193
Customizing . . . 251
Line style by layer . . . 193
Line to curve . . . 229
Lines . . . 87, . . . 90
Arrow . . . 95
Bezier curve . . . 96
Construction . . . 102
Contour . . . 101
Curve . . . 96
Double lines . . . 87
Editing . . . 200
Line . . . 93
Ortho line . . . 93
Ortho line-2 . . . 94
Parallel . . . 97
Parallel by distance . . . 98
Perpendicular . . . 98, . . . 99
Sketch . . . 95
Surface intersection . . . 101
Tangent . . . 99, . . . 100
Load DesignCAD workspace . . . 15
Load Digitizer Menu . . . 54
Load symbol . . . 245
Location for non-centered print . . . 41
Locking coordinates
Points
Locking coordinates . . . 76
M
Macros . . . 55
Executing . . . 57
Record Options . . . 56
Recording . . . 55
Make plane . . . 228
Material list . . . 179
Materials . . . 149
Mathematical angles . . . 36
Measuring . . . 235
Angle & distance between points
. . . 237
Angle between two lines . . . 239
Area . . . 235
Bearing . . . 236
Line distance . . . 235
259
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Surface area . . . 239
Volume . . . 240
Menu . . . 16
Menu options . . . 30
Merge Layer 0 entities . . . 42
Midpoint snap . . . 81
Midpoint2 snap . . . 81
Mirror . . . 204
Move . . . 205
Multilayer editing . . . 38
MultiLine . . . 88
Multiline Properties . . . 92
Multiline styles . . . 89
N
New file . . . 20
New Window . . . 49
Numeric format . . . 33
O
Object alignment . . . 214
Off-screen bitmap . . . 34
Open file . . . 21
Optimize plot line direction . . . 41
Options . . . 27
Color . . . 28
Cursor . . . 27
File location . . . 33
General . . . 34
Grid . . . 36
Keyboard . . . 32
Layer . . . 37
Menu . . . 30
Toolbox . . . 40
View . . . 33
Origin point . . . 82
Original Size . . . 48
Ortho . . . 209
Ortho line . . . 93
Ortho line-2 . . . 94
Orthogonal mode . . . 10
Outline box . . . 62
Overshoot . . . 163
260
P
Page setup . . . 72
Pan . . . 44
Panel options . . . 68
Panes . . . 49
Paper options . . . 69
Paper space layout . . . 65
Paper Space Mode . . . 61
Paper Space template . . . 20
Parallel by distance . . . 98
Parallel line . . . 97
Parallelogram . . . 117
Paste . . . 198
Patch surface . . . 132
Perpendicular line . . . 98, . . . 99
Perpendicular plane . . . 118
Phong . . . 147
Pictures
See Images
Pipe . . . 124
Plane command . . . 115
Plane snap . . . 79
Planes . . . 115
Make plane . . . 228
Parallelogram . . . 117
Perpendicular . . . 118
Plane . . . 115
Polygon (center-vertex) . . . 117
Polygon (edge) . . . 116
Point Control . . . 85
Point move . . . 223
Point select mode . . . 186
Pointmark . . . 77
Settings . . . 15
Points . . . 75, . . . 78
Center of gravity . . . 81
Color . . . 28
Coordinates
Coordinates . . . 75
Gravity . . . 78
Gravity move . . . 84
Intersect-1 . . . 79
Intersect-2 . . . 80
Line plane . . . 80
Line snap . . . 79
Midpoint . . . 81
Midpoint2 . . . 81
Origin . . . 82
Plane snap . . . 79
Point Polar . . . 83
Point Relative . . . 83
Point XYZ . . . 82
Pointmark . . . 77
Setting points . . . 75
Tangent . . . 82
Tickmark . . . 77
Polar point . . . 83
Polygon (center-vertex) . . . 117
Polygon (edge) . . . 116
Polygon add . . . 231
Polygon exclusive or . . . 232
Polygon intersect . . . 232
Polygon selection . . . 192
Polygon subtract . . . 231
Popup menu . . . 35
Precision . . . 35
Preferences . . . 41
Prefix (dimensions) . . . 162
Preset point mode . . . 188
Preview bitmap . . . 34
Print by Layer Order . . . 42
Print preview . . . 71
Printing . . . 66
Batch printing . . . 70
Page setup . . . 72
Program options
See Options
Progressive dimensions . . . 169
Prompts . . . 31
Properties . . . 192
Colors . . . 192
Info box . . . 194
Line style . . . 193
Pulldown menu . . . 16
Pullout . . . 180
Purge unused blocks . . . 243
Pyramid . . . 125
Q
Quarter circle . . . 107
For updates and additional information,
Index
Quick hidden line mode . . . 144
Quick shading . . . 147
R
Radius begin end arc . . . 103
Radius dimensions . . . 166
Radius progressive dimensions . . .
170
Recent file list . . . 35
Recording macros . . . 55
Redo . . . 197
Refresh . . . 49
Regenerate . . . 49
Relative point . . . 83
Resizing handles . . . 189
RIB files . . . 25
Right-click popup . . . 35
Right-hand coordinate system . . . 35
Rotate . . . 210
Rounded box . . . 126
Rounded cylinder . . . 127
Rubber band color . . . 28
Ruler . . . 6
Ruler settings . . . 34
Run Executable . . . 57
Running snaps . . . 8
S
Save (automatic) . . . 35
Save a copy . . . 23
Save As . . . 22
Save as symbol . . . 244
Save current view . . . 143
Save file . . . 22
Scale . . . 211
Scan image . . . 59
Scheme (color) . . . 28
Screen configuration . . . 15
Section copy . . . 198
Section cut by line . . . 234
Section cutoff . . . 234
Section delete . . . 233
Segment . . . 227
Select all . . . 189
contact us at www.designcad.com
Select entity . . . 190
Select next . . . 190
Select previous . . . 190
Select Scanner Source . . . 59
Selecting . . . 183
2D selection mode . . . 185
3D selection mode . . . 186
Polygon selection . . . 192
Select all . . . 189
Select entity . . . 190
Select next . . . 190
Select Previous . . . 190
Selection filter . . . 191
Selection edit . . . 203
Selection edit zoom . . . 212
Selection filter . . . 191
Semi circle . . . 107
Send file . . . 23
Set grid center . . . 9
Set handles . . . 213
Set prompt . . . 31
Set view . . . 143
Set view by drawing center . . . 143
Setting point . . . 75
Setup DesignCAD workspace . . . 12
Shading . . . 147
Flat shading . . . 144
Smooth . . . 144
Show all edges . . . 147
Show drawing handles . . . 244
Sketch . . . 95
Skew . . . 212
Skip font data . . . 42
Slice . . . 137
Slice by curved surface . . . 138
Small step size . . . 28
Smooth line by point reduction . . .
206
Smooth line by slope detection . . .
207
Smooth options . . . 208
Smooth shading . . . 144
Snap grid . . . 10, . . . 36
Snap points . . . 78
Center of gravity . . . 81
Gravity . . . 78
Intersect-1 . . . 79
Intersect-2 . . . 80
Line plane . . . 80
Line snap . . . 79
Midpoint . . . 81
Midpoint2 . . . 81
Plane snap . . . 79
Tangent . . . 82
Snap preview . . . 10
Snap Settings . . . 43
Snap toolbox . . . 7
Solid Add . . . 134
Solid define . . . 139
Solid exclusive or . . . 136
Solid explode . . . 139
Solid interference check . . . 139
Solid Intersect . . . 135
Solid segregate . . . 137
Solid Subtract . . . 135
Solids . . . 120
Box . . . 120
Cone . . . 122
Cylinder . . . 122
Ellipsoid . . . 128
Hemisphere . . . 121
Pyramid . . . 125
Rounded box . . . 126
Rounded cylinder . . . 127
Sphere . . . 120
Torus . . . 123
Truncated cone . . . 125
Tube . . . 124
Wall . . . 127
Specular . . . 150
Sphere . . . 120
Split by distance . . . 200
Split by points . . . 200
Step size . . . 28
Sticky handles . . . 35
Stretch . . . 233
Suffix (dimensions) . . . 162
Surface area measurement . . . 239
Surface connect . . . 133
Surface intersection line . . . 101
Surface patch . . . 132
Surfaces . . . 129
261
DesignCAD Reference Manual
Extrude . . . 130
Extrude along a curve . . . 132
See also Planes
Surface connect . . . 133
Surface patch . . . 132
Sweep . . . 129
Sweep surface . . . 129
Symbol Explode Settings . . . 42
Symbol library . . . 246
Symbol load/merge lock . . . 39
Symbols . . . 243
System requirements . . . 1
T
Tangent arc . . . 106
Tangent circle . . . 112
Tangent line . . . 99, . . . 100
Tangent snap . . . 82
Technical support . . . 2
Text . . . 173
Dimensions . . . 161
Text Arc . . . 176
Text block . . . 175
Text convert . . . 230
Text files . . . 26
Texture mapping . . . 151
Texture type, scale . . . 150
Three point arc . . . 104
Three point circle . . . 111
Tickmark . . . 77
Tile . . . 49
Time line . . . 155
Tip of the day . . . 19
Tolerancing (dimensions) . . . 163
Toobox options . . . 40
Toolbars
See Toolboxes
Toolboxes . . . 16, . . . 33
Tools . . . 15
Tooltips . . . 34
Torus . . . 123
Tracing images . . . 59
Tracing mode . . . 52
Transparency . . . 150
Trim between two lines . . . 221
262
Trim double lines . . . 221
Trim multiple lines . . . 222
Trim one line . . . 219
Trim two lines . . . 220
Trimming . . . 219
Truncate end zeros . . . 161
Truncated cone . . . 125
Tube . . . 124
U
WWW link . . . 182
X
XYZ Point . . . 82
Z
Zooming . . . 45
Selection edit . . . 212
UI . . . 3
Undo . . . 197
Units
Dimensions . . . 171
Units multiplier . . . 161
Units of measurement . . . 3
Use resizing handles . . . 189
User interface . . . 3
V
Vector convert . . . 230
Vertical Offset . . . 130
View options . . . 33
Views . . . 43
3D . . . 142
Save current view . . . 143
Visibility (Layers) . . . 37
Volume measurement . . . 240
VRML files . . . 25
VRML WWW Anchor . . . 182
W
Walk through . . . 156
Wall . . . 127
Weld . . . 229
Wide line . . . 231
Window . . . 248
Windows . . . 49
Windows clipboard . . . 197
Wireframe . . . 144
WMF files . . . 25, . . . 26
Working planes . . . 140
Workspace . . . 12
WPG files . . . 25
For updates and additional information,
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement